GUITAR CENTER INC
POS AM, 1997-04-23
RADIO, TV & CONSUMER ELECTRONICS STORES
Previous: COMPURAD INC, DEF 14A, 1997-04-23
Next: MAS ACQUISITION I CORP, 10KSB, 1997-04-23



<PAGE>
   
     AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON APRIL 23, 1997
    
 
   
                                                      REGISTRATION NO. 333-10491
    
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
   
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
    
                            ------------------------
 
   
                         POST-EFFECTIVE AMENDMENT NO. 1
                                       TO
    
   
                                    FORM S-1
    
   
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
    
   
                                     UNDER
    
   
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
    
                            ------------------------
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
    
   
             (EXACT NAME OF REGISTRANT AS SPECIFIED IN ITS CHARTER)
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                              <C>                              <C>
           DELAWARE                           5733                          95-4600862
 (State or other jurisdiction     (Primary Standard Industrial           (I.R.S. Employer
              of                  Classification Code Number)         Identification Number)
incorporation or organization)
</TABLE>
    
 
                            ------------------------
 
   
                              5155 CLARETON DRIVE
                         AGOURA HILLS, CALIFORNIA 91301
    
   
                                 (818) 735-8800
    
   
  (Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of
                   registrant's principal executive offices)
    
                            ------------------------
 
   
                                   BRUCE ROSS
                   VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                              5155 CLARETON DRIVE
                         AGOURA HILLS, CALIFORNIA 91301
                                 (818) 735-8800
    
   
 (Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code,
                             of agent for service)
    
                            ------------------------
 
   
                                   COPIES TO:
    
   
                              Anthony J. Richmond
                                Latham & Watkins
                       633 West Fifth Street, Suite 4000
                         Los Angeles, California 90071
                                 (213) 485-1234
    
                            ------------------------
 
   
        APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO THE PUBLIC:
  AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE AFTER THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT BECOMES EFFECTIVE.
    
                            ------------------------
 
   
    If  any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on
a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to  Rule 415 under the Securities Act  of
1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), check the following box. / /
    
   
    If  this Form  is filed  to register  additional securities  for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box
and list  the  Securities  Act  registration statement  number  of  the  earlier
effective registration statement for the
same offering. / /
    
- --------------
   
    If  this Form  is a post-effective  amendment filed pursuant  to Rule 462(b)
under the Securities Act, check the following box
and list  the Securities  Act registration  statement of  the earlier  effective
registration statement for the same
offering. / /
    
- --------------
   
    If  delivery of the prospectus  is expected to be  made pursuant to Rule 434
under the Securities Act, please check the following box. / /
    
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
   
                                  $66,667,000
    
 
   
   [LOGO]
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
    
   
                           11% SENIOR NOTES DUE 2006
    
 
                               ------------------
 
   
    The  11% Senior Notes due  2006 (the "Notes") were  issued by Guitar Center,
Inc. ("Guitar Center"  or the "Company")  pursuant to an  Indenture (as  defined
herein).  As of  the date  of this  Prospectus, there  are $66,667,000 aggregate
principal  amount  of  Notes  outstanding.  The  Notes  are  general,  unsecured
obligations  of the Company.  The Notes rank  senior in right  of payment to all
subordinated indebtedness of the Company and PARI PASSU in right of payment with
all  other  senior  indebtedness  of   the  Company,  including  the   Company's
outstanding  indebtedness under the 1996 Credit Facility (as defined herein), as
in place on the date  hereof. The 1996 Credit  Facility, upon the occurrence  of
certain  events,  will be  secured by  substantially  all of  the assets  of the
Company. The  Company  may  borrow  up to  $25,000,000  under  the  1996  Credit
Facility, as in place on the date hereof, and could borrow additional amounts if
and  when it enters into a secured successor bank facility which it is currently
negotiating. See "Description of  the 1996 Credit Facility."  As of the date  of
this Prospectus, the Company has no outstanding Indebtedness (as defined herein)
other than the Notes.
    
 
   
    The  Notes mature on July 1, 2006. Interest  on the Notes is payable in cash
semi-annually on January 1 and July 1 of each year. The Company is not  required
to  make any mandatory  redemption or sinking  fund payment with  respect to the
Notes prior to maturity. The Notes are redeemable at the option of the  Company,
in  whole or in  part, on or  after July 1,  2001, at the  redemption prices set
forth herein,  plus  accrued  and  unpaid  interest, if  any,  to  the  date  of
redemption.  Upon  a  Change of  Control  (as  defined herein),  the  Company is
required to  make  an irrevocable  and  unconditional offer  to  repurchase  all
outstanding  Notes  at  101% of  the  aggregate principal  amount  thereof, plus
accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the date of repurchase. See "Description
of Notes."
    
 
   
    This Prospectus may be used  by Chase Securities Inc. ("Chase  Securities"),
in connection with offers and sales related to market-making transactions in the
Notes. Chase Securities may act as principal or agent in such transactions. Such
sales  will be made at prices related to prevailing market prices at the time of
sale. See "Plan of Distribution."
    
 
   
    SEE "RISK FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE 10 FOR CERTAIN CONSIDERATIONS  RELEVANT
TO AN INVESTMENT IN THE NOTES.
    
                             ---------------------
 
   
 THESE  SECURITIES HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED OR DISAPPROVED BY THE SECURITIES AND
  EXCHANGE  COMMISSION  OR  ANY  STATE  SECURITIES  COMMISSION  NOR  HAS  THE
   SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION OR ANY  STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION
     PASSED  UPON   THE   ACCURACY   OR  ADEQUACY   OF   THIS   PROSPECTUS.
      ANY   REPRESENTATION  TO   THE  CONTRARY  IS   A  CRIMINAL  OFFENSE.
    
 
                            ------------------------
 
   
                 The date of this Prospectus is April 23, 1997.
    
<PAGE>
   
                             ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
    
 
   
    The  Company  has filed  with the  Securities  and Exchange  Commission (the
"Commission") in Washington, D.C. a Registration Statement on Form S-1, File No.
333-10491 (as amended, the "Registration Statement") under the Securities Act of
1933, as  amended (the  "Securuties  Act") with  respect  to the  Notes  offered
hereby. This Prospectus does not contain all of the information set forth in the
Registration  Statement  and the  exhibits  and schedules  thereto.  For further
information with respect to the Company and the Notes, reference is hereby  made
to   such  Registration  Statement  and  the  exhibits  and  schedules  thereto.
Statements contained in this  Prospectus as to the  contents of any contract  or
other  document are not necessarily complete  and in each instance, reference is
made to  the copy  of such  contract or  documents filed  as an  exhibit to  the
Registration  Statement, each such statement being  qualified in all respects by
such reference. The Registration Statement, including the exhibits and schedules
thereto, may  be  inspected  and  copied  at  the  public  reference  facilities
maintained  by the Commission at 450  Fifth Street, N.W., Room 1024, Washington,
D.C. 20549 and at certain regional offices of the Commission located at 75  Park
Place,  14th Floor, New  York, New York  10007 and Northwest  Atrium Center, 500
Madison Street, Suite 1400,  Chicago, Illinois 60661.  Copies of such  materials
can be obtained from the Public Reference Section of the Commission at 450 Fifth
Street,  N.W.,  Room  1025, Washington,  D.C.  20549, at  prescribed  rates. The
Commission maintains a World Wide  Web site at http://www.sec.gov that  contains
reports,  proxy  and  information  statements  and  other  information regarding
registrants that  filed  electronically  with the  Commission.  The  Company  is
currently subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act of 1934,
as  amended (the  "Exchange Act") and,  in accordance  therewith, files reports,
proxy and information statements with the Commission. The Company is required by
the terms of  the Indenture  to furnish to  the applicable  trustee or  transfer
agent  and the  holder(s) of  the Notes  annual reports  containing consolidated
financial statements audited by its independent certified public accounts,  with
quarterly   reports  containing   unaudited  condensed   consolidated  financial
statements for each of  the first three  quarters of each  fiscal year and  with
current reports on Form 8-K.
    
 
                                       2
<PAGE>
   
                                    SUMMARY
    
 
   
    THE FOLLOWING SUMMARY IS QUALIFIED IN ITS ENTIRETY BY, AND SHOULD BE READ IN
CONJUNCTION  WITH, THE MORE  DETAILED INFORMATION, INCLUDING  "RISK FACTORS" AND
THE COMPANY'S FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS AND  NOTES THERETO,  APPEARING ELSEWHERE  IN
THIS  PROSPECTUS.  EXCEPT WHERE  OTHERWISE  SPECIFIED, THE  INFORMATION  IN THIS
PROSPECTUS GIVES EFFECT  TO THE  FOLLOWING EVENTS:  (I) A  100-TO-1 STOCK  SPLIT
EFFECTUATED  ON JUNE  5, 1996;  (II) THE REINCORPORATION  OF THE  COMPANY FROM A
CALIFORNIA TO A DELAWARE CORPORATION, EFFECTUATED  ON OCTOBER 11, 1996; (III)  A
2.582-TO-1  STOCK SPLIT EFFECTUATED ON JANUARY  15, 1997; AND (IV) THE MANDATORY
CONVERSION OF EACH  OUTSTANDING SHARE  OF 8%  JUNIOR PREFERRED  STOCK, $.01  PAR
VALUE (THE "JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK"), OF THE COMPANY INTO 6.667 SHARES OF COMMON
STOCK,  $.01  PAR  VALUE  PER  SHARE  ("COMMON  STOCK"),  OF  THE  COMPANY  UPON
CONSUMMATION OF THE COMPANY'S INITIAL PUBLIC OFFERING ON MARCH 19, 1997.
    
 
   
                            MARKET-MAKING PROSPECTUS
    
 
   
    This Prospectus may be  used by Chase Securities  in connection with  offers
and  sales related to transactions that  stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect
the price of the Notes offered hereby. Chase Securities may act as principal  or
agent  in  such transactions.  Such  sales will  be  made at  prices  related to
prevailing market prices at the time of sale. See "Plan of Distribution."
    
 
   
                                  THE COMPANY
    
 
   
    Guitar Center  is  a leading  retailer  of guitars,  amplifiers,  percussion
instruments,  keyboards and  pro audio  and recording  equipment with  28 stores
operating in 15  major U.S. markets  as of December  31, 1996, including,  among
others,  areas in or  near Los Angeles, San  Francisco, Chicago, Miami, Houston,
Dallas, Detroit, Boston and Minneapolis.  From fiscal 1992 through fiscal  1996,
the  Company's  net  sales  and operating  income  before  deferred compensation
expense grew at  compound annual rates  of 25.6% and  43.0%, respectively.  This
growth  was principally  the result  of strong  and consistent  comparable store
sales growth,  averaging 14.8%  per year  over such  five-year period,  and  the
opening of 13 new stores.
    
 
   
    Guitar Center offers a unique retail concept in the music products industry,
combining  an interactive,  hands-on shopping experience  with superior customer
service and a broad selection of brand name, high-quality products at guaranteed
low prices. The Company creates an  entertaining and exciting atmosphere in  its
stores  with bold and dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted by bright,
multi-colored lighting,  high ceilings,  music and  videos. Management  believes
that  approximately 80% of the Company's  sales are to professional and aspiring
musicians who  generally  view  the  purchase of  music  products  as  a  career
necessity.  These sophisticated customers rely  upon the Company's knowledgeable
and highly trained salespeople  to answer technical questions  and to assist  in
product demonstrations.
    
 
   
    The  Guitar Center prototype  store generally ranges in  size from 12,000 to
15,000 square feet (as compared to  a typical music products retail store  which
averages approximately 3,200 square feet) and is designed to encourage customers
to  hold and play instruments. Each store carries an average of 7,000 core stock
keeping units ("SKUs"), which management believes is significantly greater  than
a  typical music products retail store,  and is organized into five departments,
each focused on one  product category. These departments  cater to a  musician's
specific  product needs and are staffed by specialized salespeople, many of whom
are practicing musicians. Management believes this retail concept differentiates
the Company from its competitors and encourages repeat business.
    
 
   
    Guitar Center stores historically have generated strong and stable operating
results. All  of the  Company's stores,  after being  open for  at least  twelve
months,  have had positive store-level operating income in each of the past five
fiscal years.
    
 
                                       3
<PAGE>
   
    The following summarizes certain key operating statistics of a Guitar Center
store and is based upon the 21 stores operated by the Company for the full  year
ended December 31, 1996:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                              <C>
Average 1996 net sales per square foot.........................  $      707
Average 1996 net sales per store...............................   9,148,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income (1)..................   1,402,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income margin (1)...........       15.3%
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Store-level  operating income includes individual store revenue and expenses
    plus allocated rebates,  cash discounts and  purchasing department  salaries
    (based upon individual store sales).
    
 
   
    The  United States retail market for music products in 1995 was estimated in
a study by MUSIC TRADES magazine to be approximately $5.5 billion in net  sales,
representing a five-year compound annual growth rate of 7.9%. Products currently
offered  by  Guitar  Center include  categories  of products  which  account for
approximately $4.0 billion  of this  market, representing  a five-year  compound
annual  growth rate of 8.6%. The industry is highly fragmented with the nation's
leading five  music products  retailers (as  measured by  the number  of  stores
operated  by such retailers) accounting for approximately 8.4% of the industry's
estimated net sales in  1995. Furthermore, approximately  90% of the  industry's
estimated  8,200 retailers operate only one  or two stores. The Company believes
that it  benefits  from  several advantages  relative  to  smaller  competitors,
including  volume  purchasing  discounts, centralized  operations  and financial
controls, advertising economies and the ability to offer an extremely broad  and
deep selection of merchandise.
    
 
   
    For  the fiscal years  ended December 31,  1994, 1995 and  1996, the Company
recorded net income (loss) of $8.8  million, $10.9 million and ($72.4)  million,
respectively.  The results for 1996 reflect  $11.6 million for transaction costs
and financing fees incurred in connection with the Recapitalization (as  defined
herein)  and  non-recurring  deferred  compensation  expense  of  $71.8 million,
substantially all of which related to the Recapitalization.
    
 
   
                               BUSINESS STRATEGY
    
 
   
    EXPANSION STRATEGY.  Guitar  Center's expansion strategy  is to continue  to
increase  its market  share in existing  markets and  to penetrate strategically
selected new markets.  The Company plans  to continue pursuing  its strategy  of
clustering   stores  in  major  markets  to  take  advantage  of  operating  and
advertising efficiencies and to enhance awareness  of the Guitar Center name  in
new  markets.  The Company  opened seven  stores in  fiscal 1996,  and currently
anticipates opening or acquiring  approximately eight stores  in each of  fiscal
1997  and 1998. In the  first four months of 1997,  the Company opened three new
stores and acquired two existing stores  from a third party. In preparation  for
this  expansion, management  has dedicated  substantial resources  over the past
several years to building the infrastructure and management information  systems
necessary  to support a large national  chain. In addition, the Company believes
that it has developed a methodology for targeting prospective store sites  which
includes  analyzing demographic  and psychographic  characteristics of potential
store  locations.  Management  also  believes  that  there  may  be   attractive
opportunities  to  expand  by  selectively  acquiring  existing  music  products
retailers.
    
 
   
    EXTENSIVE SELECTION  OF  MERCHANDISE.   Guitar  Center offers  an  extensive
selection  of brand  name music products  complemented by lesser  known, hard to
find items and  unique vintage equipment.  The average 7,000  core SKUs  offered
through  each Guitar Center store provide a  breadth and depth of in-stock items
which management  believes  is not  available  from traditional  music  products
retailers.
    
 
   
    HIGHLY  INTERACTIVE, MUSICIAN-FRIENDLY  STORE CONCEPT.   Each  Guitar Center
store contains  creative  instrument  presentations  and  colorful,  interactive
displays which encourage the customer to hold and play instruments as well as to
participate  in  product demonstrations.  In addition,  private sound-controlled
rooms  enhance  a   customer's  listening  experience   while  testing   various
instruments.
    
 
                                       4
<PAGE>
   
    EXCEPTIONAL  CUSTOMER  SERVICE.   The  Company  conducts  extensive training
programs for  its salespeople,  who  specialize in  one  of the  Company's  five
product  categories. Many of the Company's  salespeople are also musicians. With
the advances in technology and continuous new product introductions in the music
products industry, customers increasingly rely on qualified salespeople to offer
expert advice and assist in product demonstrations. Management believes that its
emphasis on training and customer  service distinguishes the Company within  the
industry and is a critical part of Guitar Center's success.
    
 
   
    INNOVATIVE  PROMOTIONAL  AND  MARKETING PROGRAMS.    Guitar  Center sponsors
innovative   promotional   and   marketing   events   which   include   in-store
demonstrations,  famous  artist  appearances  and  weekend  themed  sales events
designed to  create significant  store traffic  and exposure.  In addition,  the
Company's  special  grand  opening activities  in  new markets  are  designed to
generate consumer awareness for each  new store. Management believes that  these
events  help  the  Company build  a  loyal  customer base  and  encourage repeat
business. Since its inception,  the Company has  compiled a unique,  proprietary
database  containing  information  on  more  than  one  million  customers. This
database enables Guitar Center to advertise to select target customers based  on
historical buying patterns.
    
 
   
    GUARANTEED  LOW PRICES.  Guitar Center endeavors  to be the low price leader
in each of its markets which is underscored by a 30-day low price guarantee. The
Company's size permits it to take advantage of volume discounts for large orders
and other vendor supported programs. Although prices are usually determined on a
regional basis, store managers  are trained and authorized  to adjust prices  in
response to local market conditions.
    
 
   
    EXPERIENCED  AND MOTIVATED MANAGEMENT TEAM.   The executive officers and key
managers have an average of  11 years with the Company.  In addition, as of  the
date  of this Prospectus,  executive officers and  key managers beneficially own
approximately 17.8% of the Company's outstanding Common Stock.
    
 
   
                              THE RECAPITALIZATION
    
 
   
    On June 5, 1996, the Company consummated a series of transactions to  effect
a  recapitalization of the Company (the "Recapitalization") in order to transfer
ownership of the Company from its sole stockholder, the Scherr Living Trust (the
"Scherr Trust"), to  members of  management, Chase  Venture Capital  Associates,
L.P.  ("Chase Ventures")  and an affiliated  entity, Wells  Fargo Small Business
Investment Company, Inc. ("Wells  Fargo") and Weston  Presidio Capital II,  L.P.
("Weston  Presidio").  Chase  Ventures,  Wells  Fargo  and  Weston  Presidio are
collectively referred to  herein as the  "Investors." See "The  Recapitalization
and Related Transactions."
    
 
   
                          THE INITIAL PUBLIC OFFERING
    
 
   
    On  March 19,  1997, the Company  completed an initial  public offering (the
"Offering") of Common Stock pursuant to which it sold 6,750,000 shares of Common
Stock and  received approximately  $94.1 million  in net  cash proceeds  (before
deducting expenses associated with the Offering). On April 15, 1997, the Company
sold  an additional 1,012,500 shares of  Common Stock and received an additional
$14.1 million in net  cash proceeds (before  deducting expenses associated  with
the  Offering) upon the  underwriters' exercise in  full of their over-allotment
option. Upon consummation  of the Offering,  the Company converted  100% of  the
outstanding  shares of its Junior Preferred Stock into shares of Common Stock at
a ratio of 6.667 shares of Common Stock to each share of Junior Preferred  Stock
(the  "Junior Preferred Stock  Conversion"). Approximately $22.9  million of the
net proceeds from the Offering  was used to redeem, at  a premium of 3%, all  of
the  outstanding shares  of the Company's  14% Senior Preferred  Stock, $.01 par
value per share (the  "Senior Preferred Stock");  approximately $9.7 million  of
such  proceeds was  used to  repay all  amounts then-outstanding  under the 1996
Credit Facility; approximately $18.4 million of such proceeds was used to redeem
approximately 1,317,000 shares of Common Stock in the Management Tax  Redemption
(as  defined herein); and approximately $37.9  million of such proceeds was used
to redeem, at  a premium  of 10%, an  aggregate of  approximately $33.3  million
principal  amount of Notes on  April 19, 1997 and to  pay all accrued and unpaid
interest with respect to the Notes called for redemption. The balance of the net
proceeds was retained for general corporate purposes, including the  acquisition
of two musical instruments stores in the Atlanta, Georgia market in April 1997.
    
 
                                       5
<PAGE>
   
                              RECENT DEVELOPMENTS
    
 
   
    On April 16, 1997, the Company acquired all of the outstanding capital stock
of  Rhythm City,  Inc. ("Rhythm City"),  the operator of  two musical instrument
stores in the  Atlanta, Georgia  market for $10.3  million in  cash, subject  to
adjustment  based on the actual level of  working capital on such date and other
matters. The  purchase  price  included  the acquisition  of  the  building  and
improvements  of the flagship Rhythm City store  in Atlanta. All of the debt and
other liabilities of Rhythm  City were either repaid  or assumed by the  sellers
prior to closing.
    
 
   
                      STATUS OF THE OFFERING OF THE NOTES
    
 
   
    In  December 1996, the Company completed an exchange offer pursuant to which
$100 million aggregate principal amount of  Notes was issued in exchange for  an
equal  amount of then-outstanding, unregistered 11% Senior Notes due 2006 of the
Company (the "Old  Notes"). The  Notes are  substantially identical  to the  Old
Notes,  except  that  the  Notes  are  not  restricted  securities  for  federal
securities law purposes.  The Company  did not  receive any  proceeds from  such
exchange offer.
    
 
   
    In  March  1997,  the  Company  completed  its  Offering  of  Common  Stock.
Immediately following  the Offering,  the Company  called for  redemption, at  a
premium  of  10%,  an  aggregate  of  $33,333,000  of  Notes.  The  Company used
approximately $37.9 million of the net proceeds from the Offering to redeem such
Notes on April 19, 1997 and to pay all accrued and unpaid interest with  respect
to the Notes called for redemption. As of the date of this Prospectus, there are
$66.7 million aggregate principal amount of Notes outstanding. See "Management's
Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results of  Operations --
Liquidity and Capital Resources."
    
 
   
                                   THE NOTES
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                      <C>
SECURITIES OFFERED.....................  $66,667,000 million aggregate  principal amount  of
                                         11% Senior Notes due 2006.
MATURITY...............................  July 1, 2006.
INTEREST PAYMENT DATES.................  January 1 and July 1.
OPTIONAL REDEMPTION....................  The  Notes  are  redeemable at  the  option  of the
                                         Company, in whole or in  part, on or after July  1,
                                         2001,  at the  redemption prices  set forth herein,
                                         plus accrued and  unpaid interest, if  any, to  the
                                         date  of redemption.  See "Description  of Notes --
                                         Optional Redemption."
SINKING FUND...........................  None.
RANKING................................  The Notes are general, unsecured obligations of the
                                         Company. The Notes rank senior in right of  payment
                                         to all subordinate indebtedness of the Company, and
                                         PARI  PASSU  in  right of  payment  with  all other
                                         senior indebtedness of  the Company, including  the
                                         Company's  outstanding indebtedness  under the 1996
                                         Credit Facility. The 1996 Credit Facility, upon the
                                         occurrence of certain  events, will  be secured  by
                                         substantially all of the assets of the Company. See
                                         "Description  of  the  1996  Credit  Facility." The
                                         Company may borrow up to $25 million under the 1996
                                         Credit Facility, as  in place on  the date  hereof,
                                         and  could borrow additional amounts if and when it
                                         enters into a secured successor bank facility which
                                         it  is  currently  negotiating.  See  "Management's
                                         Discussion  and Analysis of Financial Condition and
                                         Results  of   Operations--Liquidity   and   Capital
                                         Resources."  As of the date of this Prospectus, the
                                         Company had no outstanding indebtedness, other than
                                         the Notes.
</TABLE>
    
 
                                       6
<PAGE>
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                      <C>
CHANGE OF CONTROL OFFER................  Upon a Change of  Control (as defined herein),  the
                                         Company will be required to make an irrevocable and
                                         unconditional  offer to  repurchase all outstanding
                                         Notes at  101% of  the aggregate  principal  amount
                                         thereof,  plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any,
                                         to the date of repurchase. A Change of Control will
                                         not  result  from   a  sale  of   the  Company   or
                                         substantially  all  of  the Company's  assets  to a
                                         person or group  of persons who  are Investors  (as
                                         defined herein) and the Holders (as defined herein)
                                         would  not receive the benefit of this provision in
                                         the event of such  a transaction. See  "Description
                                         of  Notes  --  Certain Covenants  --  Repurchase of
                                         Notes at the Option of the Holder Upon a Change  of
                                         Control."
CERTAIN COVENANTS......................  The   Indenture  contains  certain  covenants  with
                                         respect to the  Company that,  among other  things,
                                         limit   the   ability  of   the  Company   and  any
                                         subsidiaries of the Company to (i) incur additional
                                         Indebtedness and issue  Disqualified Capital  Stock
                                         (as  defined  herein); (ii)  pay dividends  or make
                                         other distributions and certain investments;  (iii)
                                         create certain liens; (iv) sell certain assets; (v)
                                         enter into certain transactions with affiliates; or
                                         (vi)  enter into certain  mergers or consolidations
                                         involving the Company. See "Description of Notes --
                                         Certain Covenants."
</TABLE>
    
 
   
                                  RISK FACTORS
    
 
   
    See "Risk  Factors" for  a  discussion of  certain  factors that  should  be
considered by Holders prior to purchasing any Notes.
    
 
   
                           FORWARD LOOKING STATEMENTS
    
 
   
    Information   contained   in  this   Prospectus   includes  "forward-looking
statements" that are based largely on the Company's current expectations and are
subject to a number of  risks and uncertainties. Forward-looking statements  can
be  identified by the use of  forward-looking terminology such as "may," "will,"
"should," "expect," "anticipate," "estimate," "continue," "plans," "intends"  or
other similar terminology. See "Risk Factors."
    
 
   
    The  Company is a Delaware corporation  with its principal executive offices
located at  5155  Clareton  Drive,  Agoura  Hills,  California  91301,  and  its
telephone number is (818) 735-8800.
    
 
                                       7
<PAGE>
   
                SUMMARY HISTORICAL AND PRO FORMA FINANCIAL DATA
    
 
   
    The  financial data  for the  fiscal year  ended October  31, 1992,  the two
months ended December  31, 1992 and  the fiscal years  ended December 31,  1993,
1994,  1995 and 1996 has  been derived from the  audited financial statements of
the Company. The  PRO FORMA financial  data set forth  below is not  necessarily
indicative  of the results that would have been achieved or that may be achieved
in the future.  The summary historical  and PRO FORMA  financial data should  be
read  in  conjunction  with  "The  Recapitalization  and  Related Transactions,"
"Selected Historical Financial Data,"  "Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed  Financial
Data,"  "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
of Operations" and the financial statements of the Company and the notes thereto
included elsewhere herein.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                    FISCAL
                                                     YEAR
                                                     ENDED    TWO MONTHS                 FISCAL YEAR
                                                    OCTOBER     ENDED                       ENDED
                                                      31,    DECEMBER 31,               DECEMBER 31,
                                                    -------  ------------   -------------------------------------
                                                     1992        1992        1993      1994      1995      1996
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
                                                                   (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT STORE AND
                                                                      INVENTORY OPERATING DATA)
<S>                                                 <C>      <C>            <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>
INCOME STATEMENT DATA:
  Net sales.......................................  $85,592    $18,726      $97,305  $129,039  $170,671  $213,294
  Gross profit....................................  25,472       5,393       28,778    36,764    47,256    60,072
  Selling, general and administrative expenses....  20,998       3,547       21,889    26,143    32,664    41,345
  Deferred compensation expense (1)...............   --            373        1,390     1,259     3,087    71,760
  Operating income (loss).........................  4,474        1,473        5,499     9,362    11,505   (53,033)
  Non recurring transaction expense...............   --         --            --        --        --       (6,942)
  Net income (loss)...............................  3,987        1,385        5,105     8,829    10,857   (72,409)
 
PRO FORMA FOR INCOME TAX PROVISION: (2)
  Historical income (loss) before provision for
   income taxes...................................  $4,076     $ 1,424      $ 5,251  $  9,155  $ 11,202  $(72,270)
  Pro forma provision for income taxes............  1,753          773        2,856     4,478     6,144     --
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
  Pro forma net income (loss).....................  $2,323     $   651      $ 2,395  $  4,677  $  5,058  $(72,270)
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
OPERATING DATA:
  Net sales per gross square foot (3).............  $ 429       --          $   478  $    546  $    661  $    707
  Stores open at end of period....................     15           15           17        20        21        28
  Net sales growth................................  14.3%        18.7%        13.7%     32.6%     32.3%     25.0%
  Increase in comparable store sales (4)..........  11.5%        18.7%        11.4%     17.3%     23.4%     10.2%
  Inventory turns.................................   3.3x         3.4x         3.1x      3.4x      3.7x      3.4x
  Ratio of earnings to fixed charges (5)..........   5.8x        13.8x         9.1x     11.6x     11.7x     --
  Capital expenditures............................  $ 445      $   966      $ 2,618  $  3,277  $  3,432  $  6,133
</TABLE>
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                             FISCAL YEAR ENDED
                                                                                             DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                                             ------------------
                                                                                               (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                          <C>
PRO FORMA DATA: (6)
  Net sales................................................................................      $  213,294
  Operating income.........................................................................          19,159
  Net income...............................................................................           6,456
</TABLE>
    
 
   
                                             FOOTNOTES APPEAR ON FOLLOWING PAGE.
    
 
                                       8
<PAGE>
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                             ------------------------------
                                                                             HISTORICAL    AS ADJUSTED (7)
                                                                             -----------  -----------------
                                                                                     (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                          <C>             <C>          <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
  Cash and cash equivalents................................                   $      47       $  25,912
  Net working capital......................................                      27,436          56,837
  Total assets.............................................                      74,849          99,591
  Total long term and revolving debt (including current
   maturities).............................................                     103,536          66,667
  Senior preferred stock...................................                      15,186          --
  Junior preferred stock...................................                     138,610          --
  Warrants.................................................                       6,500           6,500
  Stockholders' equity (deficit)...........................                     (68,815)          7,982
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------------
   
(1)  For 1996,  the  Company  recorded  a  non-recurring  deferred  compensation
     expense   of  $71.8  million,  of  which   $69.9  million  related  to  the
     cancellation and  exchange  of management  stock  options pursuant  to  the
     Recapitalization  and $1.9 million  related to a  non-cash charge resulting
     from the grant of stock options to management by the Investors. The Company
     has not, and will not, incur  any obligation in connection with such  grant
     of  options  by  the  Investors.  See  "The  Recapitalization  and  Related
     Transactions" and "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the Investors
     to Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
(2)  Pro forma  provision  for income  taxes  reflects the  estimated  statutory
     provision  of  43%  for  income  taxes  assuming  the  Company  was  a  "C"
     corporation.
    
 
   
(3)  Net sales per gross square foot  does not include new stores opened  during
     the  reporting period.  Information for the  two months  ended December 31,
     1992 is not meaningful.
    
 
   
(4)  Compares  net  sales  for  the  comparable  periods,  excluding  net  sales
     attributable to stores not open for 14 months.
    
 
   
(5)  For  the purposes  of calculating the  ratio of earnings  to fixed charges,
     "earnings" represents income  before provision for  income taxes and  fixed
     charges.  "Fixed charges" consist of interest expense, amortization of debt
     financing costs and one third  of lease expense, which management  believes
     is  representative of  the interest  components of  lease expense. Earnings
     were insufficient to  cover fixed  charges by  $72.3 million  for the  year
     ended December 31, 1996.
    
 
   
(6)  The  pro forma  data reflect  adjustments as  if the  Recapitalization, the
     Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, the sale of the Notes, the Offering  and
     the  application of the net proceeds therefrom  to redeem all of the shares
     of Senior Preferred Stock, approximately $33.3 million aggregate  principal
     amount  of the Notes and  certain shares of Common  Stock in the Management
     Tax Redemption had  been consummated and  were effective as  of January  1,
     1996.
    
 
   
(7)  The  pro forma balance sheet data give effect to the Junior Preferred Stock
     Conversion, the Offering and the application of the net proceeds  therefrom
     to  redeem all of the shares of Senior Preferred Stock, approximately $33.3
     million aggregate  principal amount  of  the Notes  and certain  shares  of
     Common  Stock in the Management Tax Redemption, as if such transactions had
     been consummated and were effective on such date.
    
 
                                       9
<PAGE>
   
                                  RISK FACTORS
    
 
   
    PRIOR  TO  MAKING  AN  INVESTMENT  DECISION,  PROSPECTIVE  INVESTORS  SHOULD
CAREFULLY  CONSIDER  THE  FOLLOWING  SPECIFIC  INVESTMENT  CONSIDERATIONS.   SEE
"MANAGEMENT'S  DISCUSSION  AND ANALYSIS  OF FINANCIAL  CONDITION AND  RESULTS OF
OPERATIONS" AND  "BUSINESS" FOR  A DESCRIPTION  OF OTHER  FACTORS AFFECTING  THE
BUSINESS OF THE COMPANY.
    
 
   
AGGRESSIVE GROWTH STRATEGY
    
 
   
    The  Company  intends to  pursue an  aggressive  growth strategy  by opening
additional stores in new  and existing markets. The  Company, which operated  28
stores  as of December 31, 1996, opened  seven stores in fiscal 1996 and expects
to open or acquire approximately eight stores in each of fiscal 1997 and  fiscal
1998,  which represents significant increases in the number of stores previously
opened and  operated by  the Company.  In the  first four  months of  1997,  the
Company  opened three new stores  and acquired two existing  stores from a third
party. Although historically the Company has  opened new stores and expanded  or
relocated  existing stores, prior to  1996 the Company had  not opened more than
four new stores for  any twelve-month period for  the prior three fiscal  years.
See  "Business -- Properties." The Company's  expansion plan is dependent upon a
number  of  factors,  including  the  identification  of  suitable  sites,   the
negotiation  of  acceptable  leases for  such  sites, the  hiring,  training and
retention of  skilled personnel,  the availability  of adequate  management  and
financial  resources, the adaptation  of its distribution  and other operational
and management information systems to such sites, the ability and willingness of
the Company's vendors to supply its needs  on a timely basis and other  factors,
some  of which are beyond the control of  the Company. There can be no assurance
that the Company will be successful in  opening such new stores on schedule,  if
at  all, or that such  newly opened stores will  achieve sales and profitability
levels comparable to existing stores, if they are profitable at all, or that the
Company will improve its overall market  position and profitability as a  result
therefrom.
    
 
   
    The  Company's expansion strategy includes clustering  stores in each of its
markets which has, in certain instances, resulted in some transfer of sales from
existing stores to new locations. There can be no assurance that the opening  of
one  or more new stores in a market  area containing an existing store or stores
will not reduce the sales and profitability  level of any of the stores in  such
market  area.  In addition,  the  Company's expansion  into  new markets  has in
certain circumstances presented  competitive and  merchandising challenges  that
are  different from those  currently encountered by the  Company in its existing
markets. These challenges include the effective management of stores that are in
distant locations and  the incurrence of  significant start-up costs,  including
costs related to promotions and advertising. Although the Company is continually
evaluating  the adequacy of its existing systems and procedures, including store
management, financial controls and management information systems in  connection
with the Company's planned expansion, there can be no assurance that the Company
will  adequately  anticipate all  of the  changing  demands which  its expanding
operations will impose on such systems.  The failure by the Company to  identify
and  respond to such demands may have an adverse effect on the Company's results
of operations, financial condition, business and prospects.
    
 
   
    The Company  also believes  that there  may be  attractive opportunities  to
expand  by selectively acquiring existing  music product retailers. For example,
in April  1997 the  Company  consummated the  acquisition  of a  music  products
retailer  operating two stores  in the Atlanta, Georgia  market. See "Summary --
Recent Developments." The Company, in the ordinary course of business, regularly
evaluates  and  enters  into  negotiations  relating  to  potential  acquisition
candidates  in new and existing market  areas. Any such transactions may involve
the payment by the Company of cash or securities (including equity  securities),
or  a combination thereof.  There can be  no assurance that  the Company will be
able  to  identify  suitable  acquisition  candidates  available  for  sale   at
reasonable  prices or consummate  additional acquisitions. Further, acquisitions
may involve  a number  of  special risks,  including diversion  of  management's
attention,  the inability to  integrate successfully any  acquired business, the
incurrence of legal liabilities and unanticipated events or circumstances,  some
or all of which could have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of
operations, financial condition, business and prospects. See "Business."
    
 
   
DEPENDENCE ON SUPPLIERS
    
 
   
    The   Company's  business  and  its  expansion  plans  are  dependent  to  a
significant degree  upon its  suppliers.  As it  believes  is customary  in  the
industry, the Company does not have any long-term supply
    
 
                                       10
<PAGE>
contracts  with its suppliers. The loss of certain key vendors or the failure to
establish and  maintain  relationships with  brand  name vendors  could  have  a
material  adverse  effect on  the Company's  business.  The Company  believes it
currently has  adequate supply  sources;  however, there  can be  no  assurance,
especially given the Company's expansion plans, that the Company will be able to
acquire  sufficient quantities  and an  appropriate mix  of such  merchandise at
acceptable prices  or  at all.  Specifically,  the establishment  of  additional
stores  in existing markets and the penetration of new markets is dependent to a
significant extent  on the  willingness of  vendors to  supply those  additional
retail  stores, of which there can be  no assurance. As the Company continues to
expand, the inability or unwillingness  of a supplier to  supply some or all  of
its  merchandise to  the Company in  one or  more markets could  have a material
adverse effect  on the  Company's results  of operations,  financial  condition,
business and prospects.
 
   
FLUCTUATIONS IN COMPARABLE STORE SALES RESULTS
    
 
   
    Historically,  the Company's  sales growth has  resulted in  large part from
comparable store sales growth. There can  be no assurance that such growth  will
continue.  A  variety of  factors affect  the  Company's comparable  store sales
results including,  among  others, competition,  economic  conditions,  consumer
trends,  retail sales, music  trends, changes in  the Company's merchandise mix,
distribution of  products,  transfer  of  sales  to  new  locations,  timing  of
promotional  events and the  Company's ability to  execute its business strategy
efficiently, including its strategy of clustering stores in certain markets. The
Company's quarterly comparable  store sales (net  sales for comparable  periods,
excluding  net sales attributable to stores not open for 14 months) results have
fluctuated significantly  in  the past.  The  Company's comparable  store  sales
growth  was 24.4%, 30.1%, 25.5% and 16.3% in the first, second, third and fourth
quarters of fiscal 1995,  respectively, and 14.5%, 9.3%,  7.6% and 10.1% in  the
first,  second,  third and  fourth quarters  of  fiscal 1996,  respectively. The
Company does  not expect  comparable  store sales  to  continue to  increase  at
historical rates, and there can be no assurance that comparable store sales will
not  decrease in the future.  As is the case  with many specialty retailers, the
Company's comparable store  sales results could  cause the market  price of  the
Common  Stock  and  the  Notes  to  fluctuate  substantially.  See "Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations."
    
 
   
DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL
    
 
   
    The Company believes  that its  continued success depends  to a  significant
extent  on  the services  of  Larry Thomas,  its  President and  Chief Executive
Officer, and Marty Albertson, its  Executive Vice President and Chief  Operating
Officer,  as  well  as on  its  ability  to attract  and  retain  additional key
personnel with  the  skills  and  expertise necessary  to  manage  its  existing
business  and effectuate its  planned growth. The loss  or unavailability of the
services of one or both of these individuals or other key personnel could have a
material adverse effect  on the Company.  In June 1996,  in connection with  the
Recapitalization, the Company entered into a five-year employment agreement with
each  of Messrs.  Thomas and  Albertson. The  Company currently  carries key man
insurance on the lives of  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson  in the amounts of  $5.0
million  and $3.5  million, respectively.  See "Management."  Historically, when
filling its senior operations, sales and store management positions, the Company
has generally followed a policy of  "promotion from within." The success of  the
Company's  growth strategy will  also depend on its  ability to promote existing
well-trained store personnel to senior management and to retain such  employees,
as well as on its ability to attract and retain new employees who have the skill
and  expertise to manage  the Company's business. Any  inability to hire, retain
and promote such personnel could have a material adverse effect on the Company's
results  of  operations,  financial  condition,  business  and  prospects.   See
"Business -- Customer Service" and "Management."
    
 
   
COMPETITION
    
 
   
    The   retail  market  for  musical  instruments  is  fragmented  and  highly
competitive. The Company  competes with  many different types  of retailers  who
sell  many or most of  the items sold by  the Company, including other specialty
retailers and catalogue retailers. The  Company's expansion into new markets  in
which  its  competitors  are already  established,  competitors'  expansion into
markets in which the Company is currently operating, the adoption by competitors
of innovative  store formats  and retail  sales methods  or the  entry into  the
Company's  markets by competitors with  substantial financial or other resources
may have  a material  adverse effect  on the  Company's results  of  operations,
financial condition, business and prospects. See "Business -- Competition."
    
 
                                       11
<PAGE>
   
POTENTIAL CONSEQUENCES OF SIGNIFICANT LEVERAGE; RECENT LOSS
    
 
   
    The  Company has significant financial leverage.  On a PRO FORMA basis after
giving effect to the Offering and the application of the net proceeds therefrom,
as of December 31, 1996, the Company would have had approximately $66.7  million
of  outstanding long-term  indebtedness, its  ratio of  total long-term  debt to
total capitalization would have been approximately  89% and it would have had  a
stockholders'  equity of  approximately $8.0  million. See  "Capitalization" and
"Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Financial Data."
    
 
   
    The  degree  to  which  the  Company  is  leveraged  could  have   important
consequences  to  the holders  of the  Notes, including  the following:  (i) the
Company may  not  generate sufficient  cash  to service  its  debt  obligations,
including  obligations under  the Notes;  (ii) the  Company's ability  to obtain
financing for future  working capital needs  or other purposes  may be  limited;
(iii)  a significant portion of the Company's  cash flow from operations will be
dedicated to debt service, thereby reducing funds available for operations;  and
(iv)  the substantial  indebtedness and the  restrictive covenants  to which the
Company is subject under the terms  of its indebtedness, including the terms  of
the 1996 Credit Facility and the Indenture, may make the Company more vulnerable
to  economic downturns, may  hinder its ability to  execute its growth strategy,
may reduce  its  flexibility to  respond  to changing  business  conditions  and
opportunities  and may limit its ability to withstand competitive pressures. See
"Description of Notes."
    
 
   
    The Company's ability to generate sufficient  cash to meet its debt  service
obligations  will depend on future operating performance, which will be subject,
in part, to factors beyond its control, including prevailing economic conditions
and financial, business and other factors. While the Company believes that  cash
flow  from operations  will be  adequate to  meet its  debt service obligations,
there can be  no assurance  that the Company  will generate  cash in  sufficient
amounts to meet such obligations. In the event the Company's operating cash flow
is  not sufficient to  fund the Company's  expenditures or to  service its debt,
including the Notes, the Company may  be required to raise additional  financing
through  equity offerings, the  refinancing of all or  part of its indebtedness,
including the Notes, or sales of its assets. There can be no assurance that  the
Company  will  be  able  to  obtain  any  such  additional  financing  or effect
satisfactory refinancings or  asset sales  on favorable  terms, if  at all.  See
"Management's  Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results of
Operations -- Liquidity and Capital Resources."
    
 
   
    For the year ended December  31, 1996, the Company had  a net loss of  $72.4
million. The results for such period reflect non-recurring deferred compensation
expense  of $71.8 million and $11.6  million for transaction costs and financing
fees  incurred  in  connection  with  the  Recapitalization.  See  "Management's
Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results of  Operations --
Fiscal 1996 Compared to Fiscal 1995."
    
 
   
FRAUDULENT TRANSFER CONSIDERATIONS
    
 
   
    The obligations of  the Company  under the indebtedness  represented by  the
Notes  may  be subject  to review  under relevant  federal and  state fraudulent
transfer laws,  as  well  as  other  similar  laws  regarding  creditors  rights
generally  or distributions to  stockholders, if a bankruptcy  case or a lawsuit
(including circumstances not involving bankruptcy) is commenced by or on  behalf
of any unpaid creditor or a representative of the Company's creditors, such as a
trustee  in bankruptcy or  the Company as  debtor in possession.  If a court, in
such a  lawsuit,  were  to  find that  the  Company  incurred  the  indebtedness
represented  by the Bridge Facility (as defined below) or the Notes (i) with the
intent to hinder, delay or defraud  present or future creditors or  contemplated
insolvency  with a design  to prefer one  or more creditors  to the exclusion in
whole or in part of others; or  (ii) received less than a reasonably  equivalent
value  or fair consideration for any such  indebtedness and, at the time of such
incurrence (a)  was insolvent;  (b) was  rendered insolvent  by reason  of  such
incurrence;  (c) was engaged or about to engage in a business or transaction for
which its remaining assets  constituted unreasonably small  capital to carry  on
its  business; or (d) intended  to incur, or believed  or reasonably should have
believed that it would incur, debts beyond its ability to pay such debts as they
matured, such  court could  void the  obligations under  the Notes,  direct  the
return  on any  amounts paid  thereunder to  the Company  or to  a fund  for the
benefit of its creditors, subordinate such obligations to all other indebtedness
of the relevant obligor or take other  action detrimental to the holders of  the
Notes.
    
 
                                       12
<PAGE>
   
    The  measure of insolvency for purposes of the foregoing will vary depending
upon the law of  the jurisdiction that is  being applied. Generally, however,  a
company  would  be considered  insolvent  if either  (i)  the sum  of  its debts
(including contingent or unliquidated debts) is greater than all of its property
at a fair valuation; or  (ii) if the then fair  saleable value of its assets  is
less  than the  amount that  is required  to pay  its probable  liability on its
existing debts  (including  contingent or  unliquidated  debts) as  they  become
absolute and matured.
    
 
   
    A  court would likely  conclude that the Company  did not receive reasonably
equivalent value or fair  consideration for incurring  its obligation under  the
Notes  to the extent that  the proceeds of the Notes  were used to refinance the
Bridge Facility and  the Bridge  Facility was used  to repurchase  stock of  the
Company from any of its stockholders. The Company, however, believes that it was
at  the time of the Recapitalization  and is now solvent and  that it had at the
time of the  Recapitalization and  now has sufficient  capital to  carry on  its
business  and  that it  believed at  the  time of  the Recapitalization  and now
believes that it was and will be able to pay its debts as they mature. There can
be no assurance, however, that a court would reach the same conclusion.
    
 
   
CONCENTRATION OF OPERATIONS IN CALIFORNIA
    
 
   
    As of  December  31,  1996, 13  of  the  Company's stores  were  located  in
California  and generated 55.9% and 52.8% of  the Company's net sales for fiscal
1995 and 1996, respectively. Although the Company has opened and acquired stores
in other areas in the United  States, a significant percentage of the  Company's
net  sales is  likely to remain  concentrated in California  for the foreseeable
future.  Consequently,  the  Company's  results  of  operations  and   financial
condition  are heavily dependent upon general  consumer trends and other general
economic conditions  in California  and  are subject  to other  regional  risks,
including the risk of seismic activity. The Company does not maintain earthquake
insurance. See "Business -- Properties."
    
 
   
IMPACT OF ECONOMIC CONDITIONS ON INDUSTRY RESULTS; CHANGING CONSUMER PREFERENCES
    
 
   
    The  Company's business is sensitive to consumer spending patterns, which in
turn are subject to, among  other things, prevailing economic conditions.  There
can  be no  assurance that  consumer spending will  not be  affected by economic
conditions, thereby impacting the Company's growth, net sales and profitability.
A deterioration in economic conditions  in one or more  of the markets in  which
the  Company's stores are  concentrated could have a  material adverse effect on
the Company's  results  of  operations, business  and  prospects.  Although  the
Company  attempts to stay  abreast of consumer  preferences for musical products
and accessories  historically offered  for sale  by the  Company, any  sustained
failure  by the  Company to  identify and  respond to  such trends  would have a
material adverse  effect  on  the Company's  results  of  operations,  financial
condition, business and prospects.
    
 
   
LIMITED TRADING MARKET FOR THE NOTES
    
 
   
    The  Notes are not  listed on any  national securities exchange  and are not
admitted to trading on the National Association of Securities Dealers  Automated
Quotation  System. The Company has been  advised by Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette
Securities Corporation ("DLJ") and Chase  Securities that they presently  intend
to  make  a market  in  the Notes.  However, DLJ  and  Chase Securities  are not
obligated to do so  and any market-making activities  with respect to the  Notes
may  be discontinued at  any time without  notice. If a  trading market does not
develop or is not maintained, holders of the Notes may experience difficulty  in
reselling  the Notes or may be  unable to sell them at  all. If a market for the
Notes develops, any such  market may be  discontinued at any  time. If a  public
trading  market develops for the Notes, future  trading prices of the Notes will
depend on  many  factors, including,  among  other things,  prevailing  interest
rates,   the  Company's  results  of  operations  and  the  market  for  similar
securities. Depending  on  prevailing interest  rates,  the market  for  similar
securities  and other factors, including the financial condition of the Company,
the Notes may trade at a discount from their principal amount.
    
 
   
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS AND ASSOCIATED RISKS
    
 
   
    This Prospectus contains  certain forward-looking  statements, relating  to,
among  other things,  future results of  operations, growth  plans, sales, gross
margin and  expense  trends,  capital  requirements  and  general  industry  and
business  conditions applicable to the Company. These forward-looking statements
are based largely  on the Company's  current expectations and  are subject to  a
number  of risks and uncertainties. Actual  results could differ materially from
these forward-looking  statements.  In addition  to  the other  risks  described
elsewhere  in this "Risk  Factors" discussion, important  factors to consider in
    
 
                                       13
<PAGE>
evaluating  such  forward-looking   statements  include   changes  in   external
competitive  market factors,  changes in the  Company's business  strategy or an
inability to execute  its strategy  due to  unanticipated changes  in the  music
products  industry or the  economy in general,  the emergence of  new or growing
specialty retailers of music products and various other competitive factors that
may prevent  the  Company from  competing  successfully in  existing  or  future
markets.  In light of these  risks and uncertainties, there  can be no assurance
that the forward-looking statements contained in this Prospectus will in fact be
realized.
 
                                       14
<PAGE>
   
                 THE RECAPITALIZATION AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
    
 
   
    On June  5, 1996,  Guitar Center  consummated a  series of  transactions  to
effect  a Recapitalization of the Company in  order to transfer ownership of the
Company from its sole  stockholder, the Scherr Trust,  to members of  management
and the Investors. The Recapitalization included the following transactions: (i)
members  of the Company's management purchased  1,291,000 shares of Common Stock
for $0.5 million  in cash;  (ii) members  of the  Company's management  received
495,000  shares  of  Junior  Preferred  Stock,  with  an  aggregate  liquidation
preference of $49.5 million, in exchange for cancellation of outstanding options
exercisable for  127,809,000 shares  of  Common Stock;  (iii) the  Scherr  Trust
received 198,000 shares of Junior Preferred Stock, with an aggregate liquidation
preference  of $19.8 million, in exchange for 51,123,600 shares of Common Stock;
(iv) the Investors purchased 1,807,400 shares of Common Stock and 693,000 shares
of Junior Preferred Stock for $70.0 million  in cash; (v) the DLJ Investors  (as
defined  herein) purchased  800,000 shares  of Senior  Preferred Stock,  with an
aggregate liquidation value of $20.0  million, and warrants (the "Warrants")  to
purchase  190,252 shares of  Common Stock and 72,947  shares of Junior Preferred
Stock, for  an aggregate  purchase price  of $20.0  million in  cash; (vi)  GCMC
Funding,  Inc. ("DLJ Bridge") purchased $51.0 million aggregate principal amount
of senior  unsecured  increasing  rate  notes for  cash  and  Chemical  Bank,  a
predecessor  of The Chase  Manhattan Bank ("Chemical"),  loaned $49.0 million to
the Company (together,  the "Bridge  Facility"); (vii)  the Company  repurchased
309,840,000  shares  of Common  Stock from  the  Scherr Trust  for approximately
$113.1 million  in  cash;  (viii)  the Company  cancelled  options  to  purchase
82,384,907  shares  of Common  Stock held  by certain  members of  management in
exchange for approximately $27.9 million in cash; and (ix) the Company cancelled
its revolving credit facility (the "Old Credit Facility") upon repaying in  cash
the  approximately $35.9 million outstanding pursuant thereto. Transaction costs
and financing fees incurred  by the Company to  effect the Recapitalization  and
the  Bridge  Facility  aggregated  approximately  $11.6  million.  See  "Certain
Transactions."
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options for the
purchase of 43,344  units (a unit  consisting of 2.582  shares of Common  Stock,
after  giving  effect  to the  stock  splits  described in  this  paragraph, and
99/100ths of a share of Junior Preferred Stock (each, a "Unit")) at an  exercise
price  of  $100  per Unit  to  each of  Larry  Thomas, its  President  and Chief
Executive Officer, and Marty Albertson,  its Executive Vice President and  Chief
Operating  Officer and adopted the 1996 Plan (as defined herein) for the benefit
of the  Company's key  employees.  See "Management  -- Management  Stock  Option
Agreements;  -- 1996  Performance Stock Option  Plan." Upon  consummation of the
Recapitalization,  management,  the  Investors,  and  the  Scherr  Trust   owned
approximately   35.7%,  50.0%,  and  14.3%,  respectively,  of  the  issued  and
outstanding  Common   Stock   of   the  Company.   Immediately   following   the
Recapitalization,  the Company effected  a 100-to-1 stock  split. On October 11,
1996, the Company  reincorporated from  a California corporation  to a  Delaware
corporation  and changed  the par  value of  its Common  Stock, Senior Preferred
Stock and Junior Preferred Stock. On January 15, 1997, the Company effectuated a
2.582-to-1 stock split.  Upon the consummation  of the Offering,  each share  of
Junior  Preferred Stock was automatically converted  into 6.667 shares of Common
Stock, and all outstanding shares of Senior Preferred Stock were redeemed, at  a
premium, with a portion of the net proceeds from the Offering. As of the date of
this  Prospectus,  the  Company's  executive  officers  and  key  managers,  the
Investors and the Scherr Trust  (and affiliated family trusts) beneficially  own
approximately  17.8%, 30.6% and 8.8%, respectively, of the outstanding shares of
Common Stock. See "Principal Stockholders."
    
 
   
    Upon the effectiveness of the  Recapitalization, the Company entered into  a
$25  million revolving credit  facility (the "1996  Credit Facility") with Wells
Fargo Bank,  N.A. ("Wells  Fargo Bank").  See "Description  of the  1996  Credit
Facility."  On  July  2, 1996  the  Company  issued in  a  private  placement an
aggregate of $100  million of  Old Notes  to DLJ  and Chase  Securities, as  the
Initial  Purchasers. The proceeds of the offering  of the Old Notes were applied
to the retirement  of the  Bridge Facility.  The Old  Notes were  resold by  the
Initial  Purchasers pursuant to Rule 144A under the Securities Act ("Rule 144A")
and were later exchanged for the Notes in an exchange offer registered under the
Securities  Act  which  was  consummated   in  December  1996.  The  Notes   are
substantially  identical  to  the  Old  Notes (except  that  the  Notes  are not
restricted securities for federal securities law purposes). Approximately  $33.3
million  principal amount of the Notes were redeemed, at a premium, on April 19,
1997 with a portion of the net  proceeds from the Offering. See "Description  of
Notes."
    
 
                                       15
<PAGE>
   
                                USE OF PROCEEDS
    
 
   
    The  Company will not receive any proceeds from the sale of any Notes in any
market-making transaction  in  connection  with which  this  Propsectus  may  be
delivered.
    
 
   
                                 CAPITALIZATION
    
 
   
    The  following table sets forth the  actual capitalization of the Company as
of December 31, 1996 and the as  adjusted capitalization of the Company at  that
date after giving effect to the Offering and the application of a portion of the
net  proceeds  therefrom. This  table should  be read  in conjunction  with "The
Recapitalization and  Related  Transactions,"  "Unaudited  Pro  Forma  Condensed
Financial  Data," "Management's  Discussion and Analysis  of Financial Condition
and Results of Operations" and the  financial statements of the Company and  the
notes thereto included elsewhere in this Prospectus.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                         AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                                        --------------------------
                                                                                           ACTUAL     AS ADJUSTED
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
                                                                                              (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                     <C>           <C>
Long-term debt (including current portion)
  Notes...............................................................................  $    100,000   $   66,667
  1996 credit facility................................................................         3,536       --
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
    Total long-term debt..............................................................       103,536       66,667
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
Senior preferred stock................................................................        15,186       --
Stockholders' equity (deficit)
  Junior preferred stock (1)..........................................................       138,610       --
  Warrants............................................................................         6,500        6,500
  Common stock 55,000,000 shares, $.01 par value, authorized; 3,622,804 shares
   outstanding, actual; 19,329,079 shares outstanding, as
   adjusted (1).......................................................................            36          193
  Additional paid-in capital..........................................................        (6,966)     220,548
  Retained earnings (deficit).........................................................      (206,995)    (219,259)
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
    Total stockholders' equity (deficit)..............................................       (68,815)       7,982
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
      Total capitalization............................................................  $     49,907   $   74,649
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Under  the terms of the Junior Preferred Stock, upon the consummation of the
    Offering each share  of Junior Preferred  Stock was converted  automatically
    into  6.667 shares of  Common Stock. Also excludes  shares issuable upon the
    exercise of outstanding employee stock options and outstanding Warrants.
    
 
                                       16
<PAGE>
   
                       SELECTED HISTORICAL FINANCIAL DATA
    
 
   
    The selected financial data for the fiscal year ended October 31, 1992,  the
two months ended December 31, 1992 and the fiscal years ended December 31, 1993,
1994,  1995 and 1996 has  been derived from the  audited financial statements of
the Company.  The selected  PRO FORMA  financial  data set  forth below  is  not
necessarily  indicative of the results that would have been achieved or that may
be achieved in the future. The selected historical and PRO FORMA financial  data
should   be  read  in   conjunction  with  "The   Recapitalization  and  Related
Transactions," "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition  and
Results of Operations" and the financial statements of the Company and the notes
thereto included elsewhere in this Prospectus.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                              TWO
                                                         FISCAL YEAR        MONTHS
                                                            ENDED            ENDED             FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                         OCTOBER 31,     DECEMBER 31,    ------------------------------------------
                                                            1992             1992          1993       1994       1995       1996
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                                (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT STORE AND INVENTORY OPERATING DATA)
                                                       ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                    <C>              <C>              <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
INCOME STATEMENT DATA:
Net sales............................................     $  85,592        $  18,726     $  97,305  $ 129,039  $ 170,671  $ 213,294
Cost of goods sold (1)...............................        60,120           13,333        68,527     92,275    123,415    153,222
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
  Gross profit.......................................     $  25,472        $   5,393     $  28,778  $  36,764  $  47,256  $  60,072
Selling, general and administrative expenses.........        20,998            3,547        21,889     26,143     32,664     41,345
Deferred compensation expense (2)....................            --              373         1,390      1,259      3,087     71,760
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Operating income (loss)..............................     $   4,474        $   1,473     $   5,499  $   9,362  $  11,505  $ (53,033)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Other (expense) income
  Interest expense, net..............................          (457)             (49)         (271)      (252)      (368)   (12,169)
  Transaction expense and other expenses.............            59               --            23         45         65     (7,068)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                          $    (398)       $     (49)    $    (248) $    (207) $    (303) $ (19,237)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Income (loss) before provision for income taxes......         4,076            1,424         5,251      9,155     11,202    (72,270)
Provision for income taxes...........................            89               39           146        326        345        139
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Net income (loss)....................................     $   3,987        $   1,385     $   5,105  $   8,829  $  10,857  $ (72,409)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
PRO FORMA FOR INCOME TAX PROVISION (3):
Historical income (loss) before provision for income
 taxes...............................................     $   4,076        $   1,424     $   5,251  $   9,155  $  11,202  $ (72,270)
Pro forma provision for income taxes.................         1,753              773         2,856      4,478      6,144         --
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Pro forma net income (loss)..........................     $   2,323        $     651     $   2,395  $   4,677  $   5,058  $ (72,270)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
OPERATING DATA:
Net sales per gross square foot (4)..................     $     429               --     $     478  $     546  $     661  $     707
Net sales growth.....................................          14.3%            18.7%         13.7%      32.6%      32.3%      25.0%
Increase in comparable store sales (5)...............          11.5%            18.7%         11.4%      17.3%      23.4%      10.2%
Stores open at end of period.........................            15               15            17         20         21         28
Inventory turns......................................          3.3x             3.4x          3.1x       3.4x       3.7x       3.4x
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges(6)................          5.8x            13.8x          9.1x      11.6x      11.7x         --
Capital expenditures.................................     $     445        $     966     $   2,618  $   3,277  $   3,432  $   6,133
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Net working capital..................................     $  11,923        $  12,679     $  10,243  $  11,468  $   6,002  $  27,436
Property, plant and equipment, net...................         7,888            8,677        10,066     11,642     13,276     14,966
Total assets.........................................        32,082           34,978        37,602     46,900     49,618     74,849
Total long term and revolving debt (including current
 debt)...............................................         6,103            5,001         3,400        825         --    103,536
Senior preferred stock...............................            --               --            --         --         --     15,186
Junior preferred stock...............................            --               --            --         --         --    138,610
Stockholders' equity (deficit).......................        16,612           17,997        18,484     23,424     19,763    (68,815)
</TABLE>
    
 
   
                                             FOOTNOTES APPEAR ON FOLLOWING PAGE.
    
 
                                       17
<PAGE>
   
FOOTNOTES TO TABLE ON PREVIOUS PAGE.
    
 
- ----------------------------------
 
   
(1) Cost of goods sold includes buying and occupancy costs.
    
 
   
(2) For  the fiscal  year 1996,  the Company  recorded a  non-recurring deferred
    compensation expense of $71.8 million, of which $69.9 million related to the
    cancellation and  exchange  of  management stock  options  pursuant  to  the
    Recapitalization  and $1.9  million related  to a  non-cash charge resulting
    from the grant of stock options to management by the Investors. The  Company
    has not, and will not, incur any obligation in connection with such grant of
    options   by   the  Investors.   See   "The  Recapitalization   and  Related
    Transactions" and "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the  Investors
    to Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
(3) Pro  forma  provision  for  income taxes  reflects  the  estimated statutory
    provision for income taxes assuming the Company was a "C" corporation.
    
 
   
(4) Net sales per gross  square foot does not  include new stores opened  during
    the  reporting period. Information  for the two  month period ended December
    31, 1992 is not meaningful.
    
 
   
(5) Compares  net  sales  for  the  comparable  periods,  excluding  net   sales
    attributable to stores not open for 14 months.
    
 
   
(6) For  the  purpose of  calculating the  ratio of  earnings to  fixed charges,
    "earnings" represents income  before provision  for income  taxes and  fixed
    charges.  "Fixed charges" consist of  interest expense, amortization of debt
    financing costs, and one third  of lease expense, which management  believes
    is representative of the interest components of lease expense. Earnings were
    insufficient  to cover  fixed charges  by $72.3  million for  the year ended
    December 31, 1996.
    
 
                                       18
<PAGE>
   
                  UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED FINANCIAL DATA
    
 
   
    The  following unaudited PRO FORMA condensed  financial data (the "Pro Forma
Financial Data")  have  been  prepared  by the  Company's  management  from  the
financial  statements of the Company and the notes thereto included elsewhere in
this Prospectus. The unaudited PRO FORMA condensed statements of operations  for
the  fiscal  year  ended  December  31,  1996  reflects  adjustments  as  if the
Recapitalization, the Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, the sale of the  Notes,
the  Offering and  the application  of a portion  of the  estimated net proceeds
therefrom to redeem all outstanding shares of Senior Preferred Stock, a  portion
of the Notes and certain shares of Common Stock in the Management Tax Redemption
and  to  repay  amounts outstanding  under  the  1996 Credit  Facility  had been
consummated and were effective  as of January 1,  1996. The unaudited PRO  FORMA
condensed  balance sheet  as of  December 31,  1996 gives  effect to  the Junior
Preferred Stock Conversion and the application of the estimated net proceeds  of
the Offering as if they had occurred on such date.
    
 
   
    The  financial effects of the Recapitalization and the Offering as presented
in the Pro  Forma Financial Data  are not necessarily  indicative of either  the
Company's  financial position or the results  of its operations which would have
been obtained had the Recapitalization and the Offering actually occurred on the
dates described above,  nor are they  necessarily indicative of  the results  of
future  operations. The Pro  Forma Financial Data should  be read in conjunction
with the  notes thereto,  which  are an  integral  part thereof,  the  financial
statements of the Company and the notes thereto and "Management's Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations."
    
 
   
             UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                          YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                              PRO FORMA
                                                        ADJUSTMENTS         PRO FORMA                          FOR THE
                                                      RELATED TO THE         FOR THE        ADJUSTMENTS   RECAPITALIZATION,
                                                     RECAPITALIZATION   RECAPITALIZATION      RELATED      THE SALE OF THE
                                                      AND THE SALE OF    AND THE SALE OF      TO THE            NOTES
                                        HISTORICAL       THE NOTES          THE NOTES        OFFERING     AND THE OFFERING
                                        -----------  -----------------  -----------------  -------------  -----------------
                                                                          (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                     <C>          <C>                <C>                <C>            <C>
Net sales.............................   $ 213,294      $   --             $   213,294       $  --           $   213,294
Cost of sales, buying, and
 occupancy............................     153,222          --                 153,222          --               153,222
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
Gross profit..........................   $  60,072      $   --             $    60,072       $  --           $    60,072
Operating expenses....................      41,345             (432)(1)         40,913          --                40,913
Deferred compensation expense.........      71,760          (71,760)(2)        --               --               --
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
Operating income......................   $ (53,033)     $    72,192        $    19,159       $  --           $    19,159
Other (expenses) income:
  Interest expense....................     (12,177)             671(3)         (11,506)          3,792(4)         (7,714)
  Transaction expenses................      (6,942)           6,942(5)         --               --               --
  Interest income.....................           8          --                       8          --                     8
  Other...............................        (126)         --                    (126)         --                  (126)
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
                                         $ (19,237)     $     7,613        $   (11,624)      $   3,792       $    (7,832)
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
Income (loss) before provision for
 income taxes.........................     (72,270)          79,805              7,535           3,792            11,327
Provision for income taxes............         139            3,101(6)           3,240           1,631(6)          4,871
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
Net income (loss).....................   $ (72,409)     $    76,704        $     4,295       $   2,161       $     6,456
Preferred stock dividends.............      (7,951)          (6,083)(7)        (14,034)         14,034(8)        --
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
Net income (loss) available for common
 stockholders.........................   $ (80,360)     $    70,621        $    (9,739)      $  16,195       $     6,456
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
                                        -----------        --------     -----------------  -------------  -----------------
 
PRO FORMA
Historical income (loss) available to
 common stockholders before provision
 for income taxes.....................   $ (80,221)
Pro forma provision for income taxes
 (9)..................................      --
                                        -----------
Pro forma net income (loss) available
 to common stockholders...............   $ (80,221)
                                        -----------
                                        -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
   See accompanying notes to the unaudited pro forma condensed statements of
                                  operations.
    
 
                                       19
<PAGE>
   
        NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
    
 
   
(1) Represents  a  reduction in  (i) compensation  expense historically  paid to
    Raymond Scherr, the former Chairman of  the Board; and (ii) bonuses paid  to
    certain  key executives based  upon new bonus  plans adopted as  part of the
    Recapitalization and a non-recurring charge associated with options  granted
    to management by the Investors.
    
 
   
(2) Represents the elimination of deferred stock compensation expense associated
    with  the  management  stock  options  which  were  partially  redeemed  and
    partially  exchanged   for   Junior  Preferred   Stock   as  part   of   the
    Recapitalization.
    
 
   
(3) The interest expense adjustment is as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                              YEAR ENDED
                                                                                             DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                                 1996
                                                                                            ---------------
<S>                                                                                         <C>
Historical interest expense...............................................................    $    12,177
Assumed interest expense on new credit facility for working capital purposes..............           (131)
Cash interest expense on the Notes at an interest rate of 11%.............................        (11,000)
                                                                                            ---------------
Total cash interest expense adjustment....................................................    $     1,046
Amortization of deferred financing fees
 on the Notes.............................................................................           (375)
                                                                                            ---------------
Total interest expense adjustment.........................................................    $       671
                                                                                            ---------------
                                                                                            ---------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
(4) The interest expense adjustment relating to the Offering is as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                              YEAR ENDED
                                                                                             DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                                 1996
                                                                                            ---------------
<S>                                                                                         <C>
Interest expense relating to borrowings under Notes repaid................................    $     3,667
Amortization of deferred financing fees under Notes repaid................................            125
                                                                                                  -------
Interest expense adjustment...............................................................    $     3,792
                                                                                                  -------
                                                                                                  -------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
(5) Represents  the elimination of non-recurring  transaction expenses which are
    directly attributable to the Recapitalization.
    
 
   
(6) Reflects the estimated  statutory provision  for income  taxes assuming  the
    Company  was a "C" corporation, and the increase in net expenses as a result
    of the adjustments described in notes (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) above.  See
    "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
    Operations -- Income Taxes."
    
 
   
(7) Represents accrued dividends on  the Senior Preferred  Stock and the  Junior
    Preferred Stock.
    
 
   
(8) Preferred  stock dividends  include the  difference between  the liquidation
    value of the Senior  Preferred Stock and the  financial statement value  for
    all  periods  presented. For  pro  forma financial  statement  purposes, the
    Senior Preferred Stock is assumed to  be redeemed during the period and  the
    Junior Preferred Stock is assumed to be converted into Common Stock.
    
 
   
(9) The  Company  was  an  "S"  Corporation prior  to  the  consummation  of the
    Recapitalization on  June 5,  1996. The  pro forma  statement of  operations
    information  reflects adjustments to historical net  income (loss) as if the
    Company had elected "C" Corporation status for income tax purposes.
    
 
                                       20
<PAGE>
   
                UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET DATA
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                            AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                  --------------------------------------------
                                                                              ADJUSTMENTS
                                                                             RELATED TO THE      PRO FORMA
                                                                   ACTUAL       OFFERING      FOR THE OFFERING
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                                 (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                               <C>        <C>              <C>
ASSETS
 
Current assets:
  Cash and cash equivalents.....................................  $      47    $  25,865         $   25,912
  Accounts receivable...........................................      4,062      --                   4,062
  Inventories...................................................     49,705      --                  49,705
  Prepaid expenses and other current assets.....................      1,455      --                   1,455
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total current assets........................................  $  55,269    $  25,865         $   81,134
Property and equipment, net.....................................     14,966      --                  14,966
Other assets....................................................      4,614       (1,123)(1)          3,491
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
      Total assets..............................................  $  74,849    $  24,742         $   99,591
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
 
Current liabilities:
  Accounts payable..............................................  $  14,005    $ --              $   14,005
  Accrued expenses and other current liabilities................     10,292      --                  10,292
  Revolving line of credit......................................      3,536       (3,536)(2)       --
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total current liabilities...................................  $  27,833    $  (3,536)        $   24,297
Long term debt..................................................    100,000      (33,333)(1)         66,667
Long term liabilities...........................................        645      --                     645
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total liabilities...........................................  $ 128,478    $ (36,869)        $   91,609
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
Senior preferred stock..........................................     15,186      (15,186)(4)       --
Stockholders' equity (deficit):
  Junior preferred stock........................................    138,610     (138,610)(7)       --
  Warrants......................................................      6,500      --                   6,500
  Common stock..................................................         36          157(5)             193
  Additional paid in capital....................................     (6,966)     227,514(6)         220,548
  Retained deficit..............................................   (206,995)     (12,264)(8)       (219,259)
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total stockholders' equity (deficit)........................  $ (68,815)   $  76,797         $    7,982
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
      Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)......  $  74,849    $  24,742         $   99,591
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
  See accompanying notes to unaudited pro forma condensed balance sheet data.
    
 
                                       21
<PAGE>
   
           NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET DATA
    
 
   
(1) Represents the  10%  premium  paid to  redeem  approximately  $33.3  million
    principal  amount of  Notes. Such  redemption resulted  in the proportionate
    reduction of long-term debt and the related unamortized financing costs  and
    accrued interest.
    
 
   
(2) Represents  the application of a portion of the net proceeds of the Offering
    to repay the line of credit under the 1996 Credit Facility.
    
 
   
(3) Represents payroll  taxes to  be  paid by  the  Company upon  conversion  of
    management's Junior Preferred Stock to Common Stock.
    
 
   
(4) Represents  the application of a portion of the net proceeds of the Offering
    to redeem the Senior Preferred Stock.
    
 
   
(5) Represents the adjustments to Common Stock as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Net proceeds from the Offering...................................  $      78
<S>                                                                <C>
Conversion of Junior Preferred Stock.............................         92(7)
Redemption of Common Stock.......................................        (13)(12)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $     157
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
(6) Represents adjustments to Additional Paid in Capital as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Net proceeds from the Offering...................................  $ 107,400
<S>                                                                <C>
Conversion of Junior Preferred Stock.............................    138,529(7)
Redemption of Common Stock.......................................    (18,415)(12)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $ 227,514
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
(7) Represents the conversion of the Junior  Preferred Stock to Common Stock  in
    conjunction with this Offering.
    
 
   
(8) Represents the adjustments to retained earnings as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Premium on redemption of Preferred Stock.........................  $    (648)(11)
<S>                                                                <C>
Premium on redemption of 33.3% of the Notes......................     (3,333)(9)
Write-off of a portion of deferred financing costs on Notes......     (1,123)(1)
Dividend on Senior Preferred Stock...............................     (6,416)(10)
Payroll taxes....................................................       (744)(3)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $ (12,264)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
(9) Represents the 10% premium paid to redeem a portion of the Notes.
    
 
   
(10)Represents  the difference between the amount  of the Senior Preferred Stock
    as reported on the Financial Statements  to be redeemed and its  liquidation
    value.
    
 
   
(11)Represents the 3% premium paid to redeem the Senior Preferred Stock.
    
 
   
(12)Represents  the  redemption  of  shares  of  Common  Stock  pursuant  to the
    Management Tax Redemption.
    
 
                                       22
<PAGE>
   
                    MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
                 FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
    
 
   
GENERAL
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center operated  28 stores  in 15 major  markets as  of December 31,
1996. From 1992 to 1996, Guitar  Center's net sales and operating income  before
deferred  compensation expense grew at compound annual growth rates of 25.6% and
43.0%, respectively, principally due to comparable store sales growth  averaging
14.8%  per year and the opening of new stores. Guitar Center achieved comparable
store net sales  growth of 17.3%,  23.4% and  10.2% for the  fiscal years  ended
December  31, 1994, 1995 and 1996,  respectively. These increases were primarily
attributable to  increases in  unit sales  rather than  increases in  prices  or
changes in product mix. Management believes such volume increases are the result
of  the  continued  success  of the  Company's  implementation  of  its business
strategy, continued strong growth in the music products industry and  increasing
consumer  awareness  of the  Guitar  Center name.  The  Company does  not expect
comparable store sales to continue to increase at historical rates.
    
 
   
    The Company opened seven stores in fiscal 1996 and presently expects to open
or acquire  approximately eight  stores in  each  of fiscal  1997 and  1998.  In
preparation  for these additional stores, management has dedicated a substantial
amount of resources over the past  several years to building the  infrastructure
necessary  to support  a large, national  chain. For example,  the Company spent
$2.9 million from January  1, 1993 to  December 31, 1995  on system upgrades  to
support  the storewide integration of  a state-of-the-art management information
system. The Company  has also  established centralized  operating and  financial
controls  and has  implemented an  extensive training  program to  ensure a high
level  of  customer  service  in  its  stores.  Management  believes  that   the
infrastructure  is in place to support its needs for the immediately foreseeable
future, including its present expansion plans as described herein.
    
 
   
    Guitar Center's expansion strategy includes opening or acquiring  additional
stores  in certain of its existing markets  and entering new markets. As part of
its store expansion strategy, the Company  opened five stores during a  14-month
period from October 1993 through November 1994. Additionally, the Company opened
one store in December 1995, seven stores in 1996 and opened three new stores and
acquired  two existing stores from a third party during the first four months of
1997. The Company will continue to  pursue its strategy of clustering stores  in
major markets to take advantage of operating and advertising efficiencies and to
build  awareness of the Guitar Center name in new markets. In some markets where
the Company has pursued its clustering strategy, there has been some transfer of
sales from certain existing stores to new locations. Generally, however,  mature
stores  have demonstrated  net sales  growth rates  consistent with  the Company
average. As the  Company enters  new markets,  management expects  that it  will
initially  incur higher administrative  and advertising costs  per store than it
currently experiences in established markets.
    
 
   
    The following table sets forth certain historical income statement data as a
percentage of net sales:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            FISCAL YEAR ENDED
                                                                                               DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                    ----------------------------------
                                                                                       1994        1995        1996
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
<S>                                                                                 <C>         <C>         <C>
Net sales.........................................................................      100.0%      100.0%      100.0%
Gross profit......................................................................       28.5        27.7        28.2
Selling, general and administrative expenses......................................       20.3        19.2        19.4
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Operating income before deferred compensation expense.............................        8.2         8.5         8.8
Deferred compensation expense.....................................................        0.9         1.8        33.7
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Operating income (loss)...........................................................        7.3         6.7       (24.9)
Interest expense, net.............................................................        0.2         0.1         5.7
Transaction expenses and other....................................................      --          --            3.3
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Income (loss) before income taxes.................................................        7.1         6.6       (33.9)
Income taxes......................................................................        0.3         0.2       --
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Net income (loss).................................................................        6.8%        6.4%      (33.9)%
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
</TABLE>
    
 
                                       23
<PAGE>
   
    FISCAL 1996 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1995
    
 
   
    Net sales for  the year ended  December 31, 1996  increased 25.0% to  $213.3
million  from $170.7 million in fiscal 1995.  This growth was attributable to an
increase of $25.6 million in new store  net sales, accounting for 60.1% of  such
increase.  In addition,  comparable store  net sales  increased 10.2%,  or $17.0
million, accounting for 39.9% of such  increase. The increase in comparable  net
store  sales was primarily  attributable to increases in  unit sales rather than
increases in  prices  or  changes  in  the mix  of  sales  between  the  product
categories.  Such volume  increases were primarily  the result  of the continued
success of  the Company's  implementation of  its business  strategy,  continued
strong  growth in the music products  industry and increasing consumer awareness
of Guitar Center stores.
    
 
   
    Gross profit for  fiscal 1996  compared to  fiscal 1995  increased 27.1%  to
$60.1 million from $47.3 million in fiscal 1995. Gross profit as a percentage of
net  sales ("gross  margin") for  fiscal 1996 increased  to 28.2%  from 27.7% in
fiscal 1995.  This increase  in gross  margin was  primarily the  result of  the
introduction  and sales of higher margin high-technology pro audio and recording
equipment.
    
 
   
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1996 increased 26.6%
to $41.3 million  from $32.7  million in  fiscal 1995.  As a  percentage of  net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1996 increased to
19.4%  from 19.2% in fiscal 1995. This change reflects an increase in the number
of store employees in anticipation  of continued comparable store sales  growth,
as  well as the incremental cost of  staffing newly opened stores prior to sales
reaching mature levels. During fiscal 1996, seven new stores commenced operation
and were open an average  of four and a half  months. In addition, the  increase
reflects  increases in  corporate personnel  and management  information systems
expenses associated with the Company's continuing expansion.
    
 
   
    Deferred compensation expense  for fiscal  1996 increased  to $71.8  million
from  $3.1 million  in fiscal 1995.  The deferred  compensation expense resulted
from a $69.9 million charge related  to the purchase and exchange of  management
stock  options and the cancellation of  the Company's prior stock option program
and a  $1.9 million  non-cash charge  related to  stock options  granted by  the
Investors  to certain members  of management. These  expenses are non-recurring.
The Company has not, and will not, incur any obligation in connection with  such
grant  of  options  by  the Investors.  See  "The  Recapitalization  and Related
Transactions" and "Certain Transactions --  Options Granted by the Investors  to
Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
    The  operating loss for fiscal 1996  was $53.0 million compared to operating
income of  $11.5  million  in  fiscal 1995.  Operating  income  before  deferred
compensation  expense increased 28.1%  to $18.7 million  from $14.6 million over
the comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income  before
deferred compensation expense for fiscal 1996 increased to 8.8% from 8.5% in the
prior year.
    
 
   
    Interest  expense, net for fiscal 1996  increased to $12.2 million from $0.4
million in  fiscal 1995.  This increase  was attributable  to the  write-off  of
financing  fees  of $4.7  million and  interest of  $7.5 million  on outstanding
borrowings during the seven months following the Recapitalization.
    
 
   
    Nonrecurring  transaction   expenses  of   $6.9  million   related  to   the
Recapitalization were expensed in fiscal 1996.
    
 
   
    Net  income (loss) for  fiscal 1996 decreased to  ($72.4) million from $10.9
million in fiscal 1995.
    
 
   
    FISCAL 1995 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1994
    
 
   
    Net sales for  the year ended  December 31, 1995  increased 32.3% to  $170.7
million  from $129.0 million in fiscal 1994.  This growth was attributable to an
increase of 23.4% in comparable store net sales which contributed $28.4 million,
or 68.1% of the  increase. In addition, $13.3  million was contributed from  new
store  sales  which  accounted  for  31.9%  of  the  increase.  The  increase in
comparable store net sales was primarily attributable to increases in unit sales
rather than increases in  prices or changes  in the mix  of products sold.  Such
volume  increases were primarily  the result of  the continued implementation of
the Company's business strategy, continued  strong growth in the music  products
industry and increasing consumer awareness of Guitar Center stores.
    
 
                                       24
<PAGE>
   
    Gross  profit for  fiscal 1995 increased  28.5% to $47.3  million from $36.8
million in fiscal  1994. Gross margin  for fiscal 1995  decreased to 27.7%  from
28.5%  in fiscal 1994. This decrease in gross margin was primarily the result of
(i) an  increase in  the proportion  of total  net sales  attributable to  lower
margin  pro-audio and recording  equipment and (ii) the  continuation of a sales
program which emphasized  volume increases,  customer service  and market  share
over gross margin.
    
 
   
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1995 increased 24.9%
to  $32.7 million  from $26.1  million in  fiscal 1994.  As a  percentage of net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1995 decreased to
19.2% from 20.3% in fiscal 1994 reflecting the leveraging of fixed expenses over
greater store net sales.
    
 
   
    Deferred compensation  expense  for fiscal  1995  increased 145.2%  to  $3.1
million  from  $1.3 million  in fiscal  1994.  Deferred compensation  relates to
non-cash expenses associated with the Company's prior stock option program.
    
 
   
    Operating income after deferred compensation for fiscal 1995 increased 22.9%
to $11.5 million  from $9.4  million for  fiscal 1994.  Operating income  before
deferred  compensation increased 37.4% to $14.6  million from $10.6 million over
the comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income  before
deferred  compensation for  fiscal 1995 increased  to 8.5% from  8.2% for fiscal
1994. This  increase was  primarily  attributable to  the decrease  in  selling,
general  and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales, offset by the
decrease in gross margin.
    
 
   
    Interest expense, net for fiscal 1995  increased 46.0% to $0.4 million  from
$0.3  million  for  fiscal 1994.  This  increase was  attributable  to increased
borrowings to fund distributions to the Company's former sole stockholder.
    
 
   
    Net income  for fiscal  1995  increased 23.0%  to  $10.9 million  from  $8.8
million for fiscal 1994.
    
 
   
    FISCAL 1994 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1993
    
 
   
    Net  sales  for fiscal  1994 increased  32.6% to  $129.0 million  from $97.3
million in fiscal 1993. This growth was attributable to an increase of 17.3%  in
comparable  store sales which contributed $15.9 million, or 50% of the increase.
In addition, $15.8 million was contributed from new store sales which  accounted
for  50% of the increase.  The increase in comparable  store sales was primarily
attributable to increases in unit sales  rather than increases in prices or  the
mix  of products sold.  Such volume increases  were primarily the  result of the
implementation of the  Company's business strategy,  continued strong growth  in
the  music products industry and increasing  consumer awareness of Guitar Center
stores.
    
 
   
    Gross profit for  fiscal 1994 increased  27.7% to $36.8  million from  $28.8
million  in fiscal 1993.  Gross margin for  fiscal 1994 decreased  to 28.5% from
29.6% in fiscal 1993. This decrease in gross margin was primarily the result  of
(i)  an increase  in the  percentage of  total net  sales attributable  to lower
margin pro-audio and recording equipment and (ii) the implementation of a  sales
program  which emphasized  volume increases,  customer service  and market share
over gross margin.
    
 
   
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1994 increased 19.4%
to $26.1 million  from $21.9  million in  fiscal 1993.  As a  percentage of  net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1994 decreased to
20.3%  from 22.5%  in fiscal 1993,  reflecting the leveraging  of fixed expenses
over greater store net sales.
    
 
   
    Deferred compensation expense for fiscal 1994 decreased 9.4% to $1.3 million
from $1.4  million in  fiscal 1993.  Deferred compensation  relates to  non-cash
expenses associated with the Company's prior stock option program.
    
 
   
    Operating income after deferred compensation for fiscal 1994 increased 70.2%
to  $9.4  million from  $5.5 million  for fiscal  1993. Operating  income before
deferred compensation increased 54.2%  to $10.6 million  from $6.9 million  over
the  comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income before
deferred compensation for  fiscal 1994 increased  to 8.2% from  7.1% for  fiscal
1993.  This  increase was  primarily attributable  to  the decrease  in selling,
general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales, offset by  the
decrease in gross profit as a percentage of net sales.
    
 
                                       25
<PAGE>
   
    Interest  expense, net  for fiscal 1994  remained unchanged  at $0.3 million
from fiscal 1993.
    
 
   
    Net income for fiscal 1994 increased 72.9% to $8.8 million from $5.1 million
for fiscal 1993.
    
 
   
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
    
 
   
    On March 19, 1997, the Company  completed the Offering pursuant to which  it
sold  6,750,000 shares of Common Stock  and received approximately $94.1 million
in net cash proceeds (before  deducting expenses associated with the  Offering).
On  April 15, 1997,  the Company sold  an additional 1,012,500  shares of Common
Stock and received  an additional $14.1  million in net  cash proceeds upon  the
underwriters'  exercise in  full of  their over-allotment  option. Approximately
$22.9 million of the  net proceeds from  the Offering was used  to redeem, at  a
premium,  all of the Company's outstanding  Senior Preferred Stock. As a result,
the Company will report a  dividend for the first quarter  of 1997 in an  amount
equal  to the  difference between  the financial  statement value  of the Senior
Preferred Stock and the  face amount thereof, plus  the aggregate amount of  the
premium  paid on the Senior Preferred Stock. Immediately following the Offering,
the Company called for redemption, at  a premium, an aggregate of  approximately
$33.3 million of Notes. Approximately $37.9 million of the net proceeds from the
Offering were used to redeem such Notes on April 19, 1997 and to pay all accrued
and   unpaid  interest  with  respect  to   the  Notes  called  for  redemption.
Accordingly, the Company anticipates that an extraordinary charge to  operations
will  be incurred equal to the aggregate amount of the premium paid on the Notes
called for  redemption  plus  the  write-off of  one-third  of  the  unamortized
deferred   financing  fees   associated  with   the  issuance   of  such  Notes.
Approximately $9.7 million  of the net  proceeds from the  Offering was used  to
repay  all  amounts outstanding  under the  1996 Credit  Facility. Approximately
$18.4 million  of  the  net  proceeds  from the  Offering  was  used  to  redeem
approximately 1,317,000 shares of Common Stock in the Management Tax Redemption.
The  balance of the  net proceeds were retained  for general corporate purposes,
including the  acquisition of  two musical  instruments stores  in the  Atlanta,
Georgia market in April 1997.
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center's  need  for  liquidity will  arise  primarily  from interest
payable on its indebtedness and the funding of the Company's capital expenditure
and working capital requirements, as well as possible acquisitions. The  Company
has  historically financed its operations through internally generated funds and
borrowings under its credit facilities. The Company has no mandatory payments of
principal on  the Notes  prior to  their  final maturity  in 2006.  The  Company
presently  has  no  amounts  outstanding under  its  1996  Credit  Facility. The
interest rate under the 1996 Credit Facility  as of the date of this  Prospectus
was  9.75% on  prime rate  based borrowings and  8.40% on  Eurodollar rate based
borrowings. The agreement underlying  the 1996 Credit  Facility expires June  1,
2001  and  includes certain  restrictive  covenants which,  among  other things,
require the Company  to maintain certain  financial ratios. The  Company was  in
compliance  with respect to all  such requirements as of  December 31, 1996. The
Company may borrow up to $25 million under the 1996 Credit Facility, as in place
on the date  hereof. The Company  is currently negotiating  a secured  successor
bank  facility to  replace the 1996  Credit Facility, although  no agreement has
been reached as of the date of  this Prospectus. If and when the Company  enters
into  such a successor  facility, it presently expects  that such facility would
permit borrowings in excess of the $25 million of borrowings permitted under the
1996 Credit Facility.
    
 
   
    For fiscal 1996, cash used in operating activities was $44.9 million. During
fiscal 1995,  cash provided  by  operating activities  was $16.4  million.  Cash
provided  by  financing  activities was  $49.3  million for  fiscal  1996, which
includes the effects of the Recapitalization. Cash used in financing  activities
during  fiscal 1995 was $15.3 million which consisted primarily of distributions
to the Company's former sole stockholder of $14.5 million.
    
 
   
    Capital expenditures totaled  $6.1 million  for fiscal  1996. The  Company's
capital   expenditures  related  to  the   opening  of  new  stores,  management
information systems and store remodels.
    
 
   
    The Company  intends to  pursue  an aggressive  growth strategy  by  opening
additional  stores in  new and  existing markets.  Each new  store typically has
required approximately  $1.5  million  for gross  inventory.  Historically,  the
Company's  cost  of  capital improvements  for  an  average new  store  has been
approximately $450,000,  consisting  of  leasehold  improvements,  fixtures  and
equipment. Pre-opening
    
 
                                       26
<PAGE>
costs  for new  stores have averaged  approximately $110,000 per  new store, the
majority  of  which  are  expensed  and  the  remaining  portion  of  which  are
capitalized  and amortized over a twelve-month period. Nominal pre-opening costs
are incurred for the stores that are relocated.
 
   
    The Company  also believes  that there  may be  attractive opportunities  to
expand  by selectively acquiring existing  music product retailers. For example,
in April  1997 the  Company  consummated the  acquisition  of a  music  products
retailer  operating two stores  in the Atlanta, Georgia  market. See "Summary --
Recent Developments." The Company, in the ordinary course of business, regularly
evaluates  and  enters  into  negotiations  relating  to  potential  acquisition
candidates  in new and existing market  areas. Any such transactions may involve
the payment by the Company of cash or securities (including equity  securities),
or  a combination thereof.  There can be  no assurance that  the Company will be
able  to  identify  suitable  acquisition  candidates  available  for  sale   at
reasonable prices or consummate additional acquisitions.
    
 
   
    Management  believes  that the  Company has  adequate capital  resources and
liquidity  to  meet  its  borrowing  obligations,  fund  all  required   capital
expenditures  and  pursue its  business strategy  for at  least the  next twelve
months, including its present plans for expansion as described elsewhere herein.
The Company's capital resources and liquidity are expected to be provided by the
Company's cash  flow  from  operations  and borrowings  under  the  1996  Credit
Facility,  or  a  replacement  facility (if  implemented).  Depending  on market
conditions, the Company may also  incur additional indebtedness or issue  equity
securities.  There can be no assurance that such additional capital, if and when
required, will be available on terms acceptable to the Company, if at all.
    
 
   
    In December 1996, Chase  Ventures, Wells Fargo  and Weston Presidio  granted
options  (the "Investor Options") to purchase  an aggregate of 277,194 shares of
Common Stock at a purchase price of $4.33 per share to certain officers and  key
managers  of the  Company. Under  generally accepted  accounting principles, the
Company recorded a non-cash, non-recurring compensation charge of  approximately
$1.9  million  in the  fourth quarter  of  1996 with  an offsetting  increase to
stockholders' equity. The Company is not a party to this agreement and has  not,
and will not, incur any obligation in connection with such options. See "Certain
Transactions  --  Options  Granted  by  the  Investors  to  Certain  Members  of
Management."
    
 
   
INCOME TAXES
    
 
   
    The Company operated as an "S" corporation for all reported periods prior to
the closing of the Recapitalization on June 5, 1996. Accordingly, federal  taxes
were  paid at the  stockholder level and  the Company paid  minimal state income
taxes. Upon consummation of the Recapitalization, the Company eliminated its "S"
corporation status and, accordingly, became subject to federal, state and  local
income  taxes. The Company anticipates that the impact of the termination of the
"S" corporation and  the election of  the "C" corporation  status on its  future
operations  will be that additional federal and  state income taxes will have to
be provided and charged  to the statement of  operations. The Company  believes,
however, that the cash impact to the Company will be reduced as the Company will
no  longer make distributions to its former sole stockholder. See "Unaudited Pro
Forma Condensed Statements of Operations."
    
 
   
    As a result of the $72.4 million  loss incurred in fiscal 1996, the  Company
has  a  tax net  operating  loss carryforward  for  federal income  tax purposes
aggregating $64.2 million, which will expire  if unused in 2011. As of  December
31, 1996, the Company had fully reserved the related deferred tax asset of $22.5
million.
    
 
   
SEASONALITY
    
 
   
    The  Company's  results  are not  highly  seasonal, although,  as  with most
retailers, sales  in the  fourth  quarter are  typically  higher than  in  other
quarters.
    
 
   
INFLATION
    
 
   
    The  Company  believes  that  the  relatively  moderate  rates  of inflation
experienced in recent years have not had a significant impact on its nets  sales
or profitability.
    
 
                                       27
<PAGE>
   
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
    
 
   
    This  Prospectus  contains certain  forward-looking statements  relating to,
among other things,  future results  of operations, growth  plans, sales,  gross
margin  and  expense  trends,  capital  requirements  and  general  industry and
business conditions applicable to the Company. These forward-looking  statements
are  based largely on  the Company's current  expectations and are  subject to a
number of risks and uncertainties.  Actual results could differ materially  from
these  forward-looking statements.  Important factors to  consider in evaluating
such forward-looking statements include  changes in external competitive  market
factors,  change in the  Company's business strategy or  an inability to execute
its strategy due to unanticipated changes in the music products industry or  the
economy in general, the emergence of new or growing specialty retailers of music
products  and  various competitive  factors that  may  prevent the  Company from
competing successfully in existing  or future markets. In  light of these  risks
and  uncertainties,  many of  which  are described  in  greater detail  in "Risk
Factors,"  there  can  be  no  assurance  that  the  forward-looking  statements
contained in this Prospectus will in fact be realized. See "Risk Factors."
    
 
                                       28
<PAGE>
   
                                    BUSINESS
    
 
   
COMPANY HISTORY
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center was  founded in 1964  in Hollywood, California.  In 1972, the
Company opened its second store in  San Francisco to capitalize on the  emerging
San  Francisco rock 'n roll  scene. By this time,  Guitar Center's inventory had
been expanded  to  include  drums,  keyboards, accessories  and  pro  audio  and
recording  equipment. Throughout  the 1980s,  Guitar Center  expanded by opening
nine stores in  five major  markets including Chicago,  Dallas and  Minneapolis.
Since 1990, the Company has continued its new store expansion and has focused on
building  the  infrastructure necessary  to  manage the  Company's strategically
planned growth. Current executive officers and  key managers have been with  the
Company  for an  average of  11 years  and two  of such  executive officers (the
Company's President and Chief Executive Officer and the Company's Executive Vice
President and  Chief  Operating  Officer)  effectively  assumed  full  operating
control  in 1992. Since then, management has focused on developing and realizing
its long-term  goal of  expanding its  position as  the leading  music  products
retailer throughout the United States.
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center's flagship Hollywood  store currently is  one of the nation's
largest and  best-known retail  stores  of its  kind with  approximately  30,600
square  feet of retail  space. The Hollywood  store features one  of the largest
used and vintage guitar collections in the United States, attracting buyers  and
collectors  from around the world.  In front of the  Hollywood store is the Rock
Walk which memorializes over  70 famous musicians and  music pioneers. The  Rock
Walk  attracts several tour  buses daily and has  helped to create international
recognition of the Guitar Center name.
    
 
   
BUSINESS
    
 
   
    The Company operated 28 stores in 15  major U.S. markets as of December  31,
1996,  including, among  others, areas  in or  near Los  Angeles, San Francisco,
Chicago, Miami, Houston,  Dallas, Detroit, Boston  and Minneapolis. From  fiscal
1992  through fiscal 1996,  the Company's net sales  and operating income before
deferred compensation expense grew at compound annual growth rates of 25.6%  and
43.0%,  respectively.  This  growth was  principally  the result  of  strong and
consistent comparable store  sales growth,  averaging 14.8% per  year over  such
five-year  period,  and the  opening of  13 new  stores. Comparable  store sales
(stores opened for at  least 14 months)  for fiscal 1992,  1993, 1994, 1995  and
1996  were  $85.6 million,  $95.4 million,  $113.2  million, $157.5  million and
$187.7 million, respectively.
    
 
   
    Guitar Center offers a unique retail concept in the music products industry,
combining an interactive,  hands-on shopping experience  with superior  customer
service and a broad selection of brand name, high-quality products at guaranteed
low  prices. The Company creates an  entertaining and exciting atmosphere in its
stores with bold and dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted by  bright,
multi-colored  lighting, high  ceilings, music  and videos.  Management believes
that approximately 80% of the Company's  sales are to professional and  aspiring
musicians  who  generally  view  the  purchase of  music  products  as  a career
necessity. These sophisticated customers  rely upon the Company's  knowledgeable
and  highly trained salespeople  to answer technical questions  and to assist in
product demonstrations.
    
 
   
    The Guitar Center prototype  store generally ranges in  size from 12,000  to
15,000  square feet (as compared to a  typical music products retail store which
averages approximately 3,200 square feet) and is designed to encourage customers
to hold and play instruments. Each store carries an average of 7,000 core  SKUs,
which management believes is significantly greater than a typical music products
retail  store,  and is  organized  into five  departments,  each focused  on one
product category. These departments cater to a musician's specific product needs
and are  staffed  by  specialized  salespeople,  many  of  whom  are  practicing
musicians.  Management believes  this retail concept  differentiates the Company
from its competitors and encourages repeat business.
    
 
   
    Guitar Center stores historically have generated strong and stable operating
results. All  of the  Company's stores,  after being  open for  at least  twelve
months,  have had positive store-level operating income in each of the past five
fiscal years.
    
 
                                       29
<PAGE>
   
    The following summarizes certain key operating statistics of a Guitar Center
store and is based upon the 21 stores operated by the Company for the full  year
ended December 31, 1996:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                              <C>
Average 1996 net sales per square foot.........................  $      707
Average 1996 net sales per store...............................   9,148,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income (1)..................   1,402,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income margin (1)...........        15.3%
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Store-level  operating income includes individual store revenue and expenses
    plus allocated rebates,  cash discounts and  purchasing department  salaries
    (based upon individual store sales).
    
 
   
    Management  is highly committed to  the success of Guitar  Center. As of the
date of this Prospectus,  executive officers and  key managers beneficially  own
approximately  17.8% of  the Company's  outstanding Common  Stock. The Company's
growth strategy is to continue to increase its presence in its existing  markets
and to open or acquire new stores in strategically selected markets. The Company
will  continue to pursue its  strategy of clustering stores  in major markets to
take advantage of operating and advertising efficiencies and to build  awareness
of  the Guitar Center name  in new markets. The Company  opened a total of seven
stores in fiscal 1996,  and presently expects to  open or acquire  approximately
eight  stores in each of fiscal 1997  and fiscal 1998. The Company has committed
substantial resources  to building  a  corporate infrastructure  and  management
information  systems that it believes can support the Company's needs, including
its expansion plans, for the foreseeable future.
    
 
   
    For fiscal years ended December 31,  1993, 1994, 1995 and 1996, the  Company
had  net income (loss) of $5.1 million,  $8.8 million, $10.9 million and ($72.4)
million, respectively. The  results for  fiscal 1996 reflect  $11.6 million  for
transaction   costs  and  financing   fees  incurred  in   connection  with  the
Recapitalization  and  non-recurring  deferred  compensation  expense  of  $71.8
million, substantially all of which related to the Recapitalization.
    
 
   
INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
    
 
   
    The  United States retail market for music products in 1995 was estimated in
a study by MUSIC TRADES magazine to be approximately $5.5 billion in net  sales,
representing  a  five year  compound  annual growth  rate  of 7.9%.  The broadly
defined music products market,  according to the  National Association of  Music
Merchants  ("NAMM"), includes  retail sales  of string  and fretted instruments,
sound reinforcement  and recording  equipment,  drums, keyboards,  print  music,
pianos,  organs and school  band and orchestral  instruments. Products currently
offered by  Guitar  Center include  categories  of products  which  account  for
approximately  $4.0 billion  of this  market, representing  a five-year compound
annual growth rate of  8.6%. The music products  market as currently defined  by
NAMM,  however,  does  not  include the  significant  used  and  vintage product
markets, or  the  computer software  or  apparel  market in  which  the  Company
actively  participates. According to findings by a Gallup Survey, as reported by
NAMM, there were 62 million amateur musicians in the United States in 1994, with
62% of households characterized as  "player households," in which someone  plays
or has played a musical instrument.
    
 
   
    The  industry  is highly  fragmented with  the  nation's leading  five music
products retailers,  as  measured by  the  number  of stores  operated  by  such
retailers  (I.E, the Company,  Sam Ash Music  Corp, Brook Mays/C&S/H&H, Fletcher
Music Center and Musicians Friend,  Inc.), accounting for approximately 8.4%  of
the  industry's estimated $5.5 billion in net sales in 1995. Furthermore, ninety
percent of the  industry's estimated  8,200 retailers  operate only  one or  two
stores.  A typical music products store averages approximately 3,200 square feet
and generates an average of approximately  $0.6 million in annual net sales.  In
contrast,  a Guitar  Center store generally  averages between  12,000 and 15,000
square feet and in  1996 generated an average  of approximately $8.3 million  in
annual  net  sales  for  stores  open the  full  year  (excluding  the Company's
Hollywood store).
    
 
   
    Over the  past  ten  years,  technological advances  in  the  industry  have
resulted   in  dramatic  changes  to   the  nature  of  music-related  products.
Manufacturers have  combined  computers and  micro-processor  technologies  with
musical  equipment to create a new generation  of products capable of high grade
sound processing  and  reproduction.  Products  featuring  this  technology  are
available in a variety of
    
 
                                       30
<PAGE>
   
forms  and have  broad applications across  most of the  Company's music product
categories. Most importantly, rapid technological advances have resulted in  the
continued  introduction of higher quality products  offered at lower prices. For
example, today  an  individual  consumer  can  more  affordably  create  a  home
recording  studio  which interacts  with personal  computers  and is  capable of
producing high-quality digital recordings. Until recently, this type of powerful
sound processing  capability  was  prohibitively  expensive  and  was  typically
purchased only by professional sound recording studios.
    
 
   
BUSINESS STRATEGY
    
 
   
    Management's  goal is to continue to  expand Guitar Center's position as the
leading music  products retailer  throughout the  United States.  The  principal
elements of the Company's business strategy are as follows:
    
 
   
        EXPANSION  STRATEGY.  Guitar Center's  expansion strategy is to continue
    to  increase  its  market  share  in  existing  markets  and  to   penetrate
    strategically  selected markets. The Company opened  a total of seven stores
    in fiscal 1996, and currently anticipates opening approximately eight stores
    in each of fiscal 1997  and fiscal 1998. In the  first four months of  1997,
    the  Company opened  three new stores  and acquired two  existing stores. In
    preparation for  this  expansion,  management has  dedicated  a  substantial
    amount  of  its  resources  over  the past  several  years  to  building the
    infrastructure necessary to support a large national chain. In addition, the
    Company believes it  has developed a  methodology for targeting  prospective
    store   sites  which   includes  analyzing   demographic  and  psychographic
    characteristics of  a potential  store location.  See "--  Site  Selection."
    Management  also believes there may be attractive opportunities to expand by
    selectively acquiring existing music products retailers.
    
 
   
        EXTENSIVE SELECTION OF MERCHANDISE.   Guitar Center offers an  extensive
    selection of brand name music products complemented by lesser known, hard to
    find  items  and  unique, vintage  equipment.  The average  7,000  core SKUs
    offered through each  Guitar Center  store provide  a breadth  and depth  of
    in-stock  items which management believes  is not available from traditional
    music products  retailers, such  as the  two stores  in the  Atlanta  market
    acquired in April 1997.
    
 
   
        HIGHLY  INTERACTIVE, MUSICIAN-FRIENDLY  STORE CONCEPT.   The purchase of
    musical instruments is a highly personal decision for musicians.  Management
    therefore   believes  that  a  large  part   of  the  Company's  success  is
    attributable  to  its  creative   instrument  presentations  and   colorful,
    interactive   displays  which  encourage  the  customer  to  hold  and  play
    instruments as well as to participate in product demonstrations. Each  store
    also  provides  private  sound-controlled  rooms  to  enhance  a  customer's
    listening experience while testing various instruments.
    
 
   
        EXCEPTIONAL  CUSTOMER  SERVICE.     Exceptional   customer  service   is
    fundamental  to the  Company's operating strategy.  Accordingly, the Company
    conducts extensive training programs for its salespeople, who specialize  in
    one  of  the  Company's  five  product  categories.  Many  of  the Company's
    salespeople  are  also  musicians.  With  the  advances  in  technology  and
    continuous  new  product  introductions  in  the  music  products  industry,
    customers increasingly rely on qualified salespeople to offer expert  advice
    and  assist in product demonstrations. Management believes that its emphasis
    on training  and  customer  service distinguishes  the  Company  within  the
    industry and is a critical part of Guitar Center's success.
    
 
   
        INNOVATIVE  PROMOTIONAL AND MARKETING PROGRAMS.   Guitar Center sponsors
    innovative  promotional  and   marketing  events   which  include   in-store
    demonstrations,  famous artist  appearances and weekend  themed sales events
    designed to create significant store traffic and exposure. In addition,  the
    Company's  special grand opening  activities in new  markets are designed to
    generate consumer awareness  for each new  store. Management believes  these
    events  help the  Company to  build a loyal  customer base  and to encourage
    repeat business. Since  its inception,  the Company has  compiled a  unique,
    proprietary  database  containing  information  on  more  than  one  million
    customers. This database enables Guitar Center to advertise to select target
    customers based  on historical  buying patterns.  The Company  believes  the
    typical  music  products retailer  does not  have  the resources  to support
    large-scale promotional events or an extensive advertising program.
    
 
                                       31
<PAGE>
   
        GUARANTEED LOW PRICES.   Guitar  Center endeavors  to be  the low  price
    leader  in  each of  its markets,  as  underscored by  its 30-day  low price
    guarantee. The  Company's  size  permits  it to  take  advantage  of  volume
    discounts  for large  orders and  other vendor  supported programs. Although
    prices are  usually  determined on  a  regional basis,  store  managers  are
    trained  and  authorized  to  adjust  prices  in  response  to  local market
    conditions.
    
 
   
        EXPERIENCED AND MOTIVATED MANAGEMENT TEAM.   The executive officers  and
    key  managers have an average of 11  years with the Company. In addition, as
    of the  date  of  this  Prospectus,  executive  officers  and  key  managers
    beneficially  own approximately  17.8% of  the Company's  outstanding Common
    Stock. See "Management" and "Principal Stockholders."
    
 
   
MERCHANDISING
    
 
   
    Guitar Center's merchandising concept  differentiates the Company from  most
of  its competitors. The Company creates an entertaining and exciting atmosphere
in its stores with bold  and dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted  by
bright,  multi-colored lighting,  high ceilings,  music and  videos. The Company
offers  its  merchandise  at  guaranteed  low  prices  and  utilizes  aggressive
marketing  and  advertising  to  attract  new  customers  and  maintain existing
customer  loyalty.  The  principal  elements  of  the  Company's   merchandising
philosophy are as follows:
    
 
   
    EXTENSIVE  SELECTION OF MERCHANDISE.  The  Company seeks to maintain a broad
customer appeal by offering high-quality merchandise at multiple price points to
serve musicians ranging  from the  casual hobbyist to  the serious  professional
performer.  Guitar  Center  offers  five  primary  product  categories: guitars,
amplifiers, percussion  instruments,  keyboards  and  pro  audio  and  recording
equipment.
    
 
   
          GUITARS.  The Company believes that Guitar Center's electric, acoustic
    and  bass  guitar  selections are  among  the  deepest and  broadest  in the
    industry. Each store  features for sale  300 to 500  guitars on the  "guitar
    wall"  and also  displays many  autographed instruments  from world-renowned
    musicians. Major manufacturers,  including Fender,  Gibson, Taylor,  Martin,
    Ovation  and Ibanez, are well represented  in popular models and colors. The
    Company  believes  it  has  one   of  the  largest  selections  of   custom,
    one-of-a-kind  and used/vintage guitars  of any retailer.  Prices range from
    $175 for entry-level guitars to over $50,000 for special vintage guitars. In
    addition, the Company has recently  expanded its line of string  instruments
    to  include banjos,  mandolins and  dobros, among  others. The  Company also
    offers an extensive selection of guitar sound processing units and  products
    which   allow  the  guitar  to  interface  with  a  personal  computer.  The
    introduction of such equipment  has enabled the  Company to serve  crossover
    demand  from  the  traditional  guitarist  into  new  computer-related sound
    products.
    
 
   
          AMPLIFIERS.  The Company offers an extensive selection of electric and
    bass guitar amplifiers and in addition carries a broad selection of boutique
    and vintage amplifiers with prices ranging from $50 to $3,000. Guitar Center
    represents most manufacturers, including Marshall, Fender, Crate, Ampeg  and
    Roland.
    
 
   
          PERCUSSION  INSTRUMENTS.  The  Company believes that  Guitar Center is
    one of the largest  retailers of percussion products  in the United  States.
    The  Company's offerings range from basic drum kits to free standing African
    congos and bongos and other rhythmic and electronic percussion products with
    prices ranging from $10 to $10,000.  The Company also has a large  selection
    of  vintage  and  used  percussion  instruments.  Name  brands  include Drum
    Workshop, Remo,  Sabian,  Pearl, Yamaha,  Premier,  Tama and  Zildjian.  The
    Company  carries an extensive  selection of digital drum  kits and hand held
    digital drum units.  The digital  units produce  a variety  of high  quality
    life-like drum sounds and have broad appeal to musicians.
    
 
   
          KEYBOARDS.    Guitar  Center  carries  a  wide  selection  of keyboard
    products and computer peripheral and  software packages with prices  ranging
    from  $150 to $5,000. The Company  offers an extensive selection of software
    for the  professional, hobbyist,  studio engineer  and the  post  production
    market  enthusiast. The product  line covers a  broad range of manufacturers
    including Roland,
    
 
                                       32
<PAGE>
    Korg, Emu  and Ensoniq.  The Company  also maintains  a broad  selection  of
    computer  related accessories,  including sound  cards, sound  libraries and
    composition, sequence and recording software.
 
   
          PRO AUDIO  AND RECORDING  EQUIPMENT.   Guitar Center's  pro audio  and
    recording  equipment division offers products ranging  in price from $100 to
    $25,000 for  musicians at  every  level, from  the  casual hobbyist  to  the
    professional   recording  engineer.  Guitar  Center's  products  range  from
    recording tape to state-of-the-art  digital recorders. The Company  believes
    it  also carries  one of  the largest  pro audio  assortment of professional
    stage audio equipment  for small  traveling bands, private  clubs and  large
    touring  professional bands.  The Company's  major brand  name manufacturers
    include JBL, Panasonic, Sony, Mackie, Tascam and Alesis.
    
 
   
    BROAD USED  MERCHANDISE  SELECTION.    Guitar  Center  offers  an  extensive
selection  of used merchandise,  the majority of  which derives from instruments
traded in or sold to Guitar Center  by customers. The Company believes that  its
trade-in   policy  assists  in  attracting   sales  by  providing  musicians  an
alternative form of payment and the convenience of selling an old instrument and
purchasing a new one at a single  location. Used products are bought and  priced
to  sell by store  managers who are  well trained and  knowledgeable in the used
musical instrument market.
    
 
   
    GUARANTEED LOW PRICES.   Guitar Center endeavors to  be the price leader  in
each  of the markets it  serves. The Company is one  of the leading retailers in
each of its  product categories and  its size  permits it to  take advantage  of
volume  discounts  for  large orders  and  other vendor  supported  programs. To
maintain this strategy of guaranteed low prices, the Company routinely  monitors
prices  in each  of its  markets to assure  that its  prices remain competitive.
Although prices are typically determined on a regional basis, store managers are
trained and authorized to adjust prices in response to local market  conditions.
The  Company underscores its low  price guarantee by providing  a cash refund of
the price difference if  an identical item  is advertised by  a competitor at  a
lower price within thirty days of the customer's purchase.
    
 
   
    DIRECT  MARKETING, ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION.  The Company's advertising and
promotion strategy is designed  to enhance the Guitar  Center name and  increase
consumer  awareness and loyalty.  The advertising and  promotional campaigns are
developed around  "events" designed  to attract  significant store  traffic  and
exposure.  Guitar Center regularly plans  large promotional events including the
Green Tag Sale  in March,  the Anniversary  Sale in  August, the  Blues Fest  in
October and the Guitar-a-thon in December. The Company believes that its special
events have a broad reach as many of them have occurred annually during the past
twenty  years. These events  are often coordinated  with product demonstrations,
interactive displays, clinics and in-store artist appearances.
    
 
   
    As Guitar Center enters  new markets, it  initiates an advertising  program,
including  mail and radio promotions and  other special grand opening activities
designed to accelerate sales volume for each new store. Radio advertising  plays
a   significant  part  in  the  Company's  store-opening  campaign  to  generate
excitement and create customer awareness.
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center  maintains  a  unique  and  proprietary  database  containing
information  on  over  one million  customers.  The Company  believes  that this
database assists in generating repeat  business by targeting customers based  on
their  purchasing  history  and by  permitting  Guitar Center  to  establish and
maintain personal relationships with its customers.
    
 
   
CUSTOMER SERVICE
    
 
   
    Exceptional customer  service  is  fundamental to  the  Company's  operating
strategy.  With  the  rapid changes  in  technology and  continuous  new product
introductions, customers depend  on salespeople  to offer expert  advice and  to
assist with product demonstrations. Guitar Center believes that its well trained
and  highly knowledgeable salesforce differentiates  it from its competitors and
is critical  to  maintaining  customer confidence  and  loyalty.  The  Company's
employees are typically musicians who are selected and trained to understand the
needs  of their customers.  Salespeople specialize in one  of the Company's five
product categories and begin  training on their first  day of employment.  Sales
and
    
 
                                       33
<PAGE>
management training programs are implemented on an ongoing basis to maintain and
continually  improve  the level  of customer  service and  sales support  in the
stores. Based  on examination  results,  an employee  is  given a  rating  which
determines his or her salary and level of responsibility. Guitar Center believes
that  its employee  testing program  impresses upon  its salespeople  a sense of
professionalism and reduces employee turnover by providing salespeople with  the
opportunity  to  increase their  salary by  advancing through  the certification
program. The Company believes that due to  its emphasis on training, it is  able
to  attract and retain well-qualified, highly motivated salespeople committed to
providing superior  customer  service.  In addition,  each  salesperson  in  the
keyboards  and pro audio  and recording departments is  certified by a technical
advisory board after satisfactory completion of an extensive training program.
 
   
    The Company's customer  base consists  of (i) the  professional or  aspiring
musician  who makes or hopes to make a living through music and (ii) the amateur
musician or hobbyist who  views music as  recreation. Management estimates  that
professional  and aspiring musicians, who view  the purchase of musical products
as a career  necessity, represent  approximately 65% of  the Company's  customer
base,  and account for approximately 80% of the Company's sales. These customers
make frequent visits to a store  and develop relationships with the  salesforce.
Guitar  Center  generates repeat  business and  is  successful in  utilizing its
unique and proprietary database to  market selectively to these customers  based
on   past  buying  patterns.   In  addition,  Guitar   Center  services  touring
professionals, providing customized products for musical artists.
    
 
   
STORE OPERATIONS
    
 
   
    To facilitate  its strategy  of accelerated  but controlled  growth,  Guitar
Center  has  centralized  many  key aspects  of  its  operations,  including the
development of policies and  procedures, accounting systems, training  programs,
store  layouts,  purchasing  and replenishment,  advertising  and  pricing. Such
centralization  effectively  utilizes  the  experience  and  resources  of   the
Company's headquarters staff to establish a high level of consistency throughout
all of the Guitar Center stores.
    
 
   
    The  Company's store operations  are led by its  Chief Operating Officer and
five  regional  store  managers  with  each  regional  manager  responsible  for
approximately  four to  eight stores. Store  management is comprised  of a store
manager, a sales manager,  an operations manager,  two assistant store  managers
and  five department  managers. Each  store also has  a warehouse  manager and a
sales staff that ranges from 20 to 40 employees.
    
 
   
    The Company ensures  that store  managers are  well-trained and  experienced
individuals  who will maintain  the Guitar Center  store concept and philosophy.
Each manager completes an extensive  training program which instills the  values
of  operating  as a  business owner,  and only  experienced store  employees are
promoted to the position  of store manager.  As a result  of this strategy,  the
average  tenure of the store managers  is approximately seven years. The Company
seeks  to  encourage  responsiveness  and  entrepreneurship  at  each  store  by
providing  store managers with a relatively  high degree of autonomy relating to
operations, personnel and merchandising. Managers  play an integral role in  the
selection  and  presentation of  merchandise, as  well as  the promotion  of the
Guitar Center reputation.
    
 
   
    The Company views its  employees as long-term members  of the Guitar  Center
team.  The Company encourages  employee development by  providing the salesforce
with extensive training and  the opportunity to  increase both compensation  and
responsibility  level through  increased product knowledge  and performance. The
Company's aggressive growth strategy provides employees with the opportunity  to
move  into operations,  sales and  store management  positions, which management
believes is not available  at most other music  retailers. As the Company  opens
new  stores,  key  in-store management  positions  are primarily  filled  by the
qualified  and  experienced  employees  from  existing  stores.  By  adopting  a
"promotion from within" strategy, Guitar Center maintains a well trained, loyal,
and   enthusiastic  salesforce  that  is   motivated  by  the  Company's  strong
opportunities for  advancement.  Both  Larry Thomas  and  Marty  Albertson,  the
Company's  Chief Executive  Officer and  Chief Operating  Officer, respectively,
began their careers as salespersons at Guitar Center.
    
 
                                       34
<PAGE>
   
PURCHASING, DISTRIBUTION AND INVENTORY CONTROL
    
 
   
    PURCHASING.  Guitar Center believes it has excellent relationships with  its
vendors  and, as  one of  the industry's largest  volume purchasers,  is able to
receive priority  shipping  and  access  to its  vendors'  premium  products  on
favorable  terms. The Company maintains a  centralized buying group comprised of
merchandise managers, buyers and planners.  Merchandise managers and buyers  are
responsible  for the  selection and development  of product  assortments and the
negotiation of  prices and  terms. The  Company uses  a proprietary  merchandise
replenishment system which automatically analyzes and forecasts sales trends for
each  SKU using various statistical models,  supporting the buyers by predicting
each store's  merchandise requirements.  This has  resulted in  limited "out  of
stock" positions.
    
 
   
    The   Company's  business  and  its  expansion  plans  are  dependent  to  a
significant  degree  upon  its  vendors.  Specifically,  the  establishment   of
additional  stores in  existing markets  and the  penetration of  new markets is
dependent to a significant extent on the willingness of vendors to supply  those
additional  retail stores of which there can  be no assurance. As it believes is
customary in  the industry,  the  Company does  not  have any  long-term  supply
contracts with its vendors. See "Risk Factors -- Dependence on Suppliers."
    
 
   
    DISTRIBUTION.   Guitar Center products are typically shipped direct from the
manufacturer to  individual  stores,  minimizing  handling  costs  and  reducing
freight  expense.  Management continues  to evaluate  the cost  effectiveness of
operating a  distribution center  in comparison  to a  direct ship  program  and
believes  it can  implement its growth  strategy without  a central distribution
center.
    
 
   
    INVENTORY CONTROL.  Management has  invested significant time and  resources
in  its  inventory  control  systems  and  believes  it  has  one  of  the  most
sophisticated systems in the music products retail industry. Management believes
the vast majority of music product retailers do not use a computerized inventory
management system. Guitar Center performs cycle inventory counts daily, both  to
measure  shrinkage and  to update  the perpetual  inventory on  a store-by-store
basis. The  Company's  shrinkage level  has  historically been  very  low  which
management  attributes to  its highly  sophisticated system  controls and strong
corporate culture.
    
 
   
SITE SELECTION
    
 
   
    The Company believes it  has developed a unique  and, what historically  has
been, a highly effective selection criteria to identify prospective store sites.
In evaluating the suitability of a particular location, the Company concentrates
on  the demographics  of its  target customer  as well  as traffic  patterns and
specific site characteristics such as visibility, accessibility, traffic volume,
shopping patterns and  availability of  adequate parking.  Stores are  typically
located  in  free-standing  locations  to maximize  their  outside  exposure and
signage. Due  to the  fact  that the  Company's  vendors drop  ship  merchandise
directly  to the stores, the Company's expansion plans are dependent more on the
characteristics of the  individual store  site than  any logistical  constraints
that  would  be  imposed  by  a central  distribution  facility.  See  "-- Store
Locations."
    
 
   
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
    
 
   
    Guitar Center has invested  significant resources in management  information
systems that provide real-time information both by store and by SKU. The systems
have  been designed  to integrate  all major  aspects of  the Company's business
including sales,  gross margins,  inventory levels,  purchase order  management,
automated   replenishment  and  merchandise  planning.  Guitar  Center's  highly
sophisticated management  information  systems  provide  the  Company  with  the
ability  to monitor all critical aspects of store activity on a real-time basis.
Guitar Center's  system capabilities  include inter-store  transactions,  vendor
analysis,  serial  number  tracking,  inventory  analysis  and  commission sales
reporting. Guitar Center believes that the systems it has developed will  enable
the  Company to continue to improve  customer service and operational efficiency
and support the Company's needs for the immediately foreseeable future.
    
 
                                       35
<PAGE>
   
COMPETITION
    
 
   
    The retail  market for  musical instruments  is highly  fragmented with  the
nation's leading five music products retailers accounting for approximately 8.4%
of  the industry's net sales in 1995. The Company's largest competitor, Sam Ash,
operates ten  stores in  the New  York City  area and  two stores  in the  South
Florida area. The Company currently has no stores in the New York City area. The
Company competes with many different types of retail stores, primarily specialty
retailers and music product catalogue retailers.
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center  believes that  the ability  to  compete successfully  in its
markets is  determined by  several  factors, including  breadth and  quality  of
product   selection,  pricing,  effective   merchandise  presentation,  customer
service, store location  and proprietary database  marketing programs.  Customer
satisfaction  is paramount to Guitar Center's operating strategy and the Company
believes that providing knowledgeable and  friendly customer service gives it  a
competitive  advantage. The store environment is  designed to be an entertaining
and exciting  environment in  which to  shop. In  an effort  to exceed  customer
expectations,  Guitar Center stores  provide a number  of services not generally
offered by most competitors, including the ability to hold and use  merchandise,
product  demonstrations and extensive product  selection. Salespeople are highly
trained and specialize in one of  the Company's five product areas.  Salespeople
are  certified  by  an  outside technical  advisory  board,  based  on extensive
training  and  product  knowledge  testing.  The  Company  believes  that   this
certification  process has increased the  professionalism of its employees while
reducing turnover. Customers are encouraged to help themselves to the  displayed
instruments or to seek the assistance of the professional salespeople.
    
 
   
    Certain   factors,  however,  could  materially  and  adversely  affect  the
Company's ability  to  compete successfully  in  its markets,  including,  among
others,  the expansion by the Company into  new markets in which its competitors
are already  established,  competitors'  expansion into  markets  in  which  the
Company  is currently operating, the adoption by competitors of innovative store
formats and  retail sales  methods or  the entry  into the  Company's market  by
competitors  with substantial financial or other resources. See "Risk Factors --
Aggressive Growth Strategy; -- Competition."
    
 
   
EMPLOYEES
    
 
   
    As of December 31, 1996, Guitar Center employed approximately 1,010  people,
of  whom  approximately 480  were hourly  employees  and approximately  530 were
salaried. To date, the Company has  been able to recruit qualified personnel  to
manage  or staff its  stores. None of  the Company's employees  are covered by a
collective bargaining  agreement. Management  believes that  the Company  enjoys
good employee relations.
    
 
   
PROPERTIES
    
 
   
    As of December 31, 1996, Guitar Center leased all but five of its stores and
presently  intends to lease all new locations. The terms of the store leases are
generally for  10  years  and typically  allow  the  Company to  renew  for  two
additional  five-year  terms. Most  of  the leases  require  the Company  to pay
property tax, utilities, normal repairs,  common area maintenance and  insurance
expenses.  Guitar Center  leases its  corporate offices  of approximately 20,000
square feet, which are located at 5155 Clareton Drive, Agoura Hills,  California
91301.  Due to  the Company's  expansion which  has included  the hiring  of new
corporate and  administrative personnel,  the  Company is  currently  evaluating
whether  to lease  additional space in  a nearby location.  The Company believes
that sufficient additional space is available on reasonable terms.
    
 
   
    In April 1997, the Company consummated  the acquisition of a music  products
retailer  operating two stores in  the Atlanta, Georgia market,  one of which is
owned and the other of which is leased. See "Summary -- Recent Developments."
    
 
                                       36
<PAGE>
   
STORE LOCATIONS
    
 
   
    The  table  below sets  forth certain  information concerning  Guitar Center
stores, as of the date of this Prospectus:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                 APPROXIMATE
                                                                       YEAR      GROSS SQUARE
STORE                                                                 OPENED         FEET        LEASE/OWN
- -------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------  --------------  -----------
<S>                                                                  <C>        <C>             <C>
ARIZONA
  Phoenix..........................................................     (1)         13,900      Lease
  Tempe............................................................    1997         12,500      Lease
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
  Hollywood........................................................    1964         30,600      Own
  San Diego........................................................    1973         13,500      Own
  Fountain Valley..................................................    1980         13,700      Lease
  Sherman Oaks.....................................................    1982         10,900      Own (2)
  Covina...........................................................    1985         15,400      Lease
  Lawndale.........................................................    1985         15,700      Lease
  San Bernardino...................................................    1993          9,500      Lease
  Brea.............................................................    1995         14,900      Lease
  San Marcos.......................................................    1996         14,900      Lease
NORTHERN CALIFORNIA
  San Francisco....................................................    1972         11,900      Lease
  San Jose.........................................................    1978         14,200      Own
  El Cerrito.......................................................    1983         21,300(3)   Lease
  Pleasant Hill....................................................    1996         11,300      Lease
FLORIDA
  North Miami area.................................................    1996         22,300      Lease
  South Miami area.................................................    1996         14,700      Lease
GEORGIA
  Atlanta..........................................................     (4)         19,200      Own
  Smyrna...........................................................     (4)          8,500      Lease
ILLINOIS
  South Chicago....................................................    1979         11,300      Lease
  North Chicago....................................................    1981         10,400      Lease
  Central Chicago..................................................    1988          8,700      Own
  Villa Park.......................................................    1996         15,000      Lease
MASSACHUSETTS
  Boston...........................................................    1994         12,600      Lease
  Danvers..........................................................    1996         14,600      Lease
  Natick...........................................................    1997         15,500      Lease
MICHIGAN
  Detroit..........................................................    1994         10,100      Lease
  Southfield.......................................................    1996         13,600      Lease
MINNESOTA
  Twin Cities......................................................    1988          9,500      Lease
OHIO
  Cleveland........................................................    1997         15,800      Lease
TEXAS
  Dallas...........................................................    1989         12,700      Lease
  Arlington........................................................    1991          9,700      Lease
  South Houston....................................................    1993         14,700      Lease
  North Houston....................................................    1994         10,300      Lease
WASHINGTON
  Seattle..........................................................     (1)         20,800      Lease
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------------
   
(1)  Presently expected to open in the first half of 1997.
    
   
(2)  The Company presently expects to relocate the store it operates in  Sherman
     Oaks from a location it owns to a new leased location.
    
   
(3)  Of  the 21,300 square  feet, approximately 10,000 square  feet consist of a
     basement and warehouse space.
    
   
(4)  Acquired effective as of April 16, 1997.
    
 
   
SERVICE MARKS
    
 
   
    The Company has  registered the GUITAR  CENTER and ROCK  WALK service  marks
with  the United States  Patent and Trademark Office.  The Company believes that
these service marks have  become important components  in its merchandising  and
marketing  strategy. The  loss of  the GUITAR CENTER  service mark  could have a
material adverse effect on the Company's business.
    
 
                                       37
<PAGE>
   
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
    
 
   
    Guitar Center is  not a party  to any legal  proceedings other than  various
claims  and lawsuits arising in the normal  course of its business which, in the
opinion of  the  Company's  management, are  not  individually  or  collectively
material to its business.
    
 
                                       38
<PAGE>
   
                                   MANAGEMENT
    
 
   
    The  executive officers,  directors and key  managers of the  Company are as
follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                        YEARS OF SERVICE
NAME                        AGE                          POSITION                       WITH THE COMPANY
- ----------------------      ---      ------------------------------------------------  -------------------
<S>                     <C>          <C>                                               <C>
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND
DIRECTORS
Larry Thomas..........          47   President, Chief Executive Officer and Director               19
Marty Albertson.......          43   Executive Vice President, Chief Operating                     17
                                      Officer and Director
Bruce Ross............          48   Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and                    3
                                      Secretary
Barry Soosman.........          37   Vice President of Corporate Development and                    1
                                      General Counsel
Raymond Scherr........          48   Director                                                      --
David Ferguson(1).....          41   Director                                                      --
Jeffrey Walker(2).....          41   Director                                                      --
Michael Lazarus(1)....          41   Director                                                      --
Steven Burge(2).......          40   Director                                                      --
 
KEY MANAGERS
Dave DiMartino........          42   Vice President -- Store Development                           24
Richard Pidanick......          44   Vice President -- Southern California Regional                13
                                      Manager
Rodney Barger.........          46   Vice President -- Merchandising                               16
David Angress.........          47   Vice President -- Merchandising                                1
Greg Bennett..........          45   Vice President -- Merchandising                               --
Andrew Heyneman.......          35   Vice President -- Marketing                                   13
William McGarry.......          43   Vice President -- Store Administration                        16
Mark Laughlin.........          37   Vice President -- Information Services                         6
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Member of Compensation Committee.
    
 
   
(2) Member of Audit Committee.
    
 
   
    The principal occupations  and positions  for the  past five  years, and  in
certain  cases  prior  years,  of  the  executive  officers,  directors  and key
personnel named above are as follows:
    
 
   
    LARRY THOMAS has  been with Guitar  Center since  1977. He has  served as  a
director  since 1984  and has been  the Company's President  and Chief Executive
Officer since  1992. After  working  for a  year as  a  salesperson in  the  San
Francisco, California store, Mr. Thomas became the store's manager. In 1980, Mr.
Thomas  became  the San  Francisco  area regional  manager.  After serving  as a
regional manager in California and Illinois  for four years, Mr. Thomas  assumed
the role of Corporate General Manager and Chief Operating Officer. Mr. Thomas is
currently  a  member  of  the  Los  Angeles  Chapter  of  the  Young Presidents'
Organization and is a former board member of NAMM.
    
 
   
    MARTY ALBERTSON has served as  Executive Vice President and Chief  Operating
Officer since 1990. Mr. Albertson was elected as a director upon consummation of
the  Recapitalization. Mr. Albertson joined the Company as a salesperson in 1979
and   has   held   various   positions   of   increasing   responsibility   with
    
 
                                       39
<PAGE>
the  Company since such  time. In 1980,  he served as  the Company's Advertising
Director. In 1984, he became  the Company's National Sales Manager.  Thereafter,
in  1985, Mr. Albertson became Vice President of Corporate Development, and then
became the Vice President of Sales and Marketing in 1987.
 
   
    BRUCE ROSS joined the Company in July 1994 as Chief Financial Officer. Prior
to joining the  Company, Mr.  Ross was Chief  Financial Officer  of Fred  Hayman
Beverly  Hills, Inc., a retailer of high  end fashion clothing on Rodeo Drive in
California and a wholesaler of men's and women's fragrances. From 1982 to  1990,
Mr.  Ross was employed by Hanimex  Vivitar Corporation, a worldwide manufacturer
and distributor of photographic products. Mr. Ross served in various  capacities
with  Hanimex Vivitar in Australia, the  United States and Europe. While working
for Hanimex Vivitar in the United States, Mr. Ross was promoted to the  position
of Chief Financial Officer in 1986 and Chief Executive Officer for North America
in  1988. Mr. Ross graduated from the  University of New South Wales (Australia)
with a degree  in Commerce and  is an  associate of the  Institute of  Chartered
Accountants.
    
 
   
    BARRY SOOSMAN joined the Company in July 1996 as Vice President of Corporate
Development  and General Counsel. Mr. Soosman has been a practicing attorney for
twelve years specializing in  real estate, commercial  and corporate law.  Since
1992  and prior to joining the Company, Mr. Soosman had been the outside general
counsel to  the Company.  Mr. Soosman  earned a  Bachelor of  Science degree  in
Business  Administration  (corporate  finance and  real  estate  valuation) with
honors and a Juris Doctorate degree at the University of Southern California. In
June 1996 Mr. Soosman  became of counsel  to the law  firm of Buchalter,  Nemer,
Fields  & Younger, a  Professional Corporation. Mr. Soosman  is a former Adjunct
Professor at Southwestern School of Law.
    
 
   
    RAYMOND SCHERR became a director in 1978  and served as the Chairman of  the
Board  from 1990 until  consummation of the  Recapitalization. Mr. Scherr joined
the Company in 1975 as a salesperson in the Company's San Francisco,  California
store.  From 1981 through 1992  Mr. Scherr was also  the Company's President and
Chief Executive Officer.
    
 
   
    DAVID FERGUSON is  a general  partner of  Chase Capital  Partners, the  sole
general  partner  of Chase  Ventures and  an affiliate  of Chase  Securities. He
became a  director of  the Company  upon consummation  of the  Recapitalization.
Prior  to joining Chase  Capital, Mr. Ferguson  was a member  of the mergers and
acquisitions groups  of  Bankers  Trust  New  York  Corporation  and  Prudential
Securities,  Inc. Mr. Ferguson  currently serves as a  director of Thompson PBE,
Inc. and  Wild Oats  Markets, Inc.  and various  privately held  companies.  Mr.
Ferguson  received a Bachelor  of Arts degree from  Loyola College in Baltimore,
Maryland and  an M.B.A.  degree from  The Wharton  School of  the University  of
Pennsylvania. Mr. Ferguson is a certified public accountant.
    
 
   
    JEFFREY  WALKER is the  managing general partner  of Chase Capital Partners,
and a senior managing  director and member  of the Policy  Council of The  Chase
Manhattan  Corporation. He became  a director of  the Company in  1996. Prior to
co-founding Chase Capital Partners in 1984, Mr. Walker worked in the  Investment
Banking  and Finance  Divisions of  Chemical Bank  and the  Audit and Consulting
Divisions of Arthur Young & Co. Mr. Walker is a Certified Public Accountant  and
a  Certified Management  Accountant. Mr. Walker  received a  Bachelor of Science
degree from the  University of Virginia  and an M.B.A.  degree from the  Harvard
Business  School. Mr. Walker currently serves as a director of various privately
held companies  and was  Vice  Chairman of  the  National Association  of  Small
Business Investment Companies.
    
 
   
    MICHAEL  LAZARUS is a general partner  of Weston Presidio Capital Management
II, L.P.,  a  venture  capital firm  and  the  sole general  partner  of  Weston
Presidio.  From 1986 to 1991, he served as Managing Director and Director of the
Private Placement Department of Montgomery  Securities. He became a director  of
the  Company upon consummation of the Recapitalization. Mr. Lazarus is currently
on the Board  of Directors of  Just For  Feet, Inc. and  various privately  held
companies.
    
 
   
    STEVEN  BURGE is a Managing Director of Wells Fargo. He became a director of
the Company upon consummation of  the Recapitalization. From 1987 through  1995,
Mr. Burge was a Managing General
    
 
                                       40
<PAGE>
Partner  of  Wedbush Capital  Partners, a  private investment  fund, and  was an
executive in the Corporate  Finance Department of  Wedbush Morgan Securities,  a
regional  investment banking firm.  Prior to joining  Wedbush Morgan Securities,
Mr. Burge held various positions with Wells Fargo Bank.
 
   
    DAVE DIMARTINO joined the Company in 1972. In 1983, Mr. DiMartino became the
manager of Guitar Center's  flagship Hollywood, California  store. In 1988,  Mr.
DiMartino  became Vice President  -- Store Development. In  1992, he became West
Coast Regional Manager responsible for all  of the Company's West Coast  stores.
In 1995, he reassumed the position of Vice President -- Store Development.
    
 
   
    RICHARD  PIDANICK joined the Company in  1983 as a salesperson. Mr. Pidanick
was promoted to store manager in 1984, after working in a variety of  capacities
and  locations for Guitar Center. Mr. Pidanick  was promoted in 1990 to District
Manager of the  Mid-West and  was appointed as  the Vice  President --  Southern
California Regional Manager in 1996.
    
 
   
    RODNEY  BARGER joined the Company  in 1980 as a  salesperson. Mr. Barger was
promoted to a store manager in 1981. In 1989, Mr. Barger was promoted to Western
Regional Sales  Manager and  then to  the corporate  office in  the position  of
Purchasing  Director.  In 1996,  Mr. Barger  was promoted  to Vice  President --
Merchandising, Vintage and Used Products.
    
 
   
    DAVID ANGRESS  joined the  Company  in January  1996  as Vice  President  --
Merchandising.  Prior to joining the Company,  Mr. Angress was Vice President of
Harman Pro., North America where he was responsible for North American marketing
and sales  for such  brands  as JBL,  Soundcraft,  AKG and  worldwide  marketing
manager  of dbx and Orban. Prior thereto, Mr. Angress was the Vice President and
General Manager of Sound  Genesis, a retailer  of professional audio  equipment.
Mr. Angress has over 20 years of music retailing experience.
    
 
   
    GREG  BENNETT  joined the  Company in  September 1996  as Vice  President --
Merchandising. Prior  to  joining  the  Company, Mr.  Bennett  was  Director  of
Marketing  at Washburn International, where he was responsible for the marketing
services for Washburn Guitars, Sound Tech and Oscar Schmidt. Prior thereto,  Mr.
Bennett  was Marketing Director of Gibson Guitars. Mr. Bennett has over 20 years
of experience in the music industry.
    
 
   
    ANDREW HEYNEMAN joined the Company  in 1983. He has  served in a variety  of
positions  with Guitar Center ranging from salesperson to department manager. In
July 1985, Mr. Heyneman  was appointed store manager  and later promoted to  the
corporate  office as an advertising director in  1989. In 1996, Mr. Heyneman was
promoted to Vice President -- Marketing.
    
 
   
    WILLIAM MCGARRY joined the Company in 1980 as a salesperson. In 1981 he  was
promoted  to  a store  manager.  In 1985  Mr.  McGarry was  promoted  to Midwest
District Manager.  Mr. McGarry  became  the Company's  first Director  of  Store
Administration   in  1986   and  was  promoted   to  Vice   President  --  Store
Administration in 1996.
    
 
   
    MARK LAUGHLIN  joined  the  Company  in  1991  as  Director  of  Information
Services.  In 1997, he  was promoted to Vice  President -- Information Services.
Prior to joining Guitar Center, Mr. Laughlin was an Information Services manager
for Clothestime,  and  originally  began  his career  in  accounting  at  Arthur
Andersen & Co.
    
 
   
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
    
 
   
    As  of the date of this Prospectus, the Board consists of seven persons with
two  vacancies.  The  Certificate  of  Incorporation  and  Bylaws  provide  that
directors  shall be elected by  a plurality vote, with  no cumulative voting, at
each annual meeting  of stockholders.  Each elected director  shall hold  office
until  his resignation or removal  and until his successor  shall have been duly
elected and  qualified. In  connection with  the Recapitalization,  the  Company
agreed  that,  following the  Offering and  so  long as  Mr. Scherr  and certain
related entities own 5% or  more of the Common Stock  on a fully diluted  basis,
the  Company would nominate or  cause the nomination of  Mr. Scherr to the Board
(and include Mr.  Scherr in any  proxy statement and  related materials used  in
connection  with an election of directors) and otherwise use its best efforts to
cause his election  at each annual  meeting or special  meeting relating to  the
election  of  directors  of the  Company.  See "--  Scherr  Board Representation
Letter."
    
 
                                       41
<PAGE>
   
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS
    
 
   
    The  Board  has  two  standing  committees,  the  Audit  Committee  and  the
Compensation Committee. The Audit Committee has responsibility for reviewing and
making   recommendations  regarding  the  Company's  employment  of  independent
accountants, the annual  audit of  the Company's financial  statements, and  the
Company's  internal controls, accounting practices  and policies. The members of
the Audit  Committee  are Jeffrey  Walker  and Steven  Burge.  The  Compensation
Committee   has  responsibility  for  determining   the  nature  and  amount  of
compensation of  the  management  of  the  Company  and  for  administering  the
Company's  employee benefit plans (including the 1996 Plan and the 1997 Plan (as
defined herein)). The members of  the Compensation Committee are David  Ferguson
and Michael Lazarus.
    
 
   
DIRECTOR COMPENSATION
    
 
   
    Each  member of the Board who is not a full-time employee is paid $3,000 for
attendance at  each meeting  of the  Board  and $1,000  for attendance  at  each
meeting  of  a committee  of the  Board,  and all  directors are  reimbursed for
reasonable out-of-pocket  expenses  arising  from attendance  at  any  Board  or
committee  meetings or otherwise related to Company business. The 1997 Plan also
provides  for  the   grant  of  options   to  certain  non-employee   directors.
Specifically,  each non-employee director  initially elected to  the Board after
the Offering automatically will be granted  an option to purchase 15,000  shares
of  Common Stock  on the  date of such  initial election,  and each non-employee
director automatically will  be granted an  option to purchase  5,000 shares  of
Common  Stock on the date  of each annual meeting  of stockholders at which such
director is re-elected to the Board,  provided such annual meetings is not  less
than  120 days after  initial appointment to  the Board. All  options granted to
non-employee directors will have a per share exercise price equal to fair market
value of a  share of  Common Stock on  the date  of grant. See  "-- 1997  Equity
Participation Plan."
    
 
                                       42
<PAGE>
   
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
    
 
   
    The  following table sets forth the compensation  paid by the Company to its
Chief Executive  Officer and  each  of the  four  other highest  paid  executive
officers  of the Company  (collectively, including the  Chief Executive Officer,
the "Named Officers"):
    
 
   
                           SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                      LONG TERM
                                                                                    COMPENSATION
                                               ANNUAL COMPENSATION ($)            -----------------
                                     -------------------------------------------     SECURITIES
NAME AND PRINCIPAL                                              OTHER ANNUAL         UNDERLYING            ALL OTHER
POSITION                    YEAR       SALARY      BONUS    COMPENSATION ($)(1)    OPTIONS/SAR#(2)    COMPENSATION ($)(3)
- ------------------------  ---------  ----------  ---------  --------------------  -----------------  ---------------------
<S>                       <C>        <C>         <C>        <C>                   <C>                <C>
Larry Thomas............    1996     $  500,000     --          $ 10,660,728(4)         397,985            $  11,250
 President and Chief        1995        500,000  $ 285,715           --                  --                   25,645
 Executive Officer
Marty Albertson.........    1996     $  375,000     --          $  7,107,146(4)         397,985            $  11,250
 Executive Vice             1995        375,000  $ 214,285           --                  --                   25,645
 President and Chief
 Operating Officer
Bruce Ross..............    1996     $  195,000  $  58,500           --                  79,599            $  11,250
 Vice President and         1995        180,000     48,060           --                  --                   --
 Chief Financial Officer
Barry Soosman...........    1996     $  112,500  $  10,000           --                  79,599               --
 Vice President of          1995         --         --               --                  --                   --
 Corporate Development
 and General Counsel
Raymond Scherr (5)......    1996     $  529,885     --               --                  --                $  11,250
 Chairman and Operator      1995      1,000,000     --               --                  --                   25,645
 of Rock Walk, a
 division of the Company
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------------
   
(1)  Excludes perquisites and  other personal benefits,  securities or  property
     aggregating  less than $50,000 or 10% of  the total annual salary and bonus
     reported for each Named Officer.
    
 
   
(2)  The securities underlying  the options are  shares of Common  Stock. For  a
     description  of  terms pertaining  to  such options  and  other information
     relating thereto, see "-- Employment Agreements; -- Management Stock Option
     Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan."
    
 
   
(3)  All other compensation consists of contributions made by the Company to its
     profit sharing plan on behalf of each Named Officer.
    
 
   
(4)  Other annual compensation  consists of cash  compensation received by  such
     Named   Officer  in  connection  with   the  Recapitalization  and  related
     transactions. Excludes restricted shares of Junior Preferred Stock received
     by such Named Officer  upon the cancellation of  employee stock options  in
     connection  with the Recapitalization that were converted into Common Stock
     in connection  with the  Offering. See  "The Recapitalization  and  Related
     Transactions"  and  "Description of  Capital  Stock --  Preferred  Stock --
     Junior Preferred Stock."
    
 
   
(5)  Resigned as the Chairman of the Board effective with the completion of  the
     Recapitalization.
    
 
   
    During  the periods indicated above, none of the Named Officers received any
awards under  any long-term  incentive plan,  and the  Company does  not have  a
pension plan.
    
 
   
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS
    
 
   
    Upon  consummation  of  the  Recapitalization, the  Company  entered  into a
five-year employment agreement with each of Larry Thomas and Marty Albertson,  a
three-year  employment agreement with  Bruce Ross and a  three and one-half year
employment agreement with Barry Soosman  (collectively, as amended to date,  the
"Employment  Agreements").  The  Employment Agreements  provide  Messrs. Thomas,
Albertson, Ross  and Soosman  (each  a "Senior  Officer" and  collectively,  the
"Senior  Officers")  with  base  salaries of  $500,000,  $375,000,  $195,000 and
$225,000, respectively. Each Senior  Officer is entitled  to participate in  all
insurance   and  benefit  plans   generally  available  to   executives  of  the
    
 
                                       43
<PAGE>
Company. In addition to their base salary, Messrs. Thomas and Albertson will  be
paid  an annual bonus equal to 57.14%  and 42.86%, respectively, of a bonus pool
determined at the end of  each year, not to exceed  $900,000. The amount of  the
bonus pool with respect to any fiscal year will be a percentage ranging from 10%
to  30% of the excess of the  Company's actual earnings before interest expense,
tax expense, depreciation expense and  amortization expense ("EBITDA") over  the
Company's  target EBITDA (as determined by  the Board). Messrs. Ross and Soosman
will receive annual bonuses  at the discretion of  the Board. Pursuant to  their
employment  agreements,  each  of Messrs.  Ross  and Soosman  have  been granted
options under the Company's 1996 Plan to purchase 79,599 shares of Common  Stock
at  an exercise price of $10.89 per share. Of such options, one-half vest at the
end of  five  years subject  to  acceleration  upon the  attainment  of  certain
performance events and one-half vest ratably over a three-year period.
 
   
    Under  the  terms  of each  Employment  Agreement,  if a  Senior  Officer is
terminated without cause or resigns  with reasonable justification, such  Senior
Officer will be entitled to receive his base salary, annual cash bonus (equal to
the  last annual bonus he received prior to termination) and continuation of his
benefits through the term of the agreement. With certain exceptions, if a Senior
Officer is  terminated without  cause, all  stock options  held by  such  Senior
Officer  will immediately vest.  If a Senior  Officer's employment is terminated
for any  other reason,  he will  be entitled  only to  his accrued  base  salary
through the date of termination.
    
 
   
    Upon  consummation  of  the  Recapitalization, the  Company  entered  into a
three-year employment agreement  with Mr.  Scherr pursuant to  which Mr.  Scherr
will serve as the chairman and operator of Rock Walk, a division of the Company.
Mr.  Scherr's duties will be of a part-time nature, and he will devote only such
time to his duties as he determines in good faith are required. Mr. Scherr  will
receive  $100,000 per year, which will be allocated among his salary and expense
allowance, as Mr. Scherr determines. Mr. Scherr will be entitled to  participate
in all employee medical benefit programs available generally to employees of the
Company.  If Mr. Scherr's employment is terminated by the Company without cause,
he will  be  entitled  to  receive  as severance  the  cash  equivalent  of  his
compensation  package ($100,000) for the remainder of the term of the agreement,
not to  exceed $300,000,  and continuation  of his  medical benefits  until  age
63  1/2. After his employment agreement expires,  Mr. Scherr will continue to be
entitled to medical  benefits until age  63 1/2. If  Mr. Scherr's employment  is
terminated by the Company for cause or upon Mr. Scherr's death, he or his estate
will  be entitled  to receive  his compensation  to the  extent such  amount has
accrued through the date of termination.
    
 
   
MANAGEMENT STOCK OPTION AGREEMENTS
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options  (each,
a  "Management  Option") to  each of  Messrs. Thomas  and Albertson  to purchase
397,985 shares of Common Stock at an exercise price of $10.89 per share pursuant
to stock option  agreements (the "Management  Stock Option Agreements").  Unless
terminated  or  accelerated, each  Management Option  will  vest in  three equal
installments in 2003, 2004 and 2005 and  will terminate upon the first to  occur
of: (i) June 5, 2005; (ii) the consummation of a Company Sale (as defined in the
Management   Stock  Option   Agreements);  or  (iii)   the  termination,  either
voluntarily or for cause, of the  employment of such executive officer with  the
Company. The vesting of each Management Option will be accelerated: (a) if there
is  a "Significant  Public Float" of  the Common  Stock (as defined)  and if the
Company's "Calculated Corporate  Value" (which,  in general,  equals the  market
value  of the fully  diluted shares of  Common Stock based  on the closing sales
price of the Common Stock on a national exchange or the Nasdaq National  Market)
exceeds  approximately $280  million, subject to  adjustment; (b) if  there is a
Company Sale and the consideration paid  for the Company exceeds certain  target
values  set  forth in  the Management  Stock  Option Agreements;  or (c)  if the
executive officer's employment is terminated by the Company without cause or  by
such  executive officer  with reasonable  justification. The  Company intends to
file a registration statement on Form  S-8 under the Securities Act to  register
the shares of Common Stock issuable upon exercise of such options.
    
 
                                       44
<PAGE>
   
OTHER OPTION ARRANGEMENTS
    
 
   
    Chase  Ventures,  Wells  Fargo  and  Weston  Presidio  granted  options (the
"Investor Options") to purchase an aggregate  of 277,194 shares of Common  Stock
at  a purchase price of $4.33 per share  to certain officers and key managers of
the Company. Each grant of an Investor Option is, to the extent possible, deemed
to be granted by each Investor to each member of management in the same ratio as
granted by each Investor (I.E., 75.00% by Chase Ventures, 14.29% by Wells  Fargo
and  10.71% by Weston Presidio). Included in the Investor Options are options to
purchase 109,722 shares  of Common Stock  that were granted  to each of  Messrs.
Thomas  and Albertson and 3,850 shares of Common Stock that were granted to each
of Messrs. Ross and Soosman. The Investor Options were granted in December 1996,
are presently exercisable and will expire  on December 30, 2001. The Company  is
not a party to this agreement and has not, and will not, incur any obligation in
connection  with  such options.  See  "Management's Discussion  and  Analysis of
Financial  Condition  and  Results  of  Operations  --  Liquidity  and   Capital
Resources"  and "Certain  Transactions --  Options Granted  by the  Investors to
Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
1996 PERFORMANCE STOCK OPTION PLAN
    
 
   
    The Company's 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan was adopted by the Board of
Directors and  approved by  its sole  stockholder  on June  3, 1996  and  became
effective  on that date. The Board of Directors and the stockholders approved an
Amended and Restated  1996 Performance  Stock Option  Plan in  October 1996  (as
amended  to date, the "1996 Plan"). The  principal purposes of the 1996 Plan are
to provide incentives for officers, employees and consultants of the Company and
its subsidiaries through granting of options, thereby stimulating their personal
and active  interest in  the Company's  development and  financial success,  and
inducing  them to remain in  the Company's employ. No  further grants of options
will be made under the 1996 Plan.
    
 
   
    The principal  features of  the  1996 Plan  are  summarized below,  but  the
summary  is qualified in  its entirety by  reference to the  1996 Plan, which is
filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus is  a
part.
    
 
   
    GENERAL  NATURE OF  THE PLAN.   Options  issued under  the 1996  Plan may be
either incentive stock options ("Incentive Options") intended to qualify as such
under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"),
or non-qualified stock options ("Non-qualified options"). As of the date of this
Prospectus, the Company has outstanding under the 1996 Plan options to  purchase
713,782  shares of Common Stock,  at an exercise price  of $10.89 per share. The
1996 Plan is administered by the Compensation Committee.
    
 
   
    ELIGIBILITY.  Options may be granted under the 1996 Plan to employees of and
consultants to the Company, or any of its subsidiaries (other than Larry Thomas,
Marty Albertson, or any other person serving on the Compensation Committee).  No
options  may be granted to any  one person in any one  taxable year in excess of
25% of the options issued or issuable under the 1996 Plan. Incentive Options may
not be granted to an employee who  owns (as described in Sections 422(b)(6)  and
425(d) of the Code) stock possessing more than 10% of the aggregate voting power
of  the Company unless the option price is  fixed at least than 110% of the fair
market value (as  determined according to  the 1996  Plan) of the  stock on  the
grant  date and the options are not  exercisable later than five years following
the grant date.
    
 
   
    GRANT OF OPTIONS.  Options may be  granted under the 1996 Plan at any  time,
from  time to time, prior to the termination of the 1996 Plan. Each option grant
will be set forth in  a separate agreement with  the person receiving the  grant
and will indicate the type, terms and conditions of the option grant.
    
 
   
    VESTING.   Options are deemed granted on the date the Compensation Committee
approves the grants. However, in the  case of Incentive Options, the grant  date
may not be earlier than the date the optionee becomes an employee of the Company
or  one of its subsidiaries. The  Compensation Committee shall determine whether
and to what extent  any options are  also subject to time  vesting based on  the
optionee's  continued service. The 1996 Plan generally provides for acceleration
of time vesting upon a
    
 
                                       45
<PAGE>
   
sale of  the Company  or termination  of the  optionee's relationship  with  the
Company  without  cause (as  defined in  the  1996 Plan),  by the  optionee with
reasonable justification (as defined in the 1996 Plan) or upon death.
    
 
   
    OPTION PRICE AND EXERCISE.   An option is exercisable  at such times as  are
determined  on the grant date by  the Compensation Committee. The purchase price
for shares to be issued to an optionee  upon exercise of an option shall be  the
fair  market value of a share of Common  Stock on the grant date (or such lesser
amount approved by the Board, but not less than 85% of the fair market value  of
a share of Common Stock).
    
 
   
    EXPIRATION,    TERMINATION,    REVOCATION,   TRANSFER    OF    OPTIONS   AND
AMENDMENTS.  Options granted  under the 1996 Plan  are not assignable except  by
will  or by  the laws of  descent and distribution.  The Compensation Committee,
with the Board's approval,  may amend or  modify the 1996  Plan in any  respect,
PROVIDED  HOWEVER, that approval  of the holders  of a majority  of Common Stock
must be obtained if  required by law or  for compliance with federal  securities
laws or the Code.
    
 
   
    REGISTRATION  STATEMENT  ON  FORM  S-8.    The  Company  intends  to  file a
registration statement on  Form S-8  under the  Securities Act  to register  the
shares of Common Stock issuable under the 1996 Plan.
    
 
   
OPTION GRANTS IN 1996; AGGREGATE OPTION EXERCISES IN 1996; 1996 YEAR-END OPTION
VALUES
    
 
   
    In 1996, the Company granted to certain directors, officers and employees of
the  Company (including  Messrs. Ross and  Soosman) options  to purchase 554,584
shares of Common Stock at  a purchase price of $10.89  per share under the  1996
Plan  and, pursuant to separate arrangements,  granted to each of Messrs. Thomas
and Albertson options to purchase 397,985  shares of Common Stock at a  purchase
price  of $10.89  per share.  Pursuant to  the requirements  of their respective
employment agreements, the Company has also granted to each of Messrs. Ross  and
Soosman  options to purchase  an additional 79,599  shares of Common  Stock at a
purchase price  of  $10.89 per  share  under the  1996  Plan. See  "--  Director
Compensation,"   "--  Employment   Agreements,"  "--   Management  Stock  Option
Agreements," "--  1996  Performance  Stock  Option Plan"  and  "--  1997  Equity
Participation Plan."
    
 
   
    Set  forth below is a table describing the options granted by the Company to
each of the Named Officers during the year ended December 31, 1996:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                       INDIVIDUAL OPTION GRANTS IN 1996
                           -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                         POTENTIAL REALIZABLE VALUE
                                                                                             AT ASSUMED ANNUAL
                             NUMBER OF       PERCENT OF                                        RATES OF STOCK
                             SECURITIES    TOTAL OPTIONS/                                    PRICE APPRECIATION
                             UNDERLYING    SARS GRANTED TO  EXERCISE OR                     FOR OPTION TERM (2)
                            OPTIONS/SARS    EMPLOYEES IN    BASE PRICE    EXPIRATION    ----------------------------
NAME                       GRANTED (#)(1)    FISCAL YEAR    ($/ SHARE)       DATE          5% ($)         10% ($)
- -------------------------  --------------  ---------------  -----------  -------------  -------------  -------------
<S>                        <C>             <C>              <C>          <C>            <C>            <C>
Larry Thomas.............         397,985          29.5%     $   10.89          2006    $   2,725,880  $   6,907,917
Marty Albertson..........         397,985          29.5          10.89          2006        2,725,880      6,907,917
Bruce Ross...............          79,599           5.9          10.89          2006          545,189      1,381,615
Barry Soosman............          79,599           5.9          10.89          2006          545,189      1,381,615
Raymond Scherr...........        --              --             --            --             --             --
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
 
   
(1) The securities underlying the  options are shares of  Common Stock. No  SARs
    were  granted in fiscal 1996. For a  description of terms pertaining to such
    options  and  other  information   relating  thereto,  see  "--   Employment
    Agreements; -- Management Stock Option Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock
    Option Plan."
    
 
   
(2) The potential realizable value assumes a rate of annual compound stock price
    appreciation  of 5% and  10% from the  date the option  was granted over the
    full option term. These assumed annual
    
 
                                       46
<PAGE>
    compound rates of stock price appreciation are mandated by the rules of  the
    Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  and do  not  represent  the Company's
    estimate or projection of future Common Stock prices.
 
   
    The  following  table  sets  forth,  on  an  aggregated  basis,  information
regarding  securities  underlying  unexercised  options  during  the  year ended
December 31, 1996 by the Named Officers:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 OPTION VALUES AT DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                   --------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             NUMBER OF                       VALUE OF
                                                       SECURITIES UNDERLYING                UNEXERCISED
                                                            UNEXERCISED                    IN-THE-MONEY
                                                            OPTIONS AT                      OPTIONS AT
                                                      FISCAL YEAR-END (1)(#)            FISCAL YEAR-END ($)
                                                   -----------------------------  -------------------------------
NAME                                                EXERCISABLE   UNEXERCISABLE    EXERCISABLE    UNEXERCISABLE
- -------------------------------------------------  -------------  --------------  -------------  ----------------
<S>                                                <C>            <C>             <C>            <C>
Larry Thomas.....................................       --            397,985(2)       --        $   1,635,718(2)
Marty Albertson..................................       --            397,985(2)       --            1,635,718(2)
Bruce Ross.......................................       --             79,599          --              327,152
Barry Soosman....................................       --             79,599          --              327,152
Raymond Scherr...................................       --              --             --               --
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) The securities underlying  the options  are shares  of Common  Stock. For  a
    description  of  terms  pertaining  to such  options  and  other information
    relating thereto, see "-- Employment Agreements; -- Management Stock  Option
    Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan."
    
 
   
(2) The  options granted to  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson  are subject to future
    vesting which  may be  accelerated upon  the attainment  by the  Company  of
    certain  performance  hurdles  based  on  market  capitalization  and  other
    factors. See " -- Management Stock Option Agreements."
    
 
   
1997 EQUITY PARTICIPATION PLAN
    
 
   
    The Company's 1997 Equity Participation  Plan (the "1997 Plan") was  adopted
by  the Board of Directors and approved by the stockholders in January 1997. The
principal purposes of  the 1997  Plan are  to provide  incentives for  officers,
employees  and consultants of the Company  and its subsidiaries through granting
of options,  restricted stock,  stock appreciation  rights, dividend  equivalent
performance  awards and deferred stock  awards (collectively, "Awards"), thereby
stimulating their personal and active interest in the Company's development  and
financial  success,  and inducing  them to  remain in  the Company's  employ. In
addition to Awards  made to officers,  employees or consultants,  the 1997  Plan
permits   the  granting  of  options   ("Director  Options")  to  the  Company's
non-employee directors.
    
 
   
    Under the 1997 Plan, not  more than 875,000 shares  of Common Stock (or  the
equivalent in other equity securities) are authorized for issuance upon exercise
of options, stock appreciation rights ("SARs") and other Awards, or upon vesting
of  restricted  or deferred  stock awards.  Furthermore,  the maximum  number of
shares which may  be subject  to options  or stock  appreciation rights  granted
under  the  1997 Plan  to  any individual  in  any calendar  year  cannot exceed
150,000. As of the date of this  Prospectus, no options have been granted  under
the 1997 Plan.
    
 
   
    The  principal  features of  the 1997  Plan are  summarized below,  but this
summary is qualified in  its entirety by  reference to the  1997 Plan, which  is
filed  as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this Prospectus is a
part.
    
 
   
    ADMINISTRATION.  The  Compensation Committee will  administer the 1997  Plan
with  respect to grants to employees or  consultants of the Company and the full
Board will  administer the  1997  Plan with  respect  to Director  Options.  The
Compensation  Committee will consist of at least  two members of the Board, each
of whom is a "non-employee director"  for purposes of Rule 16b-3 ("Rule  16b-3")
under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"), and,
with   respect  to   options  and  SAR's   which  are   intended  to  constitute
performance-based compensation  under  Section  162(m)  of  the  Code  ("Section
162(m)"),  an "outside director" for the  purposes of Section 162(m). Subject to
the terms
    
 
                                       47
<PAGE>
and conditions of  the 1997 Plan,  the Board or  Compensation Committee has  the
authority  to select the persons to whom Awards are to be made, to determine the
number of shares to be subject thereto and the terms and conditions thereof, and
to make all  other determinations  and to take  all other  actions necessary  or
advisable  for the  administration of  the 1997  Plan. Similarly,  the Board has
discretion to determine  the terms  and conditions  of Director  Options and  to
interpret  and administer  the 1997 Plan  with respect to  Director Options. The
Compensation Committee (and the Board) are  also authorized to adopt, amend  and
rescind rules relating to the administration of the 1997 Plan.
 
   
    ELIGIBILITY.   Options,  SARs, restricted stock  and other  Awards under the
1997 Plan may be granted to individuals who are then officers or other employees
of the Company  or any  of its  present or  future subsidiaries  based upon  the
determination  of the Compensation Committee. Such Awards also may be granted to
consultants of the Company selected by  the Board or Compensation Committee  for
participation  in the  1997 Plan. Non-employee  directors of the  Company may be
granted NQSOs (as defined herein) by the Board.
    
 
   
    GRANT OF AWARDS.  The 1997 Plan provides that the Compensation Committee may
grant or issue stock options,  SARs, restricted stock, deferred stock,  dividend
equivalents,   performance  awards,  stock  payments  and  other  stock  related
benefits, or any combination thereof. Each Award will be set forth in a separate
agreement with the person receiving the Award and will indicate the type,  terms
and conditions of the Award as determined by the Compensation Committee.
    
 
   
        NONQUALIFIED  STOCK  OPTIONS ("NQSOS")  will  provide for  the  right to
purchase Common Stock at a price not less than the fair market value on the date
of grant, and usually will become exercisable (in the discretion of the Board or
Compensation Committee)  in  one or  more  installments after  the  grant  date,
subject  to the participant's agreement to continue in the employ of the Company
for at least one year (or shorter period as fixed in a written agreement) and/or
subject to  the  satisfaction  of  individual  or  Company  performance  targets
established  by the Board or Compensation Committee. NQSOs may be granted for up
to a ten-year  term specified  by the Board  or Compensation  Committee and  the
exercise  price  thereof must  be not  less than  the fair  market value  of the
underlying Common Stock  on the date  of grant. The  Compensation Committee  may
extend  the term of any outstanding option in connection with any termination of
employment or consultancy of the optionee or amend any condition or term of such
option relating to such termination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, options  may
not be repriced after issuance.
    
 
   
        INCENTIVE  STOCK OPTIONS ("ISOS"),  will be designed  to comply with the
provisions of the Code and will be subject to certain restrictions contained  in
the  Code. Among such  restrictions, ISOs must  have an exercise  price not less
than the fair market value of a share of Common Stock on the date of grant,  may
only  be granted  to employees,  must expire within  a specified  period of time
following the Optionee's termination of employment, and must be exercised within
the ten years  after the date  of grant;  but such options  may be  subsequently
modified  to  disqualify them  from treatment  as ISOs.  In the  case of  an ISO
granted to an  individual who owns  (or is deemed  to own) at  least 10% of  the
total  combined voting power  of all classes  of stock of  the Company, the 1997
Plan provides that the exercise price must  be at least 110% of the fair  market
value of a share of Common Stock on the date of grant and the ISO must expire no
later  than the fifth anniversary  of the date of  its grant. Any option granted
may be modified by the Compensation Committee to disqualify such option from ISO
treatment.
    
 
   
        RESTRICTED STOCK may be  sold to participants and  made subject to  such
restrictions  as  may  be determined  by  the Board  or  Compensation Committee.
Restricted stock, typically, may be repurchased  by the Company at the  original
purchase price if the conditions or restrictions are not met. In addition, under
certain  circumstances,  the Company  may repurchase  the restricted  stock upon
termination of  employment at  a  cash price  equal to  the  price paid  by  the
grantee.  In general, restricted stock may not be sold, or otherwise transferred
or hypothecated,  until  restrictions  are  removed  or  expire.  Purchasers  of
restricted stock, unlike recipients of options, will have voting rights and will
receive dividends prior to the time when the restrictions lapse.
    
 
                                       48
<PAGE>
   
        DEFERRED STOCK may be awarded to participants, typically without payment
of   consideration,  but  subject  to  vesting  conditions  based  on  continued
employment or on performance criteria  established by the Board or  Compensation
Committee.  Like restricted stock, deferred stock  may not be sold, or otherwise
transferred or hypothecated,  until vesting  conditions are  removed or  expire.
Unlike  restricted stock, deferred  stock will not be  issued until the deferred
stock award has vested, and recipients of deferred stock generally will have  no
voting  or  dividend  rights  prior  to the  time  when  vesting  conditions are
satisfied.
    
 
   
        STOCK APPRECIATION  RIGHTS  may  be granted  in  connection  with  stock
options   or  other  Awards,  or  separately.  SARs  granted  by  the  Board  or
Compensation  Committee  in  connection  with  stock  options  or  other  awards
typically  will provide for payments  to the holder based  upon increases in the
price of Common Stock  over the exercise  price of the  related option or  other
Awards,  but alternatively may be based upon criteria such as book value. Except
as required by  Section 162(m) with  respect to  an SAR intended  to qualify  as
performance-based  compensation  as described  in Section  162(m), there  are no
restrictions specified in the 1997 Plan on the exercise of SARs or the amount of
gain realizable therefrom, although restrictions may be imposed by the Board  or
Compensation  Committee  in  the  SAR  agreements.  The  Board  or  Compensation
Committee may elect to pay SARs in cash  or in Common Stock or in a  combination
of both.
    
 
   
        DIVIDEND  EQUIVALENTS represent the value of the dividends per share, if
any, paid by  the Company,  calculated with reference  to the  number of  shares
covered  by the  stock options,  SARs or other  Awards held  by the participant.
Dividend equivalents will be converted into cash or additional shares of  Common
Stock as determined by the Compensation Committee.
    
 
   
        PERFORMANCE AWARDS may be granted by the Board or Compensation Committee
on  an individual  or group  basis. Generally, these  Awards will  be based upon
specific performance targets and may be paid in cash or in Common Stock or in  a
combination  of both. Performance Awards may include "phantom" stock Awards that
provide for payments based upon increases  in the price of the Company's  Common
Stock over a predetermined period.
    
 
   
        STOCK  PAYMENTS may be authorized by the Board or Compensation Committee
in the form of shares  of Common Stock or an  option or other right to  purchase
Common  Stock as part of  a deferred compensation arrangement  in lieu of all or
any part of compensation, including bonuses, that would otherwise be payable  in
cash  to the key employee or consultant. Such payments will be determined by the
Compensation Committee based on specific performance criteria.
    
 
   
        Generally,  in  addition  to  the  payment  of  any  purchase  price  as
consideration  for the issuance of an Award, the grantee must agree to remain in
the employ of or to  consult for, the Company for  at least one year after  such
Award  is  issued. In  addition, under  the terms  of the  1997 Plan  Awards are
exercisable or payable only  while the grantee is  an employee or consultant  of
the Company. However, under certain conditions, the Committee may determine that
any  such  award  may  be  exercisable  or  paid  subsequent  to  termination of
employment.
    
 
   
        DIRECTOR OPTIONS will be granted to the Company's non-employee directors
under the 1997 Plan at a per share price not less than the fair market value  of
a  share of Common Stock on the date of grant. Following the consummation of the
Offering, (i)  a person  who is  initially elected  to the  Board and  who is  a
non-employee director at the time of such initial election automatically will be
granted  a Director Option to purchase 15,000 shares of Common Stock on the date
of such initial election, and (ii) a  person who is re-elected to the Board  and
who  is a  non-employee director at  the time of  such re-election automatically
shall be granted a Director Option to  purchase 5,000 shares of Common Stock  on
the  date  of each  annual meeting  of  stockholders at  which such  director is
re-elected to the Board.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, (A)  no grant shall  be
made  to a non-employee director pursuant to the foregoing clause (i) if: (x) an
affiliate  of  such  non-employee  director  served  on  the  Board  within  the
twelve-month  period prior to the initial election of such non-employee director
or (y) such non-employee director is an employee of the Company who subsequently
retires from the Company  and remains on  the Board, and (B)  no grant shall  be
made  to a non-employee director  pursuant to the foregoing  clause (ii) if such
non-employee
    
 
                                       49
<PAGE>
director was  initially elected  to the  Board within  120 days  of such  annual
meeting of stockholders. Director Options granted to non-employee directors will
vest  over a three-year period. Although the Board presently has an intention to
grant only Director Options to non-employee directors, the Board may grant other
stock options  or  Awards  to  non-employee directors  in  accordance  with  the
provisions of the 1997 Plan.
 
   
    The  1997 Plan may  be amended, suspended  or terminated at  any time by the
Board or the Compensation Committee. However, the maximum number of shares  that
may  be sold or issued under the 1997 Plan may not be increased without approval
of the Company's stockholders.
    
 
   
    SECURITIES LAWS AND FEDERAL INCOME TAXES
    
 
   
        SECURITIES LAWS.   The 1997 Plan  is intended to  conform to the  extent
necessary with all provisions of the Securities Act and the Exchange Act and any
and  all  regulations  and  rules promulgated  by  the  Securities  and Exchange
Commission thereunder, including  without limitation Rule  16b-3. The 1997  Plan
will  be administered, and options will be granted and may be exercised, only in
such a manner as to conform to  such laws, rules and regulations. To the  extent
permitted  by applicable law, the 1997 Plan and options granted thereunder shall
be deemed amended to  the extent necessary  to conform to  such laws, rules  and
regulations.
    
 
   
        GENERAL  FEDERAL  TAX  CONSEQUENCES.   Under  current  federal  laws, in
general, recipients of awards  and grants of  nonqualified stock options,  stock
appreciation  rights,  restricted stock,  deferred stock,  dividend equivalents,
performance awards and  stock payments  under the  1997 Plan  are taxable  under
Section  83 of the Code upon their receipt  of Common Stock or cash with respect
to such awards or  grants and, subject  to Section 162(m),  the Company will  be
entitled  to an income tax deduction with respect to the amounts taxable to such
recipients. Under  Sections 421  and 422  of the  Code, recipients  of ISOs  are
generally  not taxable on their receipt of  Common Stock upon their exercises of
ISOs if the ISOs and option stock  are held for certain minimum holding  periods
and,  in such event, the  Company is not entitled  to income tax deductions with
respect to such exercises. Participants in  the 1997 Plan will be provided  with
additional  information regarding the  tax consequences relating  to the various
types of awards and grants under the plan.
    
 
   
        SECTION 162(m) LIMITATION.  In general, under Section 162(m), income tax
deductions of  publicly-held corporations  may be  limited to  the extent  total
compensation  (including base salary,  annual bonus, stock  option exercises and
non-qualified benefits paid) for certain  executive officers exceeds $1  million
(less  the amount of any "excess parachute  payments" as defined in Section 280G
of the Code) in any one year. However, under Section 162(m), the deduction limit
does not apply  to certain  "performance-based compensation"  established by  an
independent  compensation  committee  which  is  adequately  disclosed  to,  and
approved by, stockholders. In  particular, stock options  and SARs will  satisfy
the  "performance-based  compensation" exception  if the  awards  are made  by a
qualifying compensation committee, the  plan sets the  maximum number of  shares
that can be granted to any person within a specified period and the compensation
is  based solely on an  increase in the stock price  after the grant date (I.E.,
the option exercise price is equal to  or greater than the fair market value  of
the  stock  subject to  the award  on the  grant date).  Under a  Section 162(m)
transition rule for compensation plans of corporations which are privately  held
and which become publicly held in an initial public offering, the 1997 Plan will
not  be  subject  to  Section  162(m)  until  the  earlier  of  (i)  a  material
modification of the 1997 Plan; (ii) the issuance of all employer stock and other
compensation that has  been allocated under  the 1997 Plan;  or (iii) the  first
meeting  of stockholders at which directors are  to be elected that occurs after
December 31, 1999 (the "Transition Date"). After the Transition Date, rights  or
awards  granted  under the  1997 Plan,  other  than options  and SARs,  will not
qualify as  "performance-based  compensation"  for purposes  of  Section  162(m)
unless  such rights or awards are  granted or vest upon preestablished objective
performance goals, the material terms of which are disclosed to and approved  by
the  stockholders  of the  Company. Thus,  the Company  expects that  such other
rights or  awards under  the 1997  Plan will  not constitute  "performance-based
compensation" for purposes of Section 162(m).
    
 
   
    The  Company has attempted to structure the 1997 Plan in such a manner that,
after the Transition  Date, subject  to obtaining stockholder  approval for  the
1997 Plan, the remuneration attributable to stock
    
 
                                       50
<PAGE>
   
options and SARs which meet the other requirements of Section 162(m) will not be
subject  to the $1 million limitation. The Company has not, however, requested a
ruling from the IRS or an opinion of counsel regarding this issue.
    
 
   
    REGISTRATION STATEMENT  ON  FORM  S-8.    The  Company  intends  to  file  a
registration  statement on  Form S-8  under the  Securities Act  to register the
shares of Common Stock reserved for issuance under the 1997 Plan.
    
 
   
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
    
 
   
    Prior to  the Recapitalization,  the  Company did  not have  a  compensation
committee.  In fiscal  1995, compensation  decisions for  executive officers and
senior management  were  made  by  Messrs.  Scherr  and  Thomas.  Following  the
Recapitalization,  Messrs. Thomas, Albertson, Ferguson and Lazarus served on the
Compensation Committee. Upon  consummation of the  Offering, Messrs. Thomas  and
Albertson  resigned from the Compensation Committee.  In April 1996, the Company
made a personal loan to Larry Thomas, the Company's President, of $1 million  at
an  annual interest rate of  8.0% to assist Mr.  Thomas's purchase of a personal
residence. The loan, excluding accrued interest of $10,000 (which was forgiven),
was repaid concurrently with the Recapitalization.
    
 
                                       51
<PAGE>
   
                             PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
    
 
   
    The  information  in the  following table  sets forth  the ownership  of the
Common Stock, as of the date of this Prospectus, by (i) each person who, to  the
knowledge  of the  Company, beneficially  owns more  than 5%  of the outstanding
shares of Common  Stock; (ii)  each Named Officer;  (iii) each  director of  the
Company;  and (iv)  all directors  and executive officers  of the  Company, as a
group. As of the date of this  Prospectus, the Company had 19,329,079 shares  of
Common  Stock outstanding and,  to the knowledge  of the Company,  there were 45
record holders  of  Common  Stock.  The Company  believes  that  the  number  of
beneficial holders is significantly in excess of this amount.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP (1)
                                                                                            ------------------------
                                                                                             NUMBER OF
NAME AND ADDRESS (2)                                                                          SHARES       PERCENT
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  -----------  -----------
<S>                                                                                         <C>          <C>
Chase Venture Capital Associates, L.P. (3)................................................    4,381,265       22.7%
 380 Madison Avenue, 12th Floor
 New York, NY 10017
Raymond Scherr (4)........................................................................    1,710,148        8.8
David Ferguson (5)........................................................................      --           --
Jeffrey Walker (5)........................................................................      --           --
Michael Lazarus (6).......................................................................      --           --
Steven Burge (7)..........................................................................      --           --
Larry Thomas (8)..........................................................................    1,384,816        7.2
Marty Albertson (9).......................................................................      927,637        4.8
Bruce Ross (10)...........................................................................       30,383        *
Barry Soosman (11)........................................................................       76,293        *
All Executive Officers and Directors as a group (9 persons) (5)-(12)......................    4,076,211       21.1
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   
 *  Represents less than 1% of the issued and outstanding shares.
    
 
   
(1) Beneficial  ownership  is determined  in accordance  with  the rules  of the
    Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  and  generally  includes  voting   or
    investment  power with respect to securities. Shares of Common Stock subject
    to options  and warrants  which are  currently exercisable,  or will  become
    exercisable  within  60 days  of  the date  of  this Prospectus,  are deemed
    outstanding for computing  the percentage  of the person  or entity  holding
    such  securities but are not outstanding for computing the percentage of any
    other person or entity. Except as indicated by footnote, and subject to  the
    community  property laws where applicable, to  the knowledge of the Company,
    the persons named in the table  above have sole voting and investment  power
    with  respect to all shares  of Common Stock shown  as beneficially owned by
    them.
    
 
   
(2) Unless otherwise indicated,  the address  for each person  is the  Company's
    address at 5155 Clareton Drive, Agoura Hills, CA 91362.
    
 
   
(3) Excludes  Investor Options granted  by Chase Ventures  to certain members of
    management for the purchase of 207,899 shares of Common Stock, respectively.
    See "Certain Transactions  -- Options  Granted by the  Investors to  Certain
    Members of Management."
    
 
   
(4) Represents: (i) 1,150,046 of shares of Common Stock held by the Scherr Trust
    for  which Mr. Scherr and  his spouse serve as  co-trustees and share voting
    and investment control over such shares of Common Stock; (ii) 275,460 shares
    of Common Stock held in trust for the benefit of Mr. Scherr and his son  for
    which  Mr.  Scherr's  brother serves  as  trustee and  exercises  voting and
    investment control; (iii) 275,460 shares of  Common Stock held in trust  for
    the  benefit  of Mr.  Scherr's spouse  and daughter  for which  Mr. Scherr's
    brother serves as trustee and  exercises voting and investment control;  and
    (iv)  9,182 shares of Common Stock held by Mr. Scherr's brother. The address
    of each
    
 
                                       52
<PAGE>
    such person is  1096 Lakeview Canyon,  Westlake Village, CA  91362. Mr.  Ray
    Scherr  disclaims beneficial ownership  of the shares held  in trust for the
    benefit of his wife and daughter and held by David Scherr.
 
   
(5) Neither Mr. Walker nor Mr. Ferguson own any Common Stock. Messrs. Walker and
    Ferguson  are  the   Managing  General  Partner   and  a  General   Partner,
    respectively, of Chase Capital Partners, a New York general partnership, and
    the  sole  general  partner of  Chase  Ventures  and an  affiliate  of Chase
    Securities.  Each  of  Messrs.  Walker  and  Ferguson  disclaims  beneficial
    ownership  of the shares owned by Chase Ventures except to the extent of his
    pecuniary interest therein. The address for Mr. Walker is c/o Chase  Capital
    Partners,  380 Madison Avenue, 12th Floor, New York, New York 10017, and the
    address for Mr. Ferguson is c/o  Chase Capital Partners, 840 Apollo  Street,
    Suite 223, El Segundo, California 90245.
    
 
   
(6) Mr.  Lazarus does not directly  own any Common Stock.  However, as a general
    partner of Weston Presidio Management II, L.P., the sole general partner  of
    Weston  Presidio, he  may be deemed  to share voting  and investment control
    over the 658,966 shares of Common Stock held by Weston Presidio and over the
    additional 29,684 shares of Common Stock  owned by Weston Presidio that  are
    subject to Investor Options. See "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by
    the  Investors  to Certain  Members  of Management."  Mr.  Lazarus disclaims
    beneficial ownership of the  shares held by Weston  Presidio, except to  the
    extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address for Mr. Lazarus is c/o
    Weston  Presidio, 343 Sansome Street,  Suite 1210, San Francisco, California
    94111.
    
 
   
(7) Mr. Burge does not own any Common Stock. However, as a managing director  of
    Wells Fargo, he may be deemed to share voting or investment control over the
    878,589  shares of Common Stock owned by Wells Fargo and over the additional
    39,611 shares  of Common  Stock owned  by Wells  Fargo that  are subject  to
    Investor  Options.  See  "Certain  Transactions --  Options  Granted  by the
    Investors to Certain Members of Management." Mr. Burge disclaims  beneficial
    ownership  of the shares  held by Wells  Fargo, except to  the extent of his
    pecuniary interest therein.  The address for  Mr. Burge is  c/o Wells  Fargo
    Equity  Capital, 333 South Grand Avenue, Suite 1200, Los Angeles, California
    90071.
    
 
   
(8) Represents: (i) 1,275,094  shares of Common  Stock held by  a trust for  the
    benefit  of Mr. Thomas  and his spouse  for which Mr.  Thomas and his spouse
    serve as co-trustees; and (ii) 109,722 shares of Common Stock issuable  upon
    the  exercise of an Investor Option granted  to Mr. Thomas by the Investors.
    See "Certain Transactions  -- Options  Granted by the  Investors to  Certain
    Members of Management."
    
 
   
(9) Represents:  (i) 711,717  shares of  Common Stock  held by  a trust  for the
    benefit of Mr.  Albertson and  his spouse for  which Mr.  Albertson and  his
    spouse  serve as  co-trustees; (ii)  53,099 shares  of Common  Stock held in
    trust for the benefit of Mr. Albertson and one of his children for which Mr.
    Albertson serves as  trustee; (iii) 53,099  shares of Common  Stock held  in
    trust  for the benefit of Mr. Albertson's spouse and one of his children for
    which Mr. Albertson  serves as trustee;  and (iv) 109,722  shares of  Common
    Stock  issuable  upon the  exercise  of an  Investor  Option granted  to Mr.
    Albertson by the Investors. See "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted  by
    the Investors to Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
(10)Includes  3,850  shares of  Common Stock  issuable upon  the exercise  of an
    Investor  Option  granted  to  Mr.  Ross  by  the  Investors.  See  "Certain
    Transactions  --  Options Granted  by the  Investors  to Certain  Members of
    Management."
    
 
   
(11)Includes: (i) 45,910 shares of Common Stock held by the Soosman Family Trust
    with respect to which  Mr. Soosman and his  spouse serve as co-trustees  and
    share  voting and investment control; and  (ii) 3,850 shares of Common Stock
    issuable upon the exercise of an  Investor Option granted to Mr. Soosman  by
    the Investors. See "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the Investors
    to Certain Members of Management."
    
 
                                       53
<PAGE>
   
                              CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS
    
 
   
MANAGEMENT TRANSACTIONS
    
 
   
    In  April  1996, the  Company  made a  personal  loan to  Larry  Thomas, the
Company's President,  of $1.0  million at  an annual  interest rate  of 8.0%  to
assist  Mr.  Thomas's  purchase of  a  personal residence.  The  loan, excluding
accrued interest of $10,000 (which  was forgiven), was repaid concurrently  with
the Recapitalization.
    
 
   
    On  February 15, 1996, the  Company entered into sale-leaseback transactions
with Raymond Scherr relating to the  Company's Arlington, Texas store and  North
Chicago,  Illinois store. The Arlington, Texas store  was sold by the Company to
Mr. Scherr  for $935,000.  The North  Chicago, Illinois  store was  sold by  the
Company  to Mr.  Scherr for  $820,000. The  Company leases  the Arlington, Texas
store and North Chicago,  Illinois store from Mr.  Scherr for $7,687 and  $8,570
per month, respectively. In August 1995, Mr. Scherr purchased the South Chicago,
Illinois  store from the Company's profit sharing plan for $500,000. The Company
leases this store from Mr. Scherr for  $8,250 per month. The Company leases  its
Covina, California store from Mr. Scherr for $9,900 per month. All of the leases
are  on a triple net basis  pursuant to which the Company  pays rent, as well as
expenses relating to taxes, insurance and maintenance. Management believes  that
the  terms  of these  leases are  on the  same  or similar  terms that  would be
available from an unaffiliated third party in an arm's length negotiation.
    
 
   
    The Company  paid the  law firm  of  Soosman &  Associates, of  which  Barry
Soosman  was a partner, $70,000,  $120,000 and $160,000 for  legal fees in 1994,
1995 and 1996, respectively.
    
 
   
RECAPITALIZATION AND TRANSACTIONS WITH MANAGEMENT
    
 
    On June 5, 1996, the Company consummated a series of transactions to  effect
the  Recapitalization pursuant to  which control of  the Company was transferred
from its sole stockholder, the Scherr Trust, to members of management (including
Messrs.  Thomas   and  Albertson)   and  the   Investors.  The   terms  of   the
Recapitalization, including the basis of the purchase price for shares of Common
Stock  and the  number of  shares of  Junior Preferred  Stock issued  to Messrs.
Thomas and  Albertson  and the  Scherr  Trust, was  determined  as a  result  of
arms-length negotiations with the Investors.
 
   
    In  connection with the Recapitalization, Larry Thomas (i) purchased 493,376
shares of Common  Stock at a  purchase price of  $1.00 per share  in cash;  (ii)
purchased   189,171.92  shares  of  Junior  Preferred  Stock  (with  an  initial
liquidation value of $100 per share) in exchange for the cancellation of options
to acquire 48,844,190 shares of Common  Stock; and (iii) received $10.6  million
in  cash upon the cancellation of options  for the purchase of 31,484,670 shares
of Common Stock. The options exchanged had a weighted average exercise price  of
$0.003 per share.
    
 
   
    In  connection  with  the Recapitalization,  Marty  Albertson  (i) purchased
328,916 shares of Common Stock at a  purchase price of $1.00 per share in  cash;
(ii)  purchased 126,114.41  shares of  Junior Preferred  Stock (with  an initial
liquidation value of $100 per share) in exchange for the cancellation of options
to acquire 32,562,741  shares of Common  Stock; (iii) received  $7.1 million  in
cash  upon the cancellation of options for  the purchase of 20,989,747 shares of
Common Stock. The  options exchanged had  a weighted average  exercise price  of
$0.003 per share.
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company repurchased 309,840,000
shares of Common Stock from the Scherr Trust for approximately $113.1 million in
cash.  The Scherr  Trust also  exchanged 51,123,600  shares of  Common Stock for
198,000 shares of Junior Preferred Stock  (with an initial liquidation value  of
$19.8 million) and retained 516,400 shares of Common Stock.
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options to each
of Messrs. Thomas and Albertson to purchase 397,985 shares of Common Stock at an
exercise  price  of $10.89  per share  pursuant to  the Management  Stock Option
Agreements. All such options granted to Messrs. Thomas and Albertson are subject
to future vesting which may be accelerated upon the attainment by the Company of
certain performance hurdles  based on market  capitalization and other  factors.
See   "Management  --   Management  Stock  Option   Agreements."  Following  the
consummation of  the  Offering,  the  Company intends  to  file  a  registration
statement  on Form  S-8 under  the Securities  Act to  register the  issuance of
Common Stock upon exercise of such options.
    
 
                                       54
<PAGE>
   
    The Company  granted  certain  registration rights  to  Messrs.  Thomas  and
Albertson and the Scherr Trust. See "-- Registration Rights."
    
 
   
TRANSACTIONS WITH THE INVESTORS
    
 
   
    In  connection  with  the  Recapitalization,  the  Investors  purchased  the
following equity securities of  the Company for an  aggregate purchase price  of
$70.0  million in cash: (i) Chase  Ventures and an affiliate purchased 1,355,550
shares of Common Stock and 519,750 shares of Junior Preferred Stock; (ii)  Wells
Fargo  purchased  258,200 shares  of Common  Stock and  99,000 shares  of Junior
Preferred Stock; and (iii)  Weston Presidio purchased  193,650 shares of  Common
Stock and 74,250 shares of Junior Preferred Stock.
    
 
   
    Chase  Ventures  is  an affiliate  of  Chase Securities.  Jeffrey  Walker, a
director of  the Company,  is  the managing  general  partner of  Chase  Capital
Partners,  the general partner of Chase  Ventures. David Ferguson, a director of
the Company, is a general partner of Chase Capital Partners. Messrs. Walker  and
Ferguson  have equity interests in Chase Capital Partners. Mr. Burge, a director
of the  Company, is  a  managing director  of Wells  Fargo.  Wells Fargo  is  an
indirect  wholly owned subsidiary  of Wells Fargo  & Co., the  parent company of
Wells Fargo. Mr. Burge does not have an equity interest in Wells Fargo or  Wells
Fargo  & Co. Michael Lazarus, a director of the Company, is a general partner of
Weston Presidio Capital Management II, L.P. and has an equity interest  therein.
Weston  Presidio  Capital Management  II, L.P.  is the  sole general  partner of
Weston Presidio.
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization,  the Scherr Trust and  stockholders
holding  management  positions (the  "Management  Stockholders") have  agreed to
indemnify the Investors and the DLJ Investors for losses incurred in  connection
with  any  misrepresentations or  breaches  of warranty  by  the Company  or its
affiliates. The Investors and the DLJ Investors (as defined herein) have  agreed
to  indemnify the Company in substantially the same manner, with the indemnified
amount limited to each Investor's ratable share of such losses.
    
 
   
TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES OF CHASE SECURITIES
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company entered into the Bridge
Facility with  DLJ  Bridge  and  Chemical, an  affiliate  of  Chase  Securities,
pursuant  to which DLJ Bridge  purchased for cash $51.0  million of notes of the
Company bearing interest at 12.75% per  annum and Chemical loaned $49.0  million
in  cash to the Company  with interest payable at  12.75% per annum. The Company
applied the net proceeds of  the private placement of  the Old Notes, for  which
Chase  Securities acted as an Initial Purchaser, to the retirement of the Bridge
Facility. Chase Securities  also acted  as an  underwriter in  the Offering.  In
connection  with  such  transactions,  Chemical  and  Chase  Securities received
customary fees.
    
 
   
1996 CREDIT FACILITY
    
 
   
    Effective with  the Recapitalization,  Wells Fargo,  an affiliate  of  Wells
Fargo  Bank, purchased approximately 7.14% of the then outstanding Common Stock.
See "Principal and Selling Stockholders." Wells  Fargo Bank is acting as  lender
under  the 1996 Credit Facility  and is being paid  customary fees therefor. See
"Description of the 1996 Credit Facility."
    
 
   
REGISTRATION RIGHTS
    
 
   
    The Company  granted to  the Investors  and certain  members of  management,
including  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson and the Scherr Trust, the right to cause
the Company to register  such holders' shares of  equity securities at any  time
upon  the request of holders of at least  60.0% of the equity securities held by
such holders  in accordance  with the  requirements of  the Securities  Act  and
subject  to the Company's right to delay  its obligations upon the occurrence of
specified events. In  addition, all of  such holders have  the right to  include
their  shares  of equity  securities in  any  registration of  equity securities
effected by the Company, subject to certain limitations. The Company has  agreed
to   pay  all  costs   associated  with  any   such  registrations,  except  for
underwriters' discounts and commissions.
    
 
   
TAX INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT
    
 
   
    In connection  with the  Recapitalization, the  Company entered  into a  tax
indemnification  agreement  (the "Tax  Indemnification Agreement")  with Raymond
Scherr pursuant to which the Company has agreed to indemnify Raymond Scherr  for
any loss, damage or liability and all expenses incurred,
    
 
                                       55
<PAGE>
suffered, sustained or required to be paid by the Scherr Trust in the event that
certain  specified  aspects  of the  Recapitalization  are not  treated  for tax
purposes  in  the  manner  contemplated  by  the  Recapitalization  and  related
transactions.  The Management Stockholders have individually agreed to reimburse
the Company on  a pro  rata basis  for any  amounts paid  to Mr.  Scherr by  the
Company  as required  by the  Tax Indemnification  Agreement; provided, however,
that the  aggregate amount  reimbursed by  the Management  Stockholders may  not
exceed $5 million.
 
   
SUBCHAPTER S DISTRIBUTIONS
    
 
   
    The  Company  elected to  be  taxed as  a  "S" corporation  from  1988 until
immediately prior to the consummation of the Recapitalization. The Scherr Trust,
as the  sole  stockholder,  received  for 1994,  1995  and  1996  aggregate  "S"
corporation  distributions  of $3.9  million, $14.5  million and  $29.8 million,
respectively.
    
 
   
SCHERR BOARD REPRESENTATION LETTER
    
 
   
    On June 5, 1996, the Company  entered into an agreement with Raymond  Scherr
(the  "Scherr Board  Representation Letter")  in which  the Company  agreed that
subsequent to  the termination  of the  Stockholders Agreement  by reason  of  a
Qualified Public Offering and so long as Mr. Scherr and certain related entities
own  5% or more of the  Common Stock on a fully  diluted basis, the Company will
nominate or cause the nomination  of Mr. Scherr to  the Board of Directors  (and
include  Scherr in any proxy statement  and related materials used in connection
with an election of directors) and otherwise  use its best efforts to cause  his
election  at each annual meeting or special  meeting relating to the election of
directors of the Company.  The Company's obligations  under this agreement  will
terminate  if  Mr.  Scherr suffers  a  disability  or commits  certain  acts (as
described in  the  agreement).  The  Offering  constituted  a  Qualified  Public
Offering for purposes of the Scherr Board Representation Letter.
    
 
   
MANAGEMENT TAX REDEMPTION
    
 
   
    In connection with the conversion of management's shares of Junior Preferred
Stock  upon completion of the Offering,  a significant amount of non-cash income
was deemed to have been earned by certain employees of the Company who are  also
stockholders  of the  Company (including Larry  Thomas and  Marty Albertson) for
federal and state income tax purposes whether or not such employees received any
cash with respect to the underlying stock. In February 1997, the Company  agreed
to  redeem (the "Management  Tax Redemption") approximately  1,317,000 shares of
Common Stock, at  a price  equal to  the initial  public offering  price in  the
Offering  less the net underwriting discount, to provide sufficient cash to such
employees to finance a portion of such federal and state income tax obligations.
Pursuant to the terms  of such agreement, the  Company used approximately  $18.4
million  of the  proceeds from the  Offering to  redeem for cash  such shares of
Common Stock (of which approximately $6.7 million and $4.5 million were paid  to
Messrs. Thomas and Albertson, respectively).
    
 
   
OPTIONS GRANTED BY THE INVESTORS TO CERTAIN MEMBERS OF MANAGEMENT
    
 
   
    Chase  Ventures, Wells Fargo and Weston Presidio granted Investor Options to
purchase an aggregate of 277,194 shares of  Common Stock at a purchase price  of
$4.33  per share to certain officers and key managers of the Company. Each grant
of an Investor Option is, to the  extent possible, deemed to be granted by  each
Investor  to each  member of  management in  the same  ratio as  granted by each
Investor (i.e., 75.00% by  Chase Ventures, 14.29% by  Wells Fargo and 10.71%  by
Weston  Presidio).  Included in  the Investor  Options  are options  to purchase
109,722 shares of Common Stock that were  granted to each of Messrs. Thomas  and
Albertson  and 3,850 shares of Common Stock that were granted to each of Messrs.
Ross and  Soosman. The  Investor  Options were  granted  in December  1996,  are
presently  exercisable and will expire on December 30, 2001. This Company is not
a party to this  agreement and has  not, and will not,  incur any obligation  in
connection with such Investor Options. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis
of  Financial  Condition  and Results  of  Operations --  Liquidity  and Captial
Resources."
    
 
                                       56
<PAGE>
                              DESCRIPTION OF NOTES
 
    Set  forth below is a summary of  certain provisions of the Notes. The Notes
were issued pursuant  to an  indenture (the "Indenture"),  dated as  of July  2,
1996,  by and between the Company and U.S. Trust Company of California, N.A., as
trustee (the "Trustee"). The  following summaries of  certain provisions of  the
Notes  and the Indenture are  summaries only, do not  purport to be complete and
are qualified in their  entirety by reference  to all of  the provisions of  the
Notes and the Indenture. Capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise defined
shall  have the meanings assigned to  them in the Indenture. Wherever particular
provisions of the Indenture are referred to in this summary, such provisions are
incorporated by reference as a part  of the statements made and such  statements
are  qualified in their entirety by such reference. The Indenture is filed as an
exhibit to the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus is a part.
 
GENERAL
 
   
    The Notes are senior, unsecured, general  obligations of the Company. As  of
the date of this Prospectus, there are $66,667,000 aggregate principal amount of
Notes outstanding. The Notes are issuable only in fully registered form, without
coupons, in denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples thereof.
    
 
    The  Notes mature on July  1, 2006. The Notes bear  interest at the rate per
annum stated on the cover page hereof from the date of issuance or from the most
recent Interest Payment Date  to which interest has  been paid or provided  for,
payable  semi-annually on January 1 and July  1 of each year, commencing January
1, 1997, to the Persons in whose names such Notes are registered at the close of
business on  the December  15 or  June 15  immediately preceding  such  Interest
Payment  Date. Interest is calculated on the  basis of a 360-day year consisting
of twelve 30-day months.
 
    Principal of, premium, if  any, and interest on  the Notes are payable,  and
the  Notes may  be presented  for registration of  transfer or  exchange, at the
office or agency  of the Company  maintained for such  purpose, which office  or
agency shall be maintained in the Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York. At
the  option of the Company,  payment of interest may be  made by check mailed to
the Holders of the Notes at the  addresses set forth upon the registry books  of
the  Company. No service charge will be made for any registration of transfer or
exchange of Notes, but the  Company may require payment  of a sum sufficient  to
cover  any tax  or other  governmental charge  payable in  connection therewith.
Until otherwise designated by the Company,  the Company's office or agency  will
be  the corporate trust office of the Trustee presently located at the office of
the Trustee in the Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York.
 
OPTIONAL REDEMPTION
 
    The Company does not  have the right  to redeem any Notes  prior to July  1,
2001  (other  than out  of the  Net Cash  Proceeds of  an Initial  Public Equity
Offering, as described in the following paragraph). The Notes are redeemable for
cash at the option of the Company, in whole or in part, at any time on or  after
July  1, 2001, upon not less  than 30 days nor more  than 60 days notice to each
Holder of Notes, at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of
the principal amount) if redeemed during  the 12-month period commencing July  1
of  the years indicated below, in each case  (subject to the right of Holders of
record on a Record Date to receive interest due on an Interest Payment Date that
is on  or  prior to  such  Redemption Date)  together  with accrued  and  unpaid
interest thereon to the Redemption Date:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR                                                                     PERCENTAGE
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------  ------------
<S>                                                                     <C>
2001..................................................................     105.500%
2002..................................................................     103.667%
2003..................................................................     101.833%
2004 and thereafter...................................................     100.000%
</TABLE>
 
   
    Notwithstanding the foregoing, prior to July 1, 1999, upon an Initial Public
Equity  Offering for cash, up to 33  1/3% of the original $100 million aggregate
principal amount of  the Notes  may be  redeemed at  the option  of the  Company
within 60 days of such Initial Public Equity Offering, on not less than 30 days,
but
    
 
                                       57
<PAGE>
not  more than 60 days, notice to each  Holder of the Notes to be redeemed, with
cash from the Net Cash Proceeds of such Initial Public Equity Offering, at  110%
of  principal amount (subject to the right of Holders of record on a Record Date
to receive interest due on an Interest Payment Date that is on or prior to  such
Redemption  Date),  together with  accrued and  unpaid interest  to the  date of
redemption; PROVIDED, HOWEVER,  that immediately following  such redemption  not
less than 66 2/3% of the original $100 million aggregate principal amount of the
Notes  remains  outstanding. Pursuant  to this  provision, the  Company redeemed
$33,333,000 aggregate principal  amount of Notes  on April 19,  1997. As of  the
date  of this  Prospectus, there are  $66,667,000 aggregate  principal amount of
Notes outstanding.
 
    In the case of a partial redemption,  the Trustee shall select the Notes  or
portions  thereof for redemption  on a PRO RATA  basis, by lot  or in such other
manner it deems  appropriate and  fair. The  Notes may  be redeemed  in part  in
multiples of $1,000 only.
 
    The Notes do not have the benefit of any sinking fund.
 
    Notice of any redemption will be sent, by first-class mail, at least 30 days
and  not more than 60 days prior to  the date fixed for redemption to the Holder
of each Note to be redeemed to such Holder's last address as then shown upon the
registry books  of the  Registrar. Any  notice which  relates to  a Note  to  be
redeemed  in part only must  state the portion of  the principal amount equal to
the unredeemed portion  thereof and must  state that  on and after  the date  of
redemption,  upon surrender  of such Note,  a new  Note or Notes  in a principal
amount equal to the unredeemed portion thereof will be issued. On and after  the
date  of redemption,  interest will  cease to  accrue on  the Notes  or portions
thereof called  for  redemption, unless  the  Company defaults  in  the  payment
thereof.
 
CERTAIN COVENANTS
 
    REPURCHASE OF NOTES AT THE OPTION OF THE HOLDER UPON A CHANGE OF CONTROL
 
    The  Indenture  provides that  in the  event  that a  Change of  Control has
occurred, each Holder  of Notes will  have the right,  at such Holder's  option,
pursuant  to an irrevocable and unconditional  offer by the Company (the "Change
of Control Offer"), to require the Company to repurchase all or any part of such
Holder's Notes (PROVIDED that the principal amount of such Notes must be  $1,000
or  an integral  multiple thereof)  on a date  (the "Change  of Control Purchase
Date") that is  no later  than 35  Business Days  after the  occurrence of  such
Change  of Control,  at a  cash price (the  "Change of  Control Purchase Price")
equal to 101%  of the principal  amount thereof, together  with (subject to  the
right  of Holders  of record  on a  Record Date  to receive  interest due  on an
Interest Payment Date that is on or  prior to such repurchase date) accrued  and
unpaid  interest to the Change  of Control Purchase Date.  The Change of Control
Offer shall be made within  10 Business Days following  a Change of Control  and
shall  remain open for 20 Business  Days following its commencement (the "Change
of Control  Offer Period").  Upon  expiration of  the  Change of  Control  Offer
Period,  the  Company promptly  shall purchase  all  Notes properly  tendered in
response to the Change of Control Offer.
 
    As used herein, a "Change of Control" means such time as: (a) a "person"  or
"group"  (within the meaning of Sections 13(d)  and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act
of 1934, as amended),  other than any  person or group  comprised solely of  the
Investors,  has  become  the  beneficial  owner,  by  way  of  purchase, merger,
consolidation or otherwise, of 35% or more of the voting power of all classes of
voting securities  of  the Company  and  such person  or  group has  become  the
beneficial  owner of a greater percentage of  the voting power of all classes of
voting securities of the Company than that then held by the Investors; or (b)  a
sale or transfer of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to any
person  or group  (other than  any group consisting  solely of  the Investors or
their Affiliates)  has  been  consummated;  or (c)  during  any  period  of  two
consecutive  years, individuals who at the  beginning of such period constituted
the Board of  Directors of the  Company (together with  any new directors  whose
election  was approved by  a vote of a  majority of the  directors then still in
office, who  either were  directors at  the beginning  of such  period or  whose
election  or nomination for  the election was previously  so approved) cease for
any reason to constitute a majority of the directors of the Company, as the case
may
 
                                       58
<PAGE>
be, then in office, other than as a result of election and removal of  directors
pursuant  to the terms of  the Senior Preferred Stock as  in effect on the Issue
Date or the Stockholders Agreement as in effect on the Issue Date governing  the
election and removal of directors.
 
    As  used  herein, "Investors"  means (i)  Chase Venture  Capital Associates,
L.P., CB Capital Investors, Inc., Weston Presidio Capital II, L.P., Wells  Fargo
Small  Business Investment Company,  Inc. and any Person  controlled by or under
common control with any of the foregoing but not Persons controlling any of  the
foregoing, other than those Persons controlling the Investors as of the date the
shares  of Senior Preferred Stock  are first issued and  (ii) the holders of the
Company's Common Stock (including Larry  Thomas, Marty Albertson and the  Scherr
Trust) who are party to the Stockholders Agreement as in effect on June 5, 1996,
members of their immediate families and trusts for their sole benefit.
 
    A  transaction in which the Company is sold or its assets are transferred to
any person or group  of persons who  is or are Investors  will not constitute  a
Change  of Control, thus Holders would not  receive the benefit of the Change of
Control provisions in the event of such transaction. On or before the Change  of
Control Purchase Date, the Company will (i) accept for payment Notes or portions
thereof  properly tendered pursuant to the Change of Control Offer, (ii) deposit
with the Paying  Agent cash  sufficient to pay  the Change  of Control  Purchase
Price  (together with accrued and unpaid interest)  of all Notes so tendered and
(iii) deliver  to the  Trustee  Notes so  accepted  together with  an  Officers'
Certificate  listing  the  Notes  or portions  thereof  being  purchased  by the
Company. The Paying Agent promptly will pay the Holders of Notes so accepted  an
amount  equal to the Change of Control Purchase Price (together with accrued and
unpaid interest), and the Trustee promptly will authenticate and deliver to such
Holders a new Note equal in principal  amount to any unpurchased portion of  the
Note  surrendered; PROVIDED,  that each  such new  Note will  be in  a principal
amount of $1,000 or an integral multiple thereof. Any Notes not so accepted will
be delivered promptly by the Company to the Holder thereof. The Company publicly
will announce  the results  of the  Change of  Control Offer  on or  as soon  as
practicable  after the Change of  Control Purchase Date. Any  Note (or a portion
thereof) accepted for payment pursuant to the Change of Control Offer (and  duly
paid on the Change of Control Purchase Date) will cease to accrue interest after
the  Change of Control Purchase Date. There can be no assurance that the Company
would have available sufficient funds to repurchase the Notes in the event of  a
Change of Control.
 
    The  Change of Control purchase feature of the Notes may make more difficult
or discourage a  takeover of the  Company, and, thus,  the removal of  incumbent
management.  The Change of  Control purchase feature  resulted from negotiations
between the Company and the Initial Purchasers.
 
    The phrase "all  or substantially  all" of the  assets of  the Company  will
likely  be interpreted  under applicable  state law  and will  be dependent upon
particular facts  and circumstances.  As a  result,  there may  be a  degree  of
uncertainty  in ascertaining whether a sale or transfer of "all or substantially
all" of the assets of the Company has occurred.
 
    Any Change of Control Offer will  be made in compliance with all  applicable
laws,  rules and regulations, including, if applicable, Regulation 14E under the
Exchange Act and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder and all  other
applicable federal and state securities laws.
 
    LIMITATION ON INCURRENCE OF ADDITIONAL INDEBTEDNESS AND DISQUALIFIED CAPITAL
STOCK
 
    The Indenture provides that, except as set forth below in this covenant, the
Company  will not, and will  not permit any of  its Subsidiaries to, directly or
indirectly, issue, assume, guaranty, incur, become directly or indirectly liable
with respect to (including as a  result of an Acquisition), or otherwise  become
responsible  for, contingently  or otherwise (individually  and collectively, to
"incur"  or,  as  appropriate,  an   "incurrence"),  any  Indebtedness  or   any
Disqualified   Capital  Stock  (including  Acquired  Indebtedness),  other  than
Permitted Indebtedness.
 
    Notwithstanding the foregoing, if (i) no  Default or Event of Default  shall
have  occurred and  be continuing at  the time  of, or would  occur after giving
effect on a PRO FORMA basis to, such incurrence of Indebtedness or  Disqualified
Capital  Stock  and  (ii)  on  the  date  of  such  incurrence  (the "Incurrence
 
                                       59
<PAGE>
Date"), the Consolidated Coverage Ratio of the Company for the Reference  Period
immediately  preceding the Incurrence  Date, after giving effect  on a PRO FORMA
basis to such incurrence of such Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital Stock and,
to the extent set  forth in the definition  of Consolidated Coverage Ratio,  the
use  of proceeds  thereof, would be  at least (x)  2.0 to 1,  if such incurrence
occurs on or before June 30, 1997, or  (y) 2.25 to 1, if such incurrence  occurs
at any time thereafter (the "Debt Incurrence Ratio"), then the Company may incur
such Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital Stock.
 
    Indebtedness   or  Disqualified  Capital  Stock   of  any  Person  which  is
outstanding at  the  time  such  Person becomes  a  Subsidiary  of  the  Company
(including  upon designation of any subsidiary  or other Person as a Subsidiary)
or is merged with or  into or consolidated with the  Company or a Subsidiary  of
the  Company  shall be  deemed to  have been  incurred at  the time  such Person
becomes such  a  Subsidiary  of  the  Company or  is  merged  with  or  into  or
consolidated with the Company or a Subsidiary of the Company, as applicable.
 
    LIMITATION ON RESTRICTED PAYMENTS
 
    The  Indenture provides that the Company  and its Subsidiaries will not, and
will not permit any of their  Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, make  any
Restricted  Payment if, after giving effect to  such Restricted Payment on a PRO
FORMA basis, (1) a  Default or an  Event of Default would  have occurred and  be
continuing,  (2)  the  Company is  not  permitted  to incur  at  least  $1.00 of
additional Indebtedness pursuant to  the Debt Incurrence  Ratio in the  covenant
"Limitation  on Incurrence  of Additional Indebtedness  and Disqualified Capital
Stock," or  (3) the  aggregate amount  of all  Restricted Payments  made by  the
Company  and its  Subsidiaries, including after  giving effect  to such proposed
Restricted Payment, from and after the Issue  Date, would exceed the sum of  (a)
50%  of the  aggregate Consolidated  Net Income  of the  Company for  the period
(taken as one accounting period), commencing on the first day of the first  full
fiscal quarter commencing after the Issue Date, to and including the last day of
the  fiscal quarter ended immediately prior to the date of each such calculation
(or, in the event  Consolidated Net Income  for such period  is a deficit,  then
minus  100% of such deficit),  plus (b) 100% of  the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds
received by the Company from the sale of its Qualified Capital Stock (other than
(i) to a subsidiary of the Company and (ii) to the extent applied in  connection
with a Qualified Exchange), after the Issue Date.
 
    Failure  to satisfy  the foregoing  clauses (2)  and (3)  of the immediately
preceding paragraph,  however, will  not  prohibit (v)  Restricted  Investments,
PROVIDED  that,  after  giving PRO  FORMA  effect  to any  such  Investment, the
aggregate amount of all such  Investments made on or  after the Issue Date  that
are outstanding (after giving effect to the amount (as such amount is determined
by  the Board of Directors reasonably and in good faith) of any such Investments
(whether made  originally in  the form  of  property or  cash) returned  to  the
Company  or the Subsidiary that made such prior Investment, without restriction,
in cash,  except  to  the  extent  that the  effect  of  such  return  increased
Consolidated  Net Income  of the Company,  on or prior  to the date  of any such
calculation) at any time does not exceed $5 million, and failure to satisfy  the
foregoing  clauses (1), (2) and (3)  of the immediately preceding paragraph will
not prohibit  (w) a  Qualified Exchange,  (x)  the payment  of any  dividend  on
Capital  Stock within 60 days after the date of its declaration if such dividend
could have been  made on the  date of  such declaration in  compliance with  the
foregoing  provisions, (y) the  repurchase, redemption, or  other acquisition or
retirement for value of any Equity Interests  of the Company held by any  member
of  the  Company's management  pursuant  to any  management  equity subscription
agreement, restricted  stock  agreement, stockholders  agreement,  stock  option
agreement  or other similar agreement, PROVIDED that, in the case of this clause
(y), the  aggregate net  consideration paid  for all  such Equity  Interests  so
reacquired  shall not exceed $1.0  million, or (z) the  issuance of dividends on
the Senior Preferred Stock in shares  of Senior Preferred Stock or accretion  to
the  liquidation value thereof pursuant to the terms of the instrument governing
the Senior Preferred Stock as such instrument  was in effect on the Issue  Date.
The full amount of any Restricted Payment made pursuant to the foregoing clauses
(v),  (x) (except  to the extent  also covered by  clause (z)) and  (y), but not
pursuant to clause (w) or (z),  of the immediately preceding sentence,  however,
will  be  deducted in  the  calculation of  the  aggregate amount  of Restricted
Payments available  to be  made referred  to in  clause (3)  of the  immediately
preceding paragraph.
 
                                       60
<PAGE>
    LIMITATION ON DIVIDENDS AND OTHER PAYMENT RESTRICTIONS AFFECTING
SUBSIDIARIES
 
    The  Indenture provides that the Company  and its Subsidiaries will not, and
will not permit any  of their Subsidiaries to,  directly or indirectly,  create,
assume  or suffer  to exist  any consensual  restriction on  the ability  of any
Subsidiary of the Company to pay dividends or make other distributions to or  on
behalf of, or to pay any obligation to or on behalf of, or otherwise to transfer
assets or property to or on behalf of, or make or pay loans or advances to or on
behalf of, the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company, except (a) restrictions
imposed  by the Notes  or the Indenture, (b)  restrictions imposed by applicable
law and  regulation,  (c)  existing  restrictions  under  Existing  Indebtedness
(assuming  retirement  of  the  Bridge  Facility),  (d)  restrictions  under any
Acquired Indebtedness  not  incurred  in  violation  of  the  Indenture  or  any
agreement  relating to any property, asset,  or business acquired by the Company
or any of its Subsidiaries, which restrictions in each case existed at the  time
of  acquisition, were not put in place  in connection with or in anticipation of
such acquisition and  are not applicable  to any Person,  other than the  Person
acquired, or to any property, asset or business, other than the property, assets
and  business so  acquired, (e) any  such restriction or  requirement imposed by
Indebtedness incurred  under  paragraph  (e) of  the  definition  of  "Permitted
Indebtedness,"  PROVIDED such restriction or  requirement is no more restrictive
than that imposed by the Credit Agreement as of the Issue Date, (f) restrictions
with respect solely to a Subsidiary of the Company imposed pursuant to a binding
agreement which has  been entered into  for the  sale or disposition  of all  or
substantially all of the Equity Interests or assets of such Subsidiary, PROVIDED
such  restrictions  apply  solely to  the  Equity  Interests or  assets  of such
Subsidiary which are  being sold or  disposed of, (g)  restrictions on  transfer
contained  in Purchase Money Indebtedness incurred  pursuant to paragraph (c) of
the definition of  "Permitted Indebtedness," PROVIDED  such restrictions  relate
only to the transfer of the property acquired with the proceeds of such Purchase
Money  Indebtedness,  and  (h)  in connection  with  and  pursuant  to permitted
Refinancings, replacements of restrictions imposed pursuant to clause (a),  (c),
(d)  or (g)  of this paragraph  that are  not more restrictive  than those being
replaced and do not apply  to any other Person or  assets than those that  would
have been covered by the restrictions in the Indebtedness so refinanced.
 
    Notwithstanding  the foregoing, customary  provisions restricting subletting
or assignment of  any lease  entered into in  the ordinary  course of  business,
consistent  with industry practice shall in  and of themselves not be considered
restrictions on  the  ability of  the  applicable Subsidiary  to  transfer  such
agreement or assets, as the case may be.
 
    LIMITATION ON LIENS SECURING INDEBTEDNESS
 
    The  Company will not, and will not permit any Subsidiary to, create, incur,
assume or suffer to exist any Lien of any kind, other than Permitted Liens, upon
any of their respective assets now owned or acquired on or after the Issue  Date
or upon any income or profits therefrom.
 
    LIMITATION ON SALE OF ASSETS AND SUBSIDIARY STOCK
 
    The Indenture provides that the Company will not, and will not permit any of
its  Subsidiaries to,  in one  transaction or  a series  of related transactions
(that has or have, when taken together with all other such transactions over the
preceding 12-months, an aggregate fair market value in excess of $250,000 or for
aggregate net proceeds in excess  of $250,000), convey, sell, transfer,  assign,
or  otherwise  dispose  of,  directly or  indirectly,  any  of  their respective
property, businesses, or assets,  including by merger  or consolidation (in  the
case  of a Subsidiary of the Company),  and including any sale or other transfer
or issuance of any Equity Interests of any Subsidiary of the Company, whether by
the Company or a Subsidiary of either or through the issuance, sale or  transfer
of  Equity Interests by  a Subsidiary of  the Company (an  "Asset Sale"), unless
(1)(a) within 365 days after the date of such Asset Sale, the Net Cash  Proceeds
therefrom  (the  "Asset Sale  Offer  Amount") are  applied  (i) to  the optional
redemption of the Notes in accordance with  the terms of the Indenture, (ii)  to
the  repurchase of the  Notes pursuant to an  irrevocable and unconditional cash
offer (the "Asset Sale Offer") to repurchase the Notes at a purchase price  (the
"Asset  Sale Offer Price") of 101% of  principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid
interest to the date of payment,  (iii) to the repayment of amounts  outstanding
pursuant  to  the  terms  of  the  Credit  Agreement  (PROVIDED  that  upon such
application, the availability of  amounts that the  Company or its  Subsidiaries
may   be  liable  for  pursuant  thereto  shall  be  permanently  reduced  by  a
corresponding
 
                                       61
<PAGE>
amount), or (iv) to the repayment of Purchase Money Indebtedness secured by  the
assets  which  are  the subject  of  such Asset  Sale,  or (b)  within  365 days
following such Asset Sale, the Asset Sale Offer Amount is invested in assets and
property (other than notes, bonds,  obligations and securities of Persons  other
than  subsidiaries, which are  received as a result  of transactions effected in
compliance with the "Limitations on Restricted Payments" covenant) which in  the
good  faith reasonable judgment of the Board will immediately constitute or be a
part of a Related Business of the Company or such Subsidiary (if it continues to
be a Subsidiary) immediately following such transaction, (2) at least 75% of the
consideration for such Asset Sale or  series of related Asset Sales consists  of
cash or Cash Equivalents, (3) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred
and  be continuing at the time of, or  would occur after giving effect, on a PRO
FORMA basis, to, such Asset Sale, and (4) the Board of Directors of the  Company
determines  in good  faith that the  Company or such  Subsidiary, as applicable,
receives fair market value for such Asset Sale.
 
    The Indenture provides that an acquisition of the Notes pursuant to an Asset
Sale Offer may be  deferred until the accumulated  Net Cash Proceeds from  Asset
Sales  not applied to the uses set forth  in clauses (1)(a) or (1)(b) above (the
"Excess Proceeds")  exceeds $5  million and  that each  Asset Sale  Offer  shall
remain  open for  20 Business Days  following its commencement  (the "Asset Sale
Offer Period"). Upon  expiration of  the Asset  Sale Offer  Period, the  Company
shall  apply the Asset  Sale Offer Amount,  plus an amount  equal to accrued and
unpaid interest, to the purchase of all  Notes properly tendered (on a PRO  RATA
basis  if the Asset Sale  Offer Amount is insufficient  to purchase all Notes so
tendered) at  the Asset  Sale  Offer Price  (together  with accrued  and  unpaid
interest). To the extent that the aggregate amount of Notes tendered pursuant to
an  Asset Sale Offer is  less than the Asset Sale  Offer Amount, the Company may
use any remaining Net Cash Proceeds for general corporate purposes as  otherwise
permitted  by the  Indenture and following  the consummation of  each Asset Sale
Offer in compliance therewith the Excess Proceeds amount shall be reset to zero.
For purposes  of  (2)  above,  total  consideration  received  means  the  total
consideration  received  for such  Asset  Sales, minus  the  amount of  (a) non-
subordinated debt secured by the assets that were the subject of the Asset  Sale
and  assumed by a transferee, which assumption permanently reduces the amount of
Indebtedness outstanding on the  Issue Date or  permitted pursuant to  paragraph
(c), (e) or (g) of the definition of "Permitted Indebtedness" (including that in
the  case of a revolver or similar arrangement that makes credit available, such
commitment  is  permanently  reduced  by   such  amount),  (b)  Purchase   Money
Indebtedness  secured solely by the assets sold  and assumed by a transferee and
(c) property that within 30  days of such Asset Sale  is converted into cash  or
Cash Equivalents and then applied in accordance with the terms of this covenant.
 
    Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions:
 
           (i)
           the  Company  and its  Subsidiaries may,  in  the ordinary  course of
           business, convey,  sell, transfer,  assign  or otherwise  dispose  of
    inventory  acquired and held  for resale in the  ordinary course of business
    and consistent with past practice;
 
          (ii)
           the Company and its Subsidiaries  may convey, sell, transfer,  assign
           or otherwise dispose of assets pursuant to and in accordance with the
    limitation on mergers, sales or consolidations provisions in the Indenture;
 
         (iii)
           the Company and its Subsidiaries may sell or dispose of damaged, worn
           out  or other obsolete (to the  Company or such Subsidiaries) real or
    personal property in  the ordinary  course of business  and consistent  with
    past practice so long as such property is no longer necessary for the proper
    conduct of the business of the Company or such Subsidiary, as applicable;
 
          (iv)
           the  Company  or  any  Subsidiary  may,  for  fair  market  value (as
           determined reasonably and in good  faith by the Board of  Directors),
    convey, sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose of assets to the Company
    or any of its Subsidiaries; and
 
           (v)
           cash  and  Cash  Equivalents  may  be exchanged  or  sold  for  or in
           consideration of cash or Cash Equivalents.
 
                                       62
<PAGE>
    All  Net Cash Proceeds  from an Event  of Loss shall  be invested or applied
otherwise as set forth  in clause 1(a)  or 1(b) of the  first paragraph of  this
covenant,  all within the period and as  otherwise provided above in clause 1(a)
or 1(b) of the first paragraph of this covenant.
 
    Any Asset Sale Offer shall be  made in compliance with all applicable  laws,
rules, and regulations, including, if applicable, Regulation 14E of the Exchange
Act  and  the  rules  and  regulations  promulgated  thereunder  and  all  other
applicable federal and state securities laws.
 
    LIMITATION ON TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES
 
    The Indenture provides that neither the Company nor any of its  Subsidiaries
will  be permitted on or after the  Issue Date to, directly or indirectly, enter
into or suffer to exist any contract, agreement, arrangement or transaction with
any Affiliate (an "Affiliate Transaction"),  or any series of related  Affiliate
Transactions   (other  than  Exempted  Affiliate  Transactions),  unless  it  is
determined  that  the  terms  of   such  Affiliate  Transaction  (or   Affiliate
Transactions)  are fair and reasonable to the  Company, and no less favorable to
the Company than could have been obtained in an arm's length transaction with  a
non-Affiliate.
 
    Without limiting the foregoing, in connection with any Affiliate Transaction
or  any series of related Affiliate  Transactions (other than Exempted Affiliate
Transactions) (i) involving value to either party in excess of $1.0 million, the
Company must  address  and  deliver  an Officers'  Certificate  to  the  Trustee
certifying  that  (x)  the terms  of  such Affiliate  Transaction  (or Affiliate
Transactions) are fair and reasonable to  the Company, and no less favorable  to
the  Company than could have been obtained in an arm's length transaction with a
non-Affiliate and (y) such Affiliate Transaction (or Affiliate Transactions) has
been approved by a majority  of the members of the  Board of Directors that  are
disinterested  in such transaction  and (ii) involving value  to either party in
excess of $5.0 million, the Company must, prior to the consummation thereof,  in
addition  to  the Officers'  Certificate delivered  to  the Trustee  pursuant to
clause (i)  of this  paragraph, obtain  a written  favorable opinion  as to  the
fairness  of such transaction to the Company from a financial point of view from
an independent investment banking firm or valuation firm of national  reputation
for  being knowledgeable with respect to such matters, PROVIDED that this clause
(ii) shall  not  apply  to  transactions  between the  Company  or  any  of  its
Subsidiaries  and any Affiliate thereof that is an investment or commercial bank
of national reputation  with capital and  surplus of at  least $500 million,  in
connection  with  the  rendering  by  such  Affiliate  to  the  Company  or such
Subsidiary of investment or commercial banking (including lending) services.
 
    LIMITATION ON MERGER, SALE OR CONSOLIDATION
 
    The Indenture provides that  the Company will  not, directly or  indirectly,
consolidate  with or merge with or into another Person or sell, lease, convey or
transfer all or  substantially all  of its  assets (computed  on a  consolidated
basis),  whether in a single transaction or a series of related transactions, to
another Person or group of affiliated  Persons, or adopt a plan of  liquidation,
unless (i) either (a) the Company is the continuing entity or (b) the resulting,
surviving  or transferee entity  or, in the  case of a  plan of liquidation, the
entity which receives  the greatest  value from such  plan of  liquidation is  a
corporation  organized under the laws of the United States, any state thereof or
the District of Columbia and expressly assumes by supplemental indenture all  of
the  obligations of the Company in connection  with the Notes and the Indenture;
(ii) no Default or Event of Default shall exist or would occur immediately after
giving effect on a PRO FORMA basis to such transaction; (iii) immediately  after
giving  effect to such  transaction on a  PRO FORMA basis,  the Consolidated Net
Worth of the consolidated surviving  or transferee entity or,  in the case of  a
plan of liquidation, the entity which receives the greatest value from such plan
of  liquidation is at least  equal to the Consolidated  Net Worth of the Company
immediately prior to such transaction;  (iv) immediately after giving effect  to
such  transaction on a PRO FORMA basis, the consolidated resulting, surviving or
transferee entity or, in  the case of  a plan of  liquidation, the entity  which
receives  the greatest  value from  such plan  of liquidation  would immediately
thereafter be  permitted to  incur  at least  $1.00 of  additional  Indebtedness
pursuant  to the Debt Incurrence Ratio set  forth in the covenant "Limitation on
Incurrence of Additional Indebtedness and  Disqualified Capital Stock"; and  (v)
the Company has delivered to the Trustee an Officers' Certificate and an opinion
of  counsel, each stating that such consolidation,  merger or transfer and, if a
supplemental indenture is required, such supplemental
 
                                       63
<PAGE>
indenture, complies with the Indenture and that all conditions precedent therein
relating to such transaction have been satisfied. The provisions of clause  (iv)
will  not prevent the merger  of the Company with  or into another Person solely
for the purpose of changing the jurisdiction of incorporation of the Company.
 
    Upon any consolidation or merger or any transfer of all or substantially all
of the  assets of  the  Company or  consummation of  a  plan of  liquidation  in
accordance  with  the  foregoing,  the  successor  corporation  formed  by  such
consolidation or into which the Company is  merged or to which such transfer  is
made  or, in the  case of a plan  of liquidation, the  entity which receives the
greatest  value  from  such  plan  of  liquidation  shall  succeed  to,  and  be
substituted  for, and may exercise  every right and power  of, the Company under
the Indenture with  the same effect  as if such  successor corporation had  been
named  therein as the Company, and,  except in the case of  a transfer of all or
substantially all of the assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries as a  result
primarily  of the lease to any party thereof, the Company shall be released from
the obligations under  the Notes and  the Indenture except  with respect to  any
obligations that arise from, or are related to, such transaction.
 
    For  purposes of the foregoing, the  transfer (by lease, assignment, sale or
otherwise) of all or substantially  all of the properties  and assets of one  or
more   Subsidiaries,  the  Company's  interest   in  which  constitutes  all  or
substantially all of the properties and  assets of the Company, shall be  deemed
to  be the transfer of all or substantially  all of the properties and assets of
the Company.
 
    LIMITATION ON LINES OF BUSINESS
 
    The Indenture provides that neither the Company nor any of its  Subsidiaries
or   Unrestricted  Subsidiaries  will  directly  or  indirectly  engage  to  any
substantial extent in  any line or  lines of business  activity other than  that
which,  in the reasonable good  faith judgment of the  Board of Directors of the
Company, is a Related Business.
 
    RESTRICTION ON SALE AND ISSUANCE OF SUBSIDIARY STOCK
 
    The Indenture provides that the Company  will not sell, and will not  permit
any of its Subsidiaries to issue or sell, any Equity Interests of any Subsidiary
of the Company to any Person other than the Company or a Wholly Owned Subsidiary
of  the  Company, except  for Equity  Interests with  no preferences  or special
rights or privileges and with no redemption or prepayment provisions.
 
    LIMITATION ON STATUS AS INVESTMENT COMPANY
 
    The Indenture prohibits the Company and its Subsidiaries from being required
to register  as  an  "investment  company"  (as that  term  is  defined  in  the
Investment  Company Act of 1940, as amended), or from otherwise becoming subject
to regulation under the Investment Company Act.
 
REPORTS
 
    The Indenture provides  that whether or  not the Company  is subject to  the
reporting  requirements of Section 13 or 15(d)  of the Exchange Act, the Company
shall deliver to the Trustee  and to each Holder within  15 days after it is  or
would  have been (if it were subject  to such reporting obligations) required to
file such  with  the  Commission,  annual  and  quarterly  financial  statements
substantially  equivalent to financial statements  that would have been included
in reports  filed  with the  Commission,  if the  Company  were subject  to  the
requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act, including, with respect
to  annual  information  only,  a  report  thereon  by  the  Company's certified
independent public accountants as such would be required in such reports to  the
Commission,  and,  in each  case, together  with  a management's  discussion and
analysis of financial  condition and  results of  operations which  would be  so
required  and, to the extent permitted by the Exchange Act or the Commission (if
it were subject  to such reporting  obligations), file with  the Commission  the
annual,  quarterly and other reports which it  is or would have been required to
file with the Commission.
 
EVENTS OF DEFAULT AND REMEDIES
 
    The Indenture defines an Event of Default as (i) the failure by the  Company
to pay any installment of interest on the Notes as and when the same becomes due
and  payable  and the  continuance of  any such  failure for  30 days,  (ii) the
failure by the Company to pay all or  any part of the principal, or premium,  if
any,  on the  Notes when and  as the same  becomes due and  payable at maturity,
redemption, by acceleration
 
                                       64
<PAGE>
or otherwise, including, without  limitation, payment of  the Change of  Control
Purchase Price or the Asset Sale Offer Price, or otherwise, (iii) the failure by
the  Company  or any  Subsidiary to  observe  or perform  any other  covenant or
agreement contained  in the  Notes  or the  Indenture  and, subject  to  certain
exceptions,  the  continuance of  such failure  for  a period  of 60  days after
written notice is given to the Company by the Trustee or to the Company and  the
Trustee  by the  Holders of at  least 25%  in aggregate principal  amount of the
Notes  outstanding,   (iv)  certain   events   of  bankruptcy,   insolvency   or
reorganization  in respect  of the  Company or  any of  its Subsidiaries,  (v) a
default in any issue of Indebtedness of  the Company or any of its  Subsidiaries
with an aggregate principal amount in excess of $5 million, which default (a) is
caused  by failure to pay principal of, or  premium, if any, or interest on such
Indebtedness prior to the expiration of the grace period provided therein on the
date of such  default, or (b)  results in  the acceleration of  payment of  such
Indebtedness  prior to its express maturity and (vi) final unsatisfied judgments
not covered by insurance aggregating  in excess of $5  million, at any one  time
rendered  against the Company or any of  its Subsidiaries and not stayed, bonded
or discharged within 60  days. The Indenture provides  that if a Default  occurs
and is continuing, the Trustee must, within 90 days after the occurrence of such
default,  give to the Holders notice of such default; PROVIDED, that the Trustee
may withhold from Holders of the Notes notice of any continuing Default or Event
of Default (except  a Default or  Event of  Default relating to  the payment  of
principal  or interest)  if it  determines that  withholding notice  is in their
interest.
 
    If an Event  of Default occurs  and is  continuing (other than  an Event  of
Default  specified  in  clause  (iv),  above, relating  to  the  Company  or any
Subsidiary), then in every such case, unless  the principal of all of the  Notes
shall  have already become due and payable, either the Trustee or the Holders of
25% in aggregate principal  amount of the Notes  then outstanding, by notice  in
writing   to  the  Company  (and  to  the  Trustee  if  given  by  Holders)  (an
"Acceleration Notice"), may declare all principal, premium, if any, and  accrued
and  unpaid interest thereon to  be due and payable  immediately. If an Event of
Default specified  in  clause  (iv),  above, relating  to  the  Company  or  any
Subsidiary   occurs,  all  principal  and   accrued  interest  thereon  will  be
immediately due and payable on all outstanding Notes without any declaration  or
other  act on the part of the Trustee  or the Holders. The Holders of a majority
in aggregate principal amount of Notes generally are authorized to rescind  such
acceleration  if all existing  Events of Default, other  than the non-payment of
the principal of, premium, if any, and  interest on the Notes which have  become
due solely as a result of such acceleration have been cured or waived.
 
    Prior  to the declaration of acceleration of  the maturity of the Notes, the
Holders of a majority  in aggregate principal  amount of the  Notes at the  time
outstanding may waive on behalf of all the Holders any default, except a default
in  the payment  of principal  of or  interest on  any Note  not yet  cured or a
default with respect to  any covenant or provision  which cannot be modified  or
amended  without the  consent of the  Holder of each  outstanding Note affected.
Subject to  the  provisions of  the  Indenture relating  to  the duties  of  the
Trustee,  the Trustee will be under no  obligation to exercise any of its rights
or powers under the Indenture at the  request, order or direction of any of  the
Holders,  unless such Holders have offered to the Trustee reasonable security or
indemnity. Subject to all  provisions of the Indenture  and applicable law,  the
Holders  of a majority  in aggregate principal  amount of the  Notes at the time
outstanding will  have  the  right to  direct  the  time, method  and  place  of
conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee, or exercising
any trust or power conferred on the Trustee.
 
LEGAL DEFEASANCE AND COVENANT DEFEASANCE
 
    The  Indenture provides that the Company may,  at its option and at any time
within one  year  of  the Stated  Maturity  of  the Notes,  elect  to  have  its
obligations   discharged  with   respect  to   the  outstanding   Notes  ("Legal
Defeasance"). Such Legal Defeasance  means that the Company  shall be deemed  to
have  paid  and  discharged  the entire  indebtedness  represented  by,  and the
Indenture shall cease  to be  of further effect  as to,  all outstanding  Notes,
except  as  to (i)  rights  of Holders  to receive  payments  in respect  of the
principal of, premium, if any, and interest on such Notes when such payments are
due from the trust  funds; (ii) the Company's  obligations with respect to  such
Notes  concerning  issuing temporary  Notes,  registration of  Notes, mutilated,
destroyed, lost or stolen Notes, and the maintenance of an office or agency  for
payment and money for security payments held in trust; (iii) the rights, powers,
trust,  duties, and immunities of the  Trustee, and the Company's obligations in
connection therewith; and
 
                                       65
<PAGE>
(iv) the Legal Defeasance provisions of the Indenture. In addition, the  Company
may,  at its option and at any time, elect to have its obligations released with
respect to  certain covenants  that are  described in  the Indenture  ("Covenant
Defeasance")  and thereafter any omission to  comply with such obligations shall
not constitute a Default or Event of  Default with respect to the Notes. In  the
event  Covenant Defeasance  occurs, certain  events (not  including non-payment,
bankruptcy, receivership, rehabilitation and insolvency events) described  under
"Events  of Default" will no longer constitute  an Event of Default with respect
to the Notes.
 
    In order to exercise either Legal Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance, (i) the
Company must irrevocably deposit with the Trustee, in trust, for the benefit  of
the  Holders  of  the  Notes, U.S.  legal  tender,  noncallable  U.S. government
securities or a combination thereof, in  such amounts as will be sufficient,  in
the  opinion of a nationally recognized  firm of independent public accountants,
to pay the  principal of, premium,  if any, and  interest on such  Notes on  the
stated  date for payment thereof or on  the redemption date of such principal or
installment of principal of, premium, if any, or interest on such Notes, and the
Holders of Notes must  have a valid, perfected,  exclusive security interest  in
such  trust; (ii) in  the case of  the Legal Defeasance,  the Company shall have
delivered to the Trustee an opinion  of counsel in the United States  reasonably
acceptable  to the Trustee confirming that (A) the Company has received from, or
there has been published by the Internal Revenue Service, a ruling or (B)  since
the  date of the  Indenture, there has  been a change  in the applicable federal
income tax  law, in  either case  to the  effect that,  and based  thereon  such
opinion  of  counsel shall  confirm that,  the  Holders of  such Notes  will not
recognize income, gain or loss  for federal income tax  purposes as a result  of
such  Legal Defeasance  and will be  subject to  federal income tax  on the same
amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if
such  Legal  Defeasance  had  not  occurred;  (iii)  in  the  case  of  Covenant
Defeasance,  the  Company shall  have  delivered to  the  Trustee an  opinion of
counsel in the United  States reasonably acceptable  to such Trustee  confirming
that  the Holders  of such  Notes will  not recognize  income, gain  or loss for
federal income tax purposes as a result of such Covenant Defeasance and will  be
subject to federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the
same  times as  would have  been the  case if  such Covenant  Defeasance had not
occurred; (iv)  no  Default or  Event  of Default  shall  have occurred  and  be
continuing  on the date  of such deposit  or, insofar as  Events of Default from
bankruptcy or insolvency events are concerned, at any time in the period  ending
on the 91st day after the date of deposit; (v) such Legal Defeasance or Covenant
Defeasance shall not result in a breach or violation of, or constitute a default
under  the Indenture or any other material  agreement or instrument to which the
Company or any of its Subsidiaries is a party or by which the Company or any  of
its  Subsidiaries is bound; (vi) the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee
an Officers' Certificate stating  that the deposit was  not made by the  Company
with the intent of preferring the Holders of such Notes over any other creditors
of  the  Company  or  with  the  intent  of  defeating,  hindering,  delaying or
defrauding any other creditors of the  Company or others; and (vii) the  Company
shall  have delivered to the Trustee an  Officers' Certificate and an opinion of
counsel, each stating that the conditions precedent provided for in, in the case
of the Officers' Certificate, (i) through (vi)  and, in the case of the  opinion
of  counsel, clauses  (i) (with  respect to the  validity and  perfection of the
security interest), (ii),  (iii) and (v)  of this paragraph  have been  complied
with.
 
    If  the  funds deposited  with  the Trustee  to  effect Legal  Defeasance or
Covenant Defeasance are insufficient to pay  the principal of, premium, if  any,
and  interest on the Notes  when due, then the  obligations of the Company under
the Indenture will  be revived and  no such  defeasance will be  deemed to  have
occurred.
 
AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS
 
    The  Indenture contains provisions permitting the Company and the Trustee to
enter into a  supplemental indenture  for certain limited  purposes without  the
consent  of the  Holders. With  the consent of  the Holders  of not  less than a
majority in aggregate principal amount of the Notes at the time outstanding, the
Company and the Trustee  are permitted to amend  or supplement the Indenture  or
any  supplemental indenture or modify the  rights of the Holders; PROVIDED, that
no such modification may, without the  consent of each Holder affected  thereby:
(i)  change the  Stated Maturity  of any  Note, or  reduce the  principal amount
thereof or the rate (or extend the time for payment) of interest thereon or  any
premium
 
                                       66
<PAGE>
payable  upon the redemption thereof,  or change the place  of payment where, or
the coin or currency in which, any  Note or any premium or the interest  thereon
is  payable, or impair  the right to  institute suit for  the enforcement of any
such payment  on or  after  the Stated  Maturity thereof  (or,  in the  case  of
redemption,  on or after the  Redemption Date), or reduce  the Change of Control
Purchase Price or the Asset Sale Offer Price or alter the provisions  (including
the defined terms used therein) regarding the right of the Company to redeem the
Notes  or  the provisions  (including  the defined  terms  used therein)  of the
"Repurchase of Notes  at the  Option of  the Holder  Upon a  Change of  Control"
covenant  in a manner adverse  to the Holders, or  (ii) reduce the percentage in
principal amount  of the  outstanding Notes,  the consent  of whose  Holders  is
required  for any such amendment, supplemental  indenture or waiver provided for
in the  Indenture, or  (iii) modify  any  of the  waiver provisions,  except  to
increase  any required percentage or to provide that certain other provisions of
the Indenture cannot be modified or waived without the consent of the Holder  of
each  outstanding  Note affected  thereby,  or (iv)  cause  the Notes  to become
subordinate in right of payment to any other Indebtedness.
 
NO PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PARTNERS, STOCKHOLDERS, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS
 
    The Indenture provides  that no  direct or  indirect stockholder,  employee,
officer  or director,  as such, past,  present or  future of the  Company or any
successor entity shall have any personal liability in respect of the obligations
of the Company under the Indenture or the  Notes by reason of his or its  status
as such stockholder, employee, officer or director.
 
CERTAIN DEFINITIONS
 
    "ACQUIRED  INDEBTEDNESS" means Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital Stock of
any Person existing at the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary of the Company,
including by designation, or is merged or consolidated into or with or otherwise
acquired by the Company or one of its Subsidiaries.
 
    "ACQUISITION" means  the purchase  or  other acquisition  of any  Person  or
substantially  all the  assets of  any Person  by any  other Person,  whether by
purchase, merger,  consolidation, or  other  transfer, and  whether or  not  for
consideration.
 
    "AFFILIATE"   means  any  Person  directly   or  indirectly  controlling  or
controlled by or under direct or  indirect common control with the Company.  For
purposes  of this definition, the  term "control" means the  power to direct the
management  and  policies  of  a  Person,  directly  or  through  one  or   more
intermediaries, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract,
or  otherwise, PROVIDED that, with  respect to ownership of  the Company and its
Subsidiaries, a  beneficial owner  of 10%  or  more of  the total  voting  power
normally entitled to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees, as
applicable, shall for such purposes be deemed to constitute control.
 
    "ANCILLARY  DOCUMENTS"  means the  amendment  to the  Company's  Articles of
Incorporation  creating  the  Junior  Preferred  Stock,  the  Restricted   Stock
Agreements,  the  Shareholders  Agreement, the  Shareholder  Registration Rights
Agreement, the Employment Agreements, the Management Stock Option Agreements and
the Plan.
 
    "AVERAGE LIFE" means, as of the  date of determination, with respect to  any
security or instrument, the quotient obtained by dividing (i) the sum of (a) the
product  of the number  of years from the  date of determination  to the date or
dates of each  successive scheduled  principal (or redemption)  payment of  such
security  or instrument and (b) the amount of each such respective principal (or
redemption) payment  by (ii)  the  sum of  all  such principal  (or  redemption)
payments.
 
    "BENEFICIAL OWNER" or "BENEFICIAL OWNER" has the meaning attributed to it in
Rules  13d-3 and 13d-5 under the Exchange Act  (as in effect on the Issue Date),
whether or  not applicable,  except that  a  "Person" shall  be deemed  to  have
"beneficial  ownership" of  all shares  that any  such Person  has the  right to
acquire, whether such right is exercisable immediately or only after the passage
of time.
 
    "BORROWING BASE"  means  at  any  time  the  sum  of  (i)  75%  of  Eligible
Receivables, plus (ii) 65% of Eligible Inventory.
 
                                       67
<PAGE>
    "BUSINESS  DAY" means each  Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,  Thursday and Friday
which is not  a day  on which  banking institutions in  New York,  New York  are
authorized or obligated by law or executive order to close.
 
    "CAPITAL  STOCK" means, with respect to any corporation, any and all shares,
interests,  rights  to   purchase  (other  than   convertible  or   exchangeable
Indebtedness),  warrants,  options, participations  or  other equivalents  of or
interests (however designated) in stock issued by that corporation.
 
    "CAPITALIZED LEASE  OBLIGATION" means  rental or  other payment  obligations
under  a lease of real or personal  property that are required to be capitalized
for financial reporting  purposes in  accordance with  GAAP, and  the amount  of
Indebtedness  represented by such obligations shall be the capitalized amount of
such obligations, as determined in accordance with GAAP.
 
    "CASH  EQUIVALENT"  means  (i)  securities  issued  or  directly  and  fully
guaranteed  or  insured  by  the  United States  of  America  or  any  agency or
instrumentality thereof (PROVIDED that the full  faith and credit of the  United
States  of  America  is pledged  in  support  thereof), (ii)  time  deposits and
certificates of deposit and commercial paper issued by the parent corporation of
any domestic commercial bank of  recognized standing having capital and  surplus
in  excess of $500 million and commercial  paper issued by others rated at least
A-2 or the equivalent thereof by Standard  & Poor's Corporation or at least  P-2
or  the equivalent thereof by  Moody's Investors Service, Inc.  and in each case
maturing within one year after the date of acquisition and (iii) investments  in
money  market accounts substantially all of  whose assets comprise securities of
the types described in clauses (i) and (ii) above.
 
    "CONSOLIDATED  COVERAGE  RATIO"  of  any  Person  as  of  the  date  of  the
transaction giving rise to the need to calculate the Consolidated Coverage Ratio
(the  "Transaction Date")  means the  ratio, on  a PRO  FORMA basis,  of (a) the
aggregate  amount  of  Consolidated  EBITDA  of  such  Person  attributable   to
continuing  operations  and  businesses (exclusive  of  amounts  attributable to
operations and  businesses  permanently discontinued  or  disposed of)  for  the
Reference  Period to (b) the aggregate Consolidated Fixed Charges of such Person
(exclusive of  amounts attributable  to  operations and  businesses  permanently
discontinued  or disposed of, but only to the extent that the obligations giving
rise  to  such  Consolidated  Fixed  Charges  would  no  longer  be  obligations
contributing  to  such Person's  Consolidated  Fixed Charges  subsequent  to the
Transaction Date) during  the Reference  Period; PROVIDED that  for purposes  of
this  definition, (i) Acquisitions which occurred during the Reference Period or
subsequent to the Reference Period and on or prior to the Transaction Date shall
be assumed to  have occurred  on the  first day  of the  Reference Period,  (ii)
transactions  giving rise  to the  need to  calculate the  Consolidated Coverage
Ratio shall  be assumed  to have  occurred on  the first  day of  the  Reference
Period, (iii) the incurrence of any Indebtedness or issuance of any Disqualified
Capital  Stock during the Reference Period or subsequent to the Reference Period
and on or prior  to the Transaction  Date (and the  application of the  proceeds
therefrom to the extent used to refinance or retire other Indebtedness) shall be
assumed to have occurred on the first day of such Reference Period, and (iv) the
Consolidated  Fixed  Charges  of such  Person  attributable to  interest  on any
Indebtedness or dividends on any  Disqualified Capital Stock bearing a  floating
interest  (or dividend) rate  shall be computed on  a PRO FORMA  basis as if the
average rate  in  effect from  the  beginning of  the  Reference Period  to  the
Transaction Date had been the applicable rate for the entire period, unless such
Person  or any  of its Subsidiaries  is a party  to an Interest  Swap or Hedging
Obligation (which shall  remain in  effect for the  12-month period  immediately
following  the Transaction Date)  that either (i)  has the effect  of fixing the
interest rate on the date of computation, in which case such fixed rate (whether
higher or lower) shall be  used or (ii) has the  effect of capping the  interest
rate on the date of computation, in which case such capped rate (if lower) shall
be used.
 
    "CONSOLIDATED EBITDA" means, with respect to any Person, for any period, the
Consolidated  Net Income of such Person for  such period adjusted to add thereto
(to the  extent  deducted from  net  revenues in  determining  Consolidated  Net
Income),  without duplication, the  sum of (i)  Consolidated Income Tax Expense,
(ii)  Consolidated  Depreciation   and  Amortization   Expense,  PROVIDED   that
Consolidated Depreciation and Amortization Expense of a Subsidiary that is not a
Wholly Owned Subsidiary shall only proportionately be added to the extent of the
proportionate equity interest of the Company in
 
                                       68
<PAGE>
such  Subsidiary,  (iii) Consolidated  Fixed  Charges, (iv)  all  other non-cash
charges, less the amount of all cash payments made by such Person or any of  its
Subsidiaries  during such period to the  extent such payments relate to non-cash
charges that were added back in determining Consolidated EBITDA for such  period
or  any prior period, and  (v) for periods including and  prior to June 5, 1996,
salary paid to Raymond  Scherr as Chairman  of the Company  (to the extent  such
salary reduced Consolidated Net Income).
 
    "CONSOLIDATED  FIXED  CHARGES"  of any  Person  means, for  any  period, the
aggregate amount (without duplication and determined in each case in  accordance
with  GAAP) of (a) interest expensed or capitalized, paid, accrued, or scheduled
to be paid  or accrued (including,  in accordance with  the following  sentence,
interest  attributable to Capitalized Lease Obligations)  of such Person and its
Consolidated Subsidiaries  during  such  period, including  (i)  original  issue
discount  and non-cash interest  payments or accruals  on any Indebtedness, (ii)
the interest  portion  of  all  deferred  payment  obligations,  and  (iii)  all
commissions,  discounts and other fees and charges owed with respect to bankers'
acceptances and letters of credit financings and currency and Interest Swap  and
Hedging Obligations, in each case to the extent attributable to such period, and
(b)  the amount of cash dividends paid or scheduled to be paid by such Person or
any of its Consolidated Subsidiaries in  respect of Preferred Stock (other  than
by  Subsidiaries of  such Person  to such Person  or such  Person's Wholly Owned
Subsidiaries). For purposes of  this definition, (x)  interest on a  Capitalized
Lease  Obligation  shall be  deemed  to accrue  at  an interest  rate reasonably
determined by  the  Company  to  be  the  rate  of  interest  implicit  in  such
Capitalized  Lease Obligation in  accordance with GAAP  and (y) interest expense
attributable to any Indebtedness represented by the guaranty by such Person or a
Subsidiary of such Person of an obligation of another Person shall be deemed  to
be the interest expense attributable to the Indebtedness guaranteed.
 
    "CONSOLIDATED  NET INCOME" means, with respect to any Person for any period,
the net  income (or  loss)  of such  Person  and its  Consolidated  Subsidiaries
(determined  on a  consolidated basis  in accordance  with GAAP),  plus, without
duplication and only  to the  extent not already  included in  net income,  cash
dividends  received by the Company from Unrestricted Subsidiaries (not in excess
of the Company's or such Subsidiary's proportionate share of the equity interest
therein) for such period,  adjusted to exclude (only  to the extent included  in
computing  such net income (or loss) and without duplication): (a) all gains and
losses which are either extraordinary (as determined in accordance with GAAP) or
are either unusual or nonrecurring (including any gain or loss from the sale  or
other  disposition of assets outside the ordinary course of business or from the
issuance or sale of any Capital Stock), (b) the net income, if positive, of  any
Person, other than a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, in which such Person or any of its
Consolidated Subsidiaries has an interest, except to the extent of the amount of
any  dividends or distributions actually paid in cash to such Person or a Wholly
Owned Subsidiary of  such Person  during such  period, but  in any  case not  in
excess  of such  Person's PRO RATA  share of  such Person's net  income for such
period, (c)  the net  income or  loss of  any Person  acquired in  a pooling  of
interests  transaction for any period prior to the date of such acquisition, (d)
the net income, if positive, of  any of such Person's Consolidated  Subsidiaries
to  the  extent  that  the  declaration  or  payment  of  dividends  or  similar
distributions is not  at the time  permitted by  operation of the  terms of  its
charter  or bylaws or any other  agreement, instrument, judgment, decree, order,
statute,  rule  or  governmental  regulation  applicable  to  such  Consolidated
Subsidiary,  and (e)  the effect of  non-cash charges resulting  solely from the
issuance and/or  lapse of  substantial risk  of forfeiture  of Junior  Preferred
Stock  issued to members of  the Company's management in  connection with and at
the time of the Recapitalization.
 
    "CONSOLIDATED NET  WORTH" of  any Person  at any  date means  the  aggregate
consolidated  stockholders'  equity  of  such  Person  (plus  amounts  of equity
attributable  to  preferred   stock  of  such   Person)  and  its   Consolidated
Subsidiaries, as would be shown on the consolidated balance sheet of such Person
prepared in accordance with GAAP, adjusted to exclude (to the extent included in
calculating  such  equity),  (a) the  amount  of any  such  stockholders' equity
attributable to Disqualified Capital Stock or treasury stock of such Person  and
its  Consolidated Subsidiaries, and  (b) amounts included  in such stockholders'
equity resulting from upward revaluations and other write-ups in the book  value
of  assets of such Person or a Consolidated Subsidiary of such Person subsequent
to the Issue Date.
 
                                       69
<PAGE>
    "CONSOLIDATED  SUBSIDIARY" means,  for any  Person, each  Subsidiary of such
Person (whether now  existing or  hereafter created or  acquired) the  financial
statements  of which are consolidated for financial statement reporting purposes
with the financial statements of such Person in accordance with GAAP.
 
    "CREDIT AGREEMENT" means  the Credit Agreement,  dated as of  June 5,  1996,
between   the  Company  and   Wells  Fargo  Bank,   N.A.,  and  all  refundings,
refinancings, amendments, modifications, replacements (solely with institutional
lenders of national reputation) and supplements thereto.
 
    "DISQUALIFIED CAPITAL STOCK"  means (a), except  as set forth  in (b),  with
respect  to any Person, any Equity Interest of such Person that, by its terms or
by the  terms of  any security  into  which it  is convertible,  exercisable  or
exchangeable, is, or upon the happening of an event or the passage of time would
be,  required to  be redeemed  or repurchased  (including at  the option  of the
Holder thereof) by such Person or any of its Subsidiaries, in whole or in  part,
on  or prior to  the Stated Maturity  of the Notes  and (b) with  respect to any
Subsidiary of  such Person  (including with  respect to  any Subsidiary  of  the
Company),  any Equity Interest other than  any common equity with no preference,
privileges, or redemption or repayment provisions.
 
    "ELIGIBLE INVENTORY" means  the book  value of  all inventory  owned by  the
Company  and its Subsidiaries  as would be reportable  on a consolidated balance
sheet prepared in accordance with GAAP .
 
    "ELIGIBLE RECEIVABLES"  means the  face amount  of all  accounts  receivable
owned  by  the  Company  and  its  Subsidiaries  as  would  be  reportable  on a
consolidated balance sheet in compliance with GAAP.
 
    "EQUITY INTEREST"  of  any Person  means  any shares,  interests,  warrants,
options,  participations  or  other  equivalents  (however  designated)  in such
Person's equity, and shall in any event include any Capital Stock issued by,  or
partnership interests in, such Person.
 
    "EVENT  OF LOSS" means, with respect to any property or asset, any (i) loss,
destruction or  damage of  such  property or  asset  or (ii)  any  condemnation,
seizure  or taking, by exercise of the  power of eminent domain or otherwise, of
such property  or asset,  or confiscation  or  requisition of  the use  of  such
property or asset.
 
    "EXEMPTED AFFILIATE TRANSACTION" means (i) compensation paid to officers and
directors of the Company pursuant to the Ancillary Documents as in effect on the
date  the shares of Senior Preferred Stock  were first issued, (ii) any loans or
advances by the  Company to  employees of  the Company  or a  subsidiary of  the
Company  in the ordinary course of business  and in furtherance of the Company's
business, in  an aggregate  amount not  to exceed  $1 million  at any  one  time
outstanding,  (iii)  transactions  expressly  contemplated  by  the  Transaction
Documents (including, without  limitation, the  repurchase of  shares of  Junior
Preferred  Stock and  Common Stock  held by  employees), (iv)  transactions with
employees of the Company (including but not limited to compensation arrangements
or loans and  advances not  referred to  in clause (i)  or (ii)  that have  been
approved  by the Board  of Directors, including a  majority of the disinterested
directors, as being in the best  interests of the Company) and (v)  transactions
between or among the Company and one or more of its Wholly Owned Subsidiares and
between or among the Company's Wholly Owned Subsidiaries.
 
    "EXISTING INDEBTEDNESS" means Indebtedness of the Company outstanding on the
Issue Date after giving effect to the redemption of the Bridge Facility.
 
    "GAAP"  means  United States  generally  accepted accounting  principles set
forth in the opinions and pronouncements  of the Accounting Principles Board  of
the  American  Institute  of  Certified Public  Accountants  and  statements and
pronouncements of  the Financial  Accounting Standards  Board or  in such  other
statements  by such  other entity  as approved by  a significant  segment of the
accounting profession as in effect on the Issue Date.
 
    "INDEBTEDNESS" of any Person means, without duplication, (a) all liabilities
and obligations, contingent or otherwise, of such any Person, (i) in respect  of
borrowed money (whether or not the recourse of the lender is to the whole of the
assets  of such Person or  only to a portion  thereof), (ii) evidenced by bonds,
notes,  debentures  or  similar  instruments,  (iii)  representing  the  balance
deferred and unpaid of
 
                                       70
<PAGE>
the  purchase price  of any  property or  services, except  (other than accounts
payable or other  obligations to  trade creditors  (not the  result of  borrowed
money)  which have remained unpaid for greater  than 90 days past their original
due date)  those incurred  in the  ordinary course  of its  business that  would
constitute  ordinarily a trade  payable (including trade  payables due within 12
months representing  special terms  offered by  vendors in  connection with  new
store  openings, "special  buy" situations  or promotional  situations) to trade
creditors (which  in no  event provide  for payment  more than  12 months  after
delivery  of  goods  or  provision  of  services),  (iv)  evidenced  by bankers'
acceptances or similar instruments issued or accepted by banks, (v) relating  to
any  Capitalized Lease Obligation, or (vi) evidenced  by a letter of credit or a
reimbursement obligation of such  Person with respect to  any letter of  credit;
(b)  all  net  obligations  of  such  Person  under  Interest  Swap  and Hedging
Obligations; (c) all liabilities and obligations of others of the kind described
in the preceding clause (a)  or (b) that such Person  has guaranteed or that  is
otherwise  its legal liability, or  which are secured by  any assets or property
(limited, in such case, to the lesser of the amount of such Indebtedness or  the
fair  market  value  of  such  assets  or  property)  of  such  Person,  and all
obligations to purchase, redeem or acquire any Equity Interests; (d) any and all
deferrals, renewals, extensions, refinancing  and refundings (whether direct  or
indirect)  of, or amendments, modifications or  supplements to, any liability of
the kind described  in any of  the preceding clauses  (a), (b) or  (c), or  this
clause  (d),  whether or  not between  or among  the same  parties; and  (e) all
Disqualified Capital  Stock of  such  Person (measured  at  the greater  of  its
voluntary  or involuntary maximum fixed repurchase price plus accrued and unpaid
dividends). For purposes  hereof, the  "maximum fixed repurchase  price" of  any
Disqualified Capital Stock which does not have a fixed repurchase price shall be
calculated in accordance with the terms of such Disqualified Capital Stock as if
such Disqualified Capital Stock were purchased on any date on which Indebtedness
shall  be required to be determined pursuant to the Indenture, and if such price
is based  upon, or  measured by,  the  fair market  value of  such  Disqualified
Capital  Stock, such  fair market value  to be  determined in good  faith by the
board of directors of the issuer (or managing general partner of the issuer)  of
such Disqualified Capital Stock.
 
    "INITIAL  PUBLIC EQUITY OFFERING" means  an initial underwritten offering of
Common Stock  of the  Company pursuant  to an  effective registration  statement
under  the Securities  Act as  a consequence  of which  the Common  Stock of the
Company is listed on  a national securities exchange  or quoted on the  national
market system of NASDAQ.
 
    "INTEREST  SWAP AND HEDGING  OBLIGATION" means any  obligation of any Person
pursuant to  any interest  rate  swap agreement,  interest rate  cap  agreement,
interest  rate  collar  agreement, interest  rate  exchange  agreement, currency
exchange agreement or  any other  agreement or arrangement  designed to  protect
against  fluctuations in interest  rates or currency  values, including, without
limitation, any  arrangement whereby,  directly or  indirectly, such  Person  is
entitled  to receive from time to  time periodic payments calculated by applying
either a fixed  or floating  rate of  interest on  a stated  notional amount  in
exchange  for periodic  payments made  by such  Person calculated  by applying a
fixed or floating rate of interest on the same notional amount.
 
    "INVESTMENT" by any Person in  any other Person means (without  duplication)
(a) the acquisition (whether by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) by
such  Person (whether for cash, property,  services, securities or otherwise) of
capital  stock,  bonds,  notes,  debentures,  partnership  or  other   ownership
interests  or other securities, including any options or warrants, of such other
Person or any agreement  to make any  such acquisition; (b)  the making by  such
Person  of any deposit with,  or advance, loan or  other extension of credit to,
such other  Person  (including the  purchase  of property  from  another  Person
subject  to an  understanding or agreement,  contingent or  otherwise, to resell
such property to such other Person) or any commitment to make any such  advance,
loan  or extension (but excluding accounts receivable or deposits arising in the
ordinary course of business); (c) other  than guarantees of Indebtedness of  the
Company  to the  extent permitted by  the covenant "Limitation  on Incurrence of
Additional Indebtedness and  Disqualified Capital Stock,"  the entering into  by
such  Person  of  any  guarantee  of,  or  other  credit  support  or contingent
obligation with  respect  to, Indebtedness  or  other liability  of  such  other
Person;  (d)  the making  of any  capital  contribution by  such Person  to such
 
                                       71
<PAGE>
other Person; and (e) the designation by  the Board of Directors of the  Company
of  any person to be an Unrestricted  Subsidiary. The Company shall be deemed to
make an Investment in an  amount equal to the  fair market value (as  reasonably
determined  in good faith  by the Board of  Directors) of the  net assets of any
Subsidiary (or,  if  neither  the  Company  nor  any  of  its  Subsidiaries  has
theretofore  made an Investment  in such Subsidiary,  in an amount  equal to the
Investments being  made), at  the time  that such  subsidiary is  designated  an
Unrestricted  Subsidiary,  and  any  property  transferred  to  an  Unrestricted
Subsidiary from the Company or a Subsidiary shall be deemed an Investment valued
at its fair market value (as reasonably determined in good faith by the Board of
Directors) at the time of such transfer.
 
    "ISSUE DATE"  means  the date  of  first issuance  of  the Notes  under  the
Indenture.
 
    "LIEN"  means any mortgage,  charge, pledge, lien  (statutory or otherwise),
privilege, security interest,  hypothecation or other  encumbrance upon or  with
respect to any property of any kind, real or personal, movable or immovable, now
owned or hereafter acquired (excluding any option, warrant, right to purchase or
other similar right with respect to Qualified Capital Stock).
 
    "NET  CASH PROCEEDS" means the aggregate  amount of cash or Cash Equivalents
received by the Company in the case of a sale of Qualified Capital Stock and  by
the  Company and its Subsidiaries in respect of  an Asset Sale plus, in the case
of an  issuance  of Qualified  Capital  Stock  upon any  exercise,  exchange  or
conversion of securities (including options, warrants, rights and convertible or
exchangeable  debt) of  the Company that  were issued  for cash on  or after the
Issue Date,  the amount  of cash  originally received  by the  Company upon  the
issuance of such securities (including options, warrants, rights and convertible
or  exchangeable  debt) less,  in  each case,  the  sum of  all  payments, fees,
commissions and (in the case of Asset Sales, reasonable and customary)  expenses
(including,  without  limitation, the  fees and  expenses  of legal  counsel and
investment banking fees  and expenses)  incurred in connection  with such  Asset
Sale or sale of Qualified Capital Stock, and, in the case of an Asset Sale only,
less  (i) the amount (estimated reasonably and  in good faith by the Company) of
income, franchise, sales and other applicable  taxes required to be paid by  the
Company  or any of its Subsidiaries in  connection with such Asset Sale and (ii)
appropriate amounts provided  by the  seller as  a reserve,  in accordance  with
GAAP,  against  (a)  any  liabilities associated  with  the  property  or assets
disposed  of  in  such   Asset  Sale,  and  (b)   the  after-tax  cost  of   any
indemnification  payments (fixed  and contingent)  attributable to  the seller's
indemnities  to  the  purchaser  undertaken  by  the  Company  or  any  of   its
Subsidiaries  in connection  with such Asset  Sale (but  excluding any payments,
which by the  terms of  the indemnities  will not be  made prior  to the  Stated
Maturity of the Notes).
 
    "PERMITTED INDEBTEDNESS" means any of the following:
 
       (a) Indebtedness  incurred by the Company to any Wholly Owned Subsidiary,
           and any Wholly Owned Subsidiary  may incur Indebtedness to any  other
    Wholly  Owned Subsidiary or  to the Company;  PROVIDED that, in  the case of
    Indebtedness of  the  Company,  such  obligations  shall  be  unsecured  and
    subordinated  in all respects  to the Company's  obligations pursuant to the
    Notes and the date of any event that causes such Subsidiary no longer to  be
    a Wholly Owned Subsidiary shall be an Incurrence Date;
 
       (b) Indebtedness  incurred  by the  Company  evidenced by  the  Notes and
           represented by the Indenture up  to the amounts specified therein  as
    of the date thereof;
 
       (c) Purchase  Money  Indebtedness (including  any Indebtedness  issued to
           refinance, replace  or  refund  such Indebtedness  so  long  as  such
    Indebtedness  is secured only by the assets that secured the Indebtedness so
    refinanced, replaced or refunded  on a non-recourse  basis) incurred by  the
    Company  and its Subsidiaries on or after  the Issue Date, PROVIDED that (i)
    the aggregate amount  of such Indebtedness  incurred on or  after the  Issue
    Date  and outstanding at any time  pursuant to this paragraph (c) (including
    Indebtedness issued so to refinance, replace or refund) shall not exceed  $5
    million,  and (ii) in  each case, such Indebtedness  when incurred shall not
    constitute less  than 50%  nor more  than 100%  of the  cost (determined  in
    accordance with GAAP) to the Company of the property so purchased or leased;
 
                                       72
<PAGE>
       (d) Refinancing  Indebtedness incurred by the Company with respect to any
           Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital  Stock, as applicable,  incurred
    as  permitted by the  Debt Incurrence Ratio contained  in the "Limitation on
    Incurrence  of  Additional  Indebtedness  and  Disqualified  Capital  Stock"
    covenant  or as described in  clause (b) of this  definition or described in
    this clause  (d)  or  Existing  Indebtedness (after  giving  effect  to  the
    repayment of the Bridge Facility);
 
       (e) Indebtedness incurred pursuant to the Credit Agreement (including any
           Indebtedness   issued   to   refinance,   refund   or   replace  such
    Indebtedness); provided that,  after giving effect  to any such  incurrence,
    the  aggregate principal amount  of such Indebtedness  then outstanding does
    not exceed the greater of (i) $25 million and (ii) the Borrowing Base, which
    such amount (in the case of (i) or  (ii)) shall be reduced by the amount  of
    any  Indebtedness outstanding pursuant to  the Credit Agreement retired with
    Net Cash Proceeds from any Asset Sale or assumed by a transferee in an Asset
    Sale;
 
       (f) Disqualified Capital Stock issued as in-kind dividends on the  Senior
           Preferred  Stock  or  accretion  to  the  liquidation  value  thereof
    pursuant to the instrument governing the terms of such capital stock as such
    instrument was in effect on the Issue Date; and
 
       (g) unsecured Indebtedness  incurred  by  the  Company  (in  addition  to
           Indebtedness  permitted by any other clause  of this paragraph) in an
    aggregate amount outstanding at any time (including any Indebtedness  issued
    to refinance, replace, or refund such Indebtedness) of up to $10 million.
 
    "PERMITTED  INVESTMENT" means Investments in (a)  any of the Notes; (b) Cash
Equivalents; and (c)  intercompany indebtedness  to the  extent permitted  under
clause (a) of the definition of "Permitted Indebtedness."
 
    "PERMITTED  LIEN"  means (a)  Liens existing  on the  Issue Date;  (b) Liens
imposed by governmental authorities for taxes, assessments or other charges  not
yet  subject  to penalty  or  which are  being contested  in  good faith  and by
appropriate  proceedings,  if  adequate   reserves  with  respect  thereto   are
maintained  on the books of  the Company in accordance  with GAAP; (c) statutory
liens of carriers, warehousemen, mechanics, materialmen, landlords, repairmen or
other like Liens arising by operation of law in the ordinary course of business,
PROVIDED that (i)  the underlying obligations  are not overdue  for a period  of
more  than 30 days, or (ii) such Liens  are being contested in good faith and by
appropriate  proceedings  and  adequate   reserves  with  respect  thereto   are
maintained  on  the books  of the  Company  in accordance  with GAAP;  (d) Liens
securing the performance of bids,  trade contracts (other than borrowed  money),
leases,  statutory  obligations,  surety and  appeal  bonds,  performance bonds,
deposits in connection with the purchase of real property, and other obligations
of a like  nature incurred in  the ordinary course  of business; (e)  easements,
rights-of-way,  zoning, similar  restrictions and other  similar encumbrances or
title defects which, singly or in the  aggregate, do not in any case  materially
detract from the value of the property subject thereto (as such property is used
by  the  Company or  any of  its  Subsidiaries) or  interfere with  the ordinary
conduct of the business  of the Company  or any of  its Subsidiaries; (f)  Liens
arising  by operation of law  in connection with judgments,  only to the extent,
for an amount and for a period not resulting in an Event of Default with respect
thereto; (g) pledges  or deposits  made in the  ordinary course  of business  in
connection with workers' compensation, unemployment insurance and other types of
social  security legislation; (h)  Liens securing the  Notes; (i) Liens securing
Indebtedness of a Person existing at  the time such Person becomes a  Subsidiary
or  is  merged  with or  into  the Company  or  a Subsidiary  or  Liens securing
Indebtedness incurred  in connection  with an  Acquisition, PROVIDED  that  such
Liens  were  in existence  prior  to the  date  of such  acquisition,  merger or
consolidation, were not incurred in anticipation  thereof, and do not extend  to
any  property  or  assets  other  than  property  or  assets  acquired  in  such
transaction; (j) Liens arising from Purchase Money Indebtedness permitted to  be
incurred  under  clause  (c)  of  the  definition  of  "Permitted Indebtedness,"
PROVIDED such  Liens  relate only  to  the property  which  is subject  to  such
Purchase Money Indebtedness and PROVIDED, FURTHER, that cross-collateralization,
creation of "collateral pools" or similar arrangements involving solely Purchase
Money  Indebtedness  and  the assets  serving  as collateral  therefor  shall be
Permitted Liens;  (k)  leases or  subleases  granted  to other  Persons  in  the
ordinary course of business not
 
                                       73
<PAGE>
materially interfering with the conduct of the business of the Company or any of
its  Subsidiaries or materially detracting from the value of the relative assets
of the Company or any Subsidiary;  (l) Liens arising from precautionary  Uniform
Commercial  Code financing statement filings  regarding operating leases entered
into by  the Company  or  any of  its Subsidiaries  in  the ordinary  course  of
business;  (m) Liens securing Refinancing Indebtedness incurred to refinance any
Indebtedness that was previously so secured in  a manner no more adverse to  the
Holders  of  the Notes  than the  terms  of the  Liens securing  such refinanced
Indebtedness (provided that  any Refinancing  Indebtedness with  respect to  the
Credit  Agreement need not have any limitation on when such Liens are granted or
perfected), PROVIDED that the Indebtedness  secured is not increased, except  to
finance  accrued interest and the expenses of  such refinancing, and the lien is
not extended to any  additional assets or  property; (n) Liens  in favor of  the
Company  only;  and  (o) Liens  imposed  pursuant  to the  terms  of  the Credit
Agreement.
 
    "PURCHASE MONEY INDEBTEDNESS" means any  Indebtedness of such Person to  any
seller or other Person (i) incurred solely to finance the acquisition (including
in  the case of a  Capitalized Lease Obligation only, the  lease) of any real or
personal tangible property which, in the  reasonable good faith judgment of  the
Board  of Directors of the Company, is directly related to a Related Business of
the Company, (ii)  which is  incurred within 90  days of  such acquisition,  and
(iii) is secured only by assets so financed.
 
    "QUALIFIED CAPITAL STOCK" means any Capital Stock of the Company that is not
Disqualified Capital Stock.
 
    "QUALIFIED  EXCHANGE"  means any  legal defeasance,  redemption, retirement,
repurchase or  other acquisition  of  Equity Interests  or Indebtedness  of  the
Company   with  the  Net  Cash  Proceeds   received  by  the  Company  from  the
substantially concurrent  sale of  Qualified Capital  Stock or  any exchange  of
Qualified Capital Stock for any Capital Stock or Indebtedness.
 
    "REFERENCE  PERIOD" with  regard to  any period  means the  four full fiscal
quarters (or such lesser period during which such Person has been in  existence)
ended  immediately preceding any date upon which any determination is to be made
pursuant to the terms of the Notes or the Indenture.
 
    "REFINANCING INDEBTEDNESS" means Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital  Stock
(a)  issued in exchange for, or the proceeds from the issuance and sale of which
are  used  substantially  concurrently   to  repay,  redeem,  defease,   refund,
refinance,  discharge or otherwise retire for value, in whole or in part, or (b)
constituting an  amendment, modification  or  supplement to,  or a  deferral  or
renewal  of  ((a)  and  (b)  above  are,  collectively,  a  "Refinancing"),  any
Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital Stock in a principal amount or, in the case
of Disqualified  Capital Stock,  liquidation preference,  not to  exceed  (after
deduction  of reasonable and customary fees  and expenses incurred in connection
with the Refinancing) the lesser of (i) the principal amount or, in the case  of
Disqualified  Capital Stock, liquidation  preference including accrued dividends
thereon, of the  Indebtedness or  Disqualified Capital Stock  so Refinanced  and
(ii)  if such  Indebtedness being Refinanced  was issued with  an original issue
discount, the accreted value thereof (as determined in accordance with GAAP)  at
the  time  of  such  Refinancing;  PROVIDED  that  (A)  Refinancing Indebtedness
incurred by  any Subsidiary  of the  Company  shall only  be used  to  Refinance
outstanding  Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital  Stock of such Subsidiary, (B)
Refinancing Indebtedness shall  (x) not have  an Average Life  shorter than  the
Indebtedness  or Disqualified Capital Stock  to be so refinanced  at the time of
such Refinancing and (y) in all respects, be no less subordinated or junior,  if
applicable,  to the rights of Holders of  the Notes than was the Indebtedness or
Disqualified Capital Stock  to be  refinanced and  (C) Refinancing  Indebtedness
shall have a final stated maturity or redemption date, as applicable, no earlier
than  the  final  stated maturity  or  redemption  date, as  applicable,  of the
Indebtedness or Disqualified Capital Stock to be so refinanced.
 
    "RELATED  BUSINESS"  means  the  business  conducted  (or  proposed  to   be
conducted)  by the Company and its Subsidiaries as of the Issue Date and any and
all businesses that in the good faith judgment of the Board of Directors of  the
Company are materially related businesses.
 
                                       74
<PAGE>
    "RESTRICTED  INVESTMENT" means, in one or  a series of related transactions,
any Investment, other than investments in Permitted Investments.
 
    "RESTRICTED PAYMENT" means, with respect to any Person, (a) the  declaration
or  payment of any dividend or other distribution in respect of Equity Interests
of such Person or any  parent or Subsidiary of such  Person, (b) any payment  on
account of the purchase, redemption or other acquisition or retirement for value
of  Equity Interests of such Person or  any Subsidiary or parent of such Person,
(c) other than with the proceeds  from the substantially concurrent sale of,  or
in  exchange for, Refinancing  Indebtedness, any purchase,  redemption, or other
acquisition or retirement for value of, any payment in respect of any  amendment
of the terms of or any defeasance of, any Subordinated Indebtedness, directly or
indirectly, by such Person or a parent or Subsidiary of such Person prior to the
scheduled  maturity, any scheduled repayment  of principal, or scheduled sinking
fund payment, as the case  may be, of such  Indebtedness and (d) any  Restricted
Investment by such Person; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the term "Restricted Payment"
does  not include  (i) any  dividend, distribution or  other payment  on or with
respect to Capital Stock of an issuer to the extent payable solely in shares  of
Qualified  Capital Stock of  such issuer; or (ii)  any dividend, distribution or
other payment to the Company by any of its Subsidiaries.
 
    "STATED MATURITY," when used with respect to any Note, means July 1, 2006.
 
    "STOCKHOLDERS AGREEMENT" means the agreement dated as of June 5, 1996, among
the Company and the stockholders listed on the various schedules thereto, as  in
effect on the Issue Date.
 
    "SUBORDINATED  INDEBTEDNESS"  means  Indebtedness  of  the  Company  that is
subordinated in right of payment to the Notes in any respect.
 
    "SUBSIDIARY," with respect to any Person, means (i) a corporation a majority
of whose Capital Stock with voting power, under ordinary circumstances, to elect
directors is at the time, directly or indirectly, owned by such Person, by  such
Person  and  one  or  more  Subsidiaries  of  such  Person  or  by  one  or more
Subsidiaries of such Person, (ii) any other Person (other than a corporation) in
which such Person, one or more Subsidiaries  of such Person, or such Person  and
one  or more Subsidiaries of such Person, directly or indirectly, at the date of
determination thereof  has at  least  majority ownership  interest, or  (iii)  a
partnership in which such Person or a Subsidiary of such Person is, at the time,
a  general partner.  Notwithstanding the  foregoing, an  Unrestricted Subsidiary
shall not be a Subsidiary  of the Company or of  any Subsidiary of the  Company.
Unless the context requires otherwise, Subsidiary means each direct and indirect
Subsidiary of the Company.
 
    "TRANSACTION  DOCUMENTS" means the Investor  Agreement, the Bridge Financing
Agreement, the Securities  Purchase Agreement, the  Registration Agreement,  the
Tax Indemnification Agreement, and the Ancillary Documents, in each case as such
documents  are in effect on the date  shares of Senior Preferred Stock are first
issued.
 
    "UNRESTRICTED SUBSIDIARY" means any subsidiary of the Company that does  not
own  any Capital  Stock of,  or own  or hold  any Lien  on any  property of, the
Company or  any  other Subsidiary  of  the Company  and  that, at  the  time  of
determination,  shall be an Unrestricted Subsidiary  (as designated by the Board
of Directors  of the  Company);  PROVIDED that  (i)  such subsidiary  shall  not
engage,  to any substantial  extent, in any  line or lines  of business activity
other than a Related Business, (ii) neither immediately prior thereto nor  after
giving PRO FORMA effect to such designation would there exist a Default or Event
of  Default and  (iii) any  Investment therein  shall not  be prohibited  by the
"Limitation on  Restricted Payments"  covenant. The  Board of  Directors of  the
Company  may designate any Unrestricted Subsidiary  to be a Subsidiary, PROVIDED
that (i)  no  Default or  Event  of  Default is  existing  or will  occur  as  a
consequence   thereof  and  (ii)   immediately  after  giving   effect  to  such
designation, on a PRO  FORMA basis, the  Company could incur  at least $1.00  of
Indebtedness  pursuant to the Debt Incurrence  Ratio in the covenant "Limitation
on Incurrence of Additional Indebtedness  and Disqualified Capital Stock."  Each
such  designation shall be evidenced by filing with the Trustee a certified copy
of the resolution giving effect to such designation and an Officers' Certificate
certifying that such designation complied with the foregoing conditions.
 
                                       75
<PAGE>
    "WHOLLY OWNED SUBSIDIARY"  means a  Subsidiary all the  Equity Interests  of
which  are owned by the Company or one  or more Wholly Owned Subsidiaries of the
Company.
 
BOOK-ENTRY, DELIVERY AND FORM
 
   
    Except as set forth below, the Notes have been issued in the form of one  or
more  registered Notes in global form (the "Global Notes"). Each Global Note has
been deposited  with,  or  on  behalf of,  The  Depository  Trust  Company  (the
"Depositary")  and  registered in  the name  of Cede  & Co.,  as nominee  of the
Depositary.
    
 
    The Depositary is (i)  a limited-purpose trust  company organized under  the
New  York Banking  Law; (ii)  a member  of the  Federal Reserve  System; (iii) a
"clearing corporation" within  the meaning  of the New  York Uniform  Commercial
Code;  and (iv) a  "clearing agency" registered  pursuant to Section  17A of the
Exchange  Act.   The  Depositary   holds  securities   that  its   participating
organizations  (collectively, the  "Participants") deposit  with the Depositary.
The  Depositary  also  facilitates  the  settlement  of  transactions  in   such
securities  between  Participants, such  as transfers  and pledges  in deposited
securities through electronic computerized book-entry changes in accounts of its
Participants, thereby eliminating the need  for physical movement of  securities
certificates.  The  Depositary's  Participants  include  securities  brokers and
dealers (including the Initial Purchasers), banks and trust companies,  clearing
corporations  and  certain other  organizations. The  Depositary  is owned  by a
number of  its  Participants and  by  the New  York  Stock Exchange,  Inc.,  the
American  Stock  Exchange,  Inc.  and  the  National  Association  of Securities
Dealers, Inc.  Access to  the Depositary's  system is  also available  to  other
entities  such as banks, brokers, dealers and trust companies (collectively, the
"Indirect Participants") that clear through or maintain a custodial relationship
with a Participant, either directly or  indirectly. The rules applicable to  the
Depositary and its Participants are on file with the SEC. QIBs may elect to hold
Notes  purchased by them  through the Depositary. QIBs  who are not Participants
may beneficially own  securities held  by or on  behalf of  the Depositary  only
through  Participants or Indirect Participants. Persons who are not QIBs may not
hold Notes through the Depositary.
 
    The  Company  expects  that  pursuant  to  procedures  established  by   the
Depositary,  upon deposit  of the  Global Note,  the Depositary  will credit the
accounts of Participants with an interest  in the Global Note, and ownership  of
the  Notes evidenced by  the Global Note will  be shown on,  and the transfer of
ownership thereof  will be  effected  only through,  records maintained  by  the
Depositary (with respect to the interests of Participants), the Participants and
the  Indirect Participants. The laws of some states require that certain persons
take physical delivery in definitive form  of securities that they own and  that
security  interests in negotiable instruments can  only be perfected by delivery
of certificates  representing  the  instruments. Consequently,  the  ability  to
transfer  Notes or  to pledge the  Notes as  collateral will be  limited to such
extent. For certain other restrictions on the transferability of the Notes,  see
"Notice to Investors."
 
    So long as the Depositary or its nominee is the registered owner of a Global
Note, the Depositary or such nominee, as the case may be, will be considered the
sole  owner  or holder  of  the Notes  represented by  the  Global Note  for all
purposes under the  Indenture. Except  as provided below,  owners of  beneficial
interests  in a Global  Note will not  be entitled to  have Notes represented by
such Global Note registered in their names,  will not receive or be entitled  to
receive physical delivery of Certificated Securities, and will not be considered
the  owners or  holders thereof under  the Indenture for  any purpose, including
with respect to the giving of  any directions, instructions or approvals to  the
Trustee  thereunder. As a  result, the ability  of a person  having a beneficial
interest in  Notes represented  by a  Global  Note to  pledge such  interest  to
persons  or entities that do  not participate in the  Depositary's system, or to
otherwise take actions  with respect to  such interest, may  be affected by  the
lack of a physical certificate evidencing such interest.
 
    Accordingly,  each Holder owning a beneficial interest in a Global Note must
rely on  the  procedures  of  the  Depositary and,  if  such  Holder  is  not  a
Participant  or an  Indirect Participant, on  the procedures  of the Participant
through which such Holder owns its interest, to exercise any rights of a  holder
under  the Indenture  or such  Global Note.  The Company  understands that under
existing industry practice,  in the  event the  Company requests  any action  of
Holders   of   Notes  or   a  Holder   that   is  an   owner  of   a  beneficial
 
                                       76
<PAGE>
interest in a Global Note desires to take any action that the Depositary, as the
holder of such Global Note, is entitled to take, the Depositary would  authorize
the  Participants  to  take such  action  and the  Participants  would authorize
Holders owning through such Participants to take such action or would  otherwise
act  upon the instructions of such Holders.  Neither the Company nor the Trustee
will have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records relating
to or payments made on account of  Notes by the Depositary, or for  maintaining,
supervising or reviewing any records of the Depositary relating to such Notes.
 
    Payments  with respect to the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on
any Notes represented by a Global Note registered in the name of the  Depositary
or  its nominee on the applicable record date  will be payable by the Trustee to
or at the  direction of the  Depositary or its  nominee in its  capacity as  the
registered  holder  of  the  Global  Note  representing  such  Notes  under  the
Indenture. Under the  terms of the  Indenture, the Company  and the Trustee  may
treat  the persons  in whose  names the Notes,  including the  Global Notes, are
registered as the owners thereof for the purpose of receiving such payments  and
for any and all other purposes whatsoever. Consequently, neither the Company nor
the  Trustee has or will have any responsibility or liability for the payment of
such amounts to  beneficial owners  of Notes (including  principal, premium,  if
any,  and  interest), or  to  immediately credit  the  accounts of  the relevant
Participants with such  payment, in  amounts proportionate  to their  respective
holdings  in principal amount of beneficial interest in the Global Note as shown
on the records of the Depositary. Payments by the Participants and the  Indirect
Participants  to the  beneficial owners  of Notes  will be  governed by standing
instructions and  customary  practice and  will  be the  responsibility  of  the
Participants or the Indirect Participants.
 
CERTIFICATED SECURITIES
 
    If (i) the Company notifies the Trustee in writing that the Depositary is no
longer  willing or  able to  act as a  depository and  the Company  is unable to
locate a qualified successor within 90 days; or (ii) the Company, at its option,
notifies the Trustee in writing that it elects to cause the issuance of Notes in
definitive form under the Indenture, then,  upon surrender by the Depositary  of
its  Global Note, Certificated Securities will be issued to each person that the
Depositary identifies as the  beneficial owner of the  Notes represented by  the
Global  Note. In  addition, subject to  certain conditions, any  person having a
beneficial interest in a Global Note may, upon request to the Trustee,  exchange
such  beneficial interest for  Certificated Securities. Upon  any such issuance,
the Trustee is required to register such Certificated Securities in the name  of
such person or persons (or the nominee of any thereof), and cause the same to be
delivered thereto.
 
    Neither  the Company nor  the Trustee shall  be liable for  any delay by the
Depositary or  any  Participant  or  Indirect  Participant  in  identifying  the
beneficial  owners of  the related  Notes and  the Company  and the  Trustee may
conclusively rely on, and  shall be protected in  relying on, instructions  from
the  Depositary for all purposes (including with respect to the registration and
delivery, and the respective principal amounts, of the Notes to be issued).
 
    The  information  in  this  section   concerning  the  Depositary  and   the
Depositary's  book-entry system has been obtained  from sources that the Company
believes to  be  reliable. The  Company  will  have no  responsibility  for  the
performance   by  the  Depositary  or   its  Participants  of  their  respective
obligations as described hereunder or  under the rules and procedures  governing
their respective operations.
 
SAME-DAY FUNDS SETTLEMENT AND PAYMENT
 
    The  Indenture requires that payments in respect of the Notes represented by
the Global Note (including principal,  premium, if any, interest and  liquidated
damages,  if any) be made by wire transfer of immediately available funds to the
accounts specified  by the  Depositary.  With respect  to Notes  represented  by
Certificated  Securities,  the  Company  will make  all  payments  of principal,
premium, if any, interest  and liquidated damages, if  any, by wire transfer  of
immediately available funds to the accounts specified by the holders thereof or,
if  no  such account  is specified,  by mailing  a check  to each  such holder's
registered address.  Secondary  trading in  long-term  notes and  debentures  of
corporate  issuers is generally settled in  clearing-house or next-day funds. In
contrast, the Notes represented by the Global Note are expected to trade in  the
Depositary's    Same-Day   Funds   Settlement    System,   and   any   permitted
 
                                       77
<PAGE>
secondary market trading activity in such Notes will, therefore, be required  by
the Depositary to be settled in immediately available funds. The Company expects
that  secondary trading in  the Certificated Securities will  also be settled in
immediately available funds. No assurance can be given as to the effect, if any,
of settlement in immediately available funds on trading activity in the Notes.
 
                                       78
<PAGE>
   
                    DESCRIPTION OF THE 1996 CREDIT FACILITY
    
 
   
    GENERAL.   The Company has entered into  the 1996 Credit Facility with Wells
Fargo Bank. The 1996 Credit Facility provides for a $25 million revolving credit
facility, including  a sub-limit  for  letters of  credit  of $10  million,  and
expires  on June 1, 2001. This summary  of the 1996 Credit Facility is qualified
in its entirety by reference  to the 1996 Credit Facility  which is filed as  an
exhibit  to  the Registration  Statement  of which  this  Prospectus is  a part.
Capitalized terms used in this description that are not defined herein have  the
meaning  given  to  such terms  in  the  1996 Credit  Facility.  The  Company is
currently negotiating a  new secured bank  facility to replace  the 1996  Credit
Facility,  although  no  agreement has  been  reached  as of  the  date  of this
Prospectus. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of Operations -- Liquidity and Capital Resources."
    
 
   
    AVAILABILITY.  Borrowings under  the 1996 Credit Facility  are subject to  a
borrowing  base limit equal to 80% of  Eligible Receivables plus 70% of Eligible
Inventory minus,  at  all  times  prior to  the  occurrence  of  the  Collateral
Perfection Date, Trade Payables.
    
 
   
    SECURITY.   Indebtedness  of the Company  under the 1996  Credit Facility is
currently unsecured.  Upon the  occurrence of  certain events  including (i)  an
Event  of Default or (ii) the failure by the Company to maintain certain ratios,
at the option of Wells Fargo Bank, the 1996 Credit Facility will be secured by a
security interest in  certain assets  and properties of  the Company,  including
accounts  receivable,  inventory,  trademarks, copyrights,  patents  and general
intangibles, and all products and proceeds of any of the foregoing.
    
 
   
    INTEREST.  Indebtedness under the 1996  Credit Facility bears interest at  a
rate  based (at the Company's option) upon (i)  in the case of Prime Rate Loans,
the Prime Rate plus a maximum margin of 1.50% (subject to reduction depending on
the ratio of Funded  Debt to EBITDA);  and (ii) in the  case of Eurodollar  Rate
Loans, the Eurodollar Rate for one, two, three, six, nine or twelve months, plus
a maximum margin of 3.00% (subject to reduction depending on the ratio of Funded
Debt to EBITDA).
    
 
   
    MATURITY.   The 1996 Credit Facility will mature on June 1, 2001. Loans made
pursuant to the 1996 Credit Facility may be borrowed, repaid and reborrowed from
time to time until  such maturity date, subject  to the satisfaction of  certain
conditions on the date of any such borrowing.
    
 
   
    REVOLVING  CREDIT FACILITY FEES.  The Company is required to pay Wells Fargo
Bank a facility  fee of  $250,000, of  which $100,000  was paid  and $50,000  is
payable  at  the end  of each  fiscal year  of the  Company, PROVIDED  that upon
termination or cancellation of the 1996 Credit Facility, the Company must pay in
full the outstanding  balance of  the $250,000  facility fee.  In addition,  the
Company  has agreed to  pay to Wells Fargo  Bank promptly upon  demand, a fee of
$25,000 in consideration for Wells Fargo  Bank agreeing to allow the Company  to
use  the  proceeds of  Revolving Loans  to  make loans  to senior  management in
respect of certain personal income tax liabilities. The Company is also required
to pay to Wells Fargo  Bank a commitment fee based  on the average daily  unused
portion  of the committed undrawn amount of  the 1996 Credit Facility during the
preceding quarter equal to a maximum  of 0.375% per annum (subject to  reduction
depending  on  the ratio  of Funded  Debt to  EBITDA), payable  in arrears  on a
quarterly basis. In addition to a normal issuance fee for each letter of  credit
issued,  the Company is required  to pay to Wells Fargo  Bank a letter of credit
fee based on the aggregate unpaid  face amount of outstanding letters of  credit
equal  to a  maximum of 3.00%  (subject to  reduction depending on  the ratio of
Funded Debt to EBITDA), payable in arrears on a quarterly basis.
    
 
   
    CONDITIONS TO EXTENSIONS OF CREDIT.   The obligation of Wells Fargo Bank  to
make loans or extend letters of credit is subject to the satisfaction of certain
conditions  including, but not limited to, the  absence of a default or event of
default under the 1996 Credit Facility, all representations and warranties under
the 1996 Credit Facility  being true and correct  in all material respects,  and
that  there has been no  material adverse change in  the Company's properties or
business.
    
 
   
    COVENANTS.  The 1996  Credit Facility requires the  Company to meet  certain
financial tests, including a maximum Funded Debt to EBITDA ratio, a minimum Debt
Service  Coverage Ratio, a minimum level of profit, a minimum quarterly increase
in   Tangible   Net   Worth   and   a   minimum   EBITDA.   The   1996    Credit
    
 
                                       79
<PAGE>
Facility  also  contains covenants  which, among  other  things, limit:  (i) the
incurrence of additional indebtedness;  (ii) the nature of  the business of  the
Company;  (iii) leases of assets; (iv) ownership of subsidiaries; (v) dividends;
(vi) capital  expenditures; (vii)  transactions  with affiliates;  (viii)  asset
sales; (ix) acquisitions, mergers and consolidations; (x) loans and investments;
(xi)  liens and encumbrances; and (xii)  other matters customarily restricted in
loan agreements. The  1996 Credit  Facility also  contains additional  covenants
which  require the Company to maintain  its existence and rights and franchises,
to maintain its properties, to maintain insurance on such properties, to provide
certain information to Wells Fargo Bank, including financial statements, notices
and reports and to permit  inspections of the books  and records of the  Company
and  its subsidiaries, to  comply with applicable  laws, including environmental
laws and ERISA, to pay taxes and contractual obligations and to use the proceeds
of the Revolving Loans to finance in part the Recapitalization, and for  working
capital and other general corporate purpose.
 
   
    EVENTS OF DEFAULT.  Events of Default under the 1996 Credit Facility include
payment  defaults, breach of representations,  warranties and covenants (subject
to certain cure periods),  cross-default to other indebtedness  in excess of  $2
million,  dissolution of the Company, a material adverse change in the Company's
properties or business, certain events  of bankruptcy and insolvency, breach  of
ERISA covenants, judgment defaults in excess of $2 million and the occurrence of
a Change of Control.
    
 
   
    INDEMNIFICATION.   Under the 1996 Credit Facility, the Company has agreed to
indemnify Wells Fargo  Bank and  related persons from  and against  any and  all
Losses  (including, without limitation, the reasonable fees and disbursements of
counsel) that may be incurred by or asserted against any such indemnified  party
(a)  in any way relating to the Loan Documents, the Recapitalization, or the use
or intended use of the proceeds of  the 1996 Credit Facility; (b) in  connection
with   any  investigation,  litigation  or  other  proceeding  relating  to  the
foregoing; or (c) in  any way relating  to or arising  out of any  Environmental
Claims;  PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the  Company is not liable  for any such Losses
resulting  from  such  indemnified  party's  own  gross  negligence  or  willful
misconduct.
    
 
                                       80
<PAGE>
   
                              PLAN OF DISTRIBUTION
    
 
   
    This  Prospectus may be  used by Chase Securities  in connection with offers
and sales related to market-making  transactions in the Notes. Chase  Securities
may  act as principal or agent in such  transactions. Such sales will be made at
prices related to prevailing market prices at the time of sale. The Company will
not receive  any  of  the  proceeds  of such  sales.  Chase  Securities  has  no
obligation  to make a market in the  Notes and may discontinue its market-making
activities at any time without notice,  at its sole discretion. The Company  has
agreed  to  indemnify Chase  Securities  against certain  liabilities, including
liabilities under the Securities Act, and to contribute to payments which  Chase
Securities might be required to make in respect thereof.
    
 
   
    Chase  Securities and its affiliates  have in the past  provided, and may in
the future  provide,  investment  banking services  and  general  financing  and
banking  services  to the  Company  and its  affiliates.  An affiliate  of Chase
Securites beneficially owns  4,381,265 shares  of Common Stock  (net of  certain
options  granted to certain members of the Company's management). See "Principal
Stockholders."
    
 
   
                                 LEGAL MATTERS
    
 
   
    The validity  of the  Notes offered  hereby was  passed upon  by  Buchalter,
Nemer, Fields & Younger, a Professional Corporation.
    
 
   
                                    EXPERTS
    
 
   
    The  financial statements and schedule of Guitar Center, Inc. as of December
31, 1996  and for  the year  then ended  have been  included herein  and in  the
registration  statement in  reliance upon the  report of KPMG  Peat Marwick LLP,
independent certified public accountants,  appearing elsewhere herein, and  upon
the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.
    
 
   
    The financial statements of Guitar Center, Inc. at December 31, 1995 and for
the  two  years  ended  December  31, 1995,  appearing  in  this  Prospectus and
Registration Statement  have been  audited  by Ernst  & Young  LLP,  independent
auditors,  as set forth in their  report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and
are included in reliance upon such report given upon the authority of such  firm
as experts in accounting and auditing.
    
 
   
    In  connection with the Recapitalization, Ernst  & Young LLP was replaced on
July 24, 1996 by  KPMG Peat Marwick LLP  as the Company's independent  certified
public  accountants.  The decision  to change  accountants  was approved  by the
Company's Board of Directors. The reports of Ernst & Young LLP on the  Company's
financial  statements for the past  two fiscal years did  not contain an adverse
opinion or a  disclaimer of opinion  and were  not qualified or  modified as  to
uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles. In connection with the audits
of  the Company's financial  statements for each  of the two  fiscal years ended
December 31, 1995, and the subsequent interim period ended June 30, 1996,  there
were  no  disagreements with  Ernst &  Young  LLP on  any matters  of accounting
principles or practices,  financial statement disclosure  or auditing scope  and
procedures  which, if  not resolved  to the satisfaction  of Ernst  & Young LLP,
would have caused Ernst  & Young LLP  to make reference to  the matter in  their
report.
    
 
                                       81
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                         INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                         <C>
Report of Independent Auditors (KPMG Peat Marwick LLP)....................   F-2
Report of Independent Auditors (Ernst & Young LLP)........................   F-3
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 1995 and 1996...........................   F-4
Statements of Operations for the years ended December 31, 1994, 1995 and
 1996.....................................................................   F-5
Statements of Stockholders' Equity (Deficit) for the years ended December
 31, 1994, 1995 and 1996..................................................   F-6
Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 1994, 1995 and
 1996.....................................................................   F-7
Notes to Financial Statements.............................................   F-8
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      F-1
<PAGE>
   
                         REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS
    
 
   
The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Guitar Center, Inc.:
    
 
   
    We  have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Guitar Center, Inc. as of
December 31, 1996 and the related statements of operations, stockholders' equity
(deficit) and cash flows for the year then ended. In connection with our  audits
of  the  financial  statements, we  also  have audited  the  financial statement
schedule as listed in the accompanying index. These financial statements and the
financial statement schedule are the responsibility of the Company's management.
Our responsibility is to  express an opinion on  these financial statements  and
the financial statement schedule based on our audit.
    
 
   
    We  conducted  our  audit  in accordance  with  generally  accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to  obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement.  An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also  includes
assessing  the  accounting principles  used  and significant  estimates  made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement  presentation.
We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
    
 
   
    In  our opinion, the financial statements  referred to above present fairly,
in all material respects,  the financial position of  Guitar Center, Inc. as  of
December  31, 1996 and the results of its  operations and its cash flows for the
year then ended  in conformity  with generally  accepted accounting  principles.
Also,  in our opinion, the related financial statement schedule, when considered
in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole, present  fairly,
in all material respects, the information set forth therein.
    
 
   
                                          KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
    
 
   
Los Angeles, California
February 10, 1997, except as
to notes 13 and 14 which are as
of April 16, 1997
    
 
                                      F-2
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                         NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
                               DECEMBER 31, 1996
    
 
   
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
    
 
   
    NATURE OF BUSINESS
    
 
   
    Guitar  Center, Inc. ("Guitar Center" or  the "Company") operates a chain of
retail stores which  sell high  quality musical  instruments primarily  guitars,
keyboard,  percussion and pro-audio equipment. At December 31, 1996, the Company
operated  28  stores  in  major   cities  throughout  the  United  States   with
approximately 50% of the stores located in California.
    
 
   
    The  financial statements give effect to  the reincorporation of the Company
from a California to a Delaware corporation on October 11, 1996 and a 2.582-to-1
stock split effectuated on January 15, 1997.
    
 
   
    RECAPITALIZATION
    
 
   
    On June  5, 1996,  Guitar Center  consummated a  series of  transactions  to
effect  the recapitalization of the Company (the "Recapitalization"). Members of
management purchased 1,291,000  shares of  the Company's Common  Stock for  $0.5
million  cash  and  received 495,000  shares  of  8% Junior  Preferred  Stock in
exchange for  the cancellation  of outstanding  options exercisable  for  Common
Stock.  The Company's former sole stockholder  received 198,000 shares of Junior
Preferred Stock in exchange for Common Stock. New investors purchased  1,807,400
shares  of Common Stock and  693,000 shares of Junior  Preferred Stock for $70.0
million cash, and 800,000 shares of 14% Senior Preferred Stock and Warrants  for
an  aggregate $20 million cash. The Warrants are exchangeable for 190,252 shares
of Common  Stock  and 72,947  shares  of  Junior Preferred  Stock.  The  Company
repurchased  shares of Common Stock from  the former sole stockholder for $113.1
million cash, and canceled certain options  for Common Stock held by  management
in  exchange  for  $27.9 million  cash.  For financial  statement  purposes, the
Company recorded a charge to operations in  the amount of $69.9 million (net  of
$7.9   million  which  the  Company  had  previously  accrued)  related  to  the
cancellation and exchange of the management stock options.
    
 
   
    In part to  fund the  Recapitalization transaction  and to  repay the  $35.9
million  outstanding under  its Old Credit  Facility, the  Company borrowed $100
million under an increasing rate Bridge Facility. The Bridge Facility was repaid
on July 2, 1996  with the proceeds  of the Company's 11%  Senior Notes due  2006
(the "Senior Notes") and cash on hand.
    
 
   
    In  connection with  the Recapitalization, the  Company incurred transaction
costs and financing fees of approximately $11.6 million, which consists of  $6.9
million  of sellers transaction costs  and $4.7 million in  fees paid to finance
the Bridge Facility. These amounts have been charged to transaction expenses and
interest expense, net,  respectively, in  the 1996 statement  of operations.  In
addition,  on  July  2,  1996,  in  connection  with  the  sale  of  the  Notes,
approximately $3.6 million was paid and  capitalized as an other asset and  will
be amortized over the term of the related debt.
    
 
   
    INVENTORIES
    
 
   
    Inventories,  including used merchandise and  vintage guitars, are valued at
the lower of cost or market using the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method.
    
 
   
    PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
    
 
   
    Property and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed  using
the  straight-line  method  over  the  estimated  useful  lives  of  the assets;
generally  five  years  for  furniture  and  fixtures,  computer  equipment  and
vehicles,  15  years  for buildings  and  15 years  or  the life  of  the lease,
whichever is less, for leasehold improvements. Maintenance and repair costs  are
expensed as they are incurred, while renewals and betterments are capitalized.
    
 
                                      F-8
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
    
   
    STORE PREOPENING COSTS
    
 
   
    Effective  January  1,  1996,  the  Company  elected  to  capitalize certain
preopening costs and amortize the balance over 12 months. Previously, preopening
costs were charged to expense  as incurred. The change  was not material to  any
previous periods presented.
    
 
   
    ADVERTISING COSTS
    
 
   
    The  Company  expenses the  costs  of advertising  as  incurred. Advertising
expense included in the  statements of operations for  the years ended  December
31, 1994, 1995 and 1996, is $4,236,000, $4,128,000 and $5,717,000, respectively.
    
 
   
    MERCHANDISE ADVANCES
    
 
   
    Merchandise advances represent primarily layaway deposits which are recorded
as  a liability pending consummation of the sale when the full purchase price is
received from the customer and outstanding gift certificates which are  recorded
as a liability until redemption by the customer.
    
 
   
    REVENUE RECOGNITION
    
 
   
    Revenue  is recognized at the time of sale, net of a provision for estimated
returns.
    
 
   
    INCOME TAXES
    
 
   
    In connection  with  the  Recapitalization, the  Company  terminated  its  S
Corporation  election and converted to a  C Corporation for income tax purposes.
The Company accounts for  income taxes under  Statement of Financial  Accounting
Standards  No. 109, "Accounting for Income  Taxes" ("SFAS 109"). Under the asset
and liability method of SFAS 109, deferred income tax assets and liabilities are
recognized for the future tax  consequences attributable to differences  between
financial  statement  carrying amounts  of existing  assets and  liabilities and
their respective tax  bases. Deferred  tax assets and  liabilities are  measured
using  tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those
temporary differences are expected to be  recovered or settled. Under SFAS  109,
the  effect on deferred tax  assets and liabilities of a  change in tax rates is
recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.
    
 
   
    In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management  considers
whether  it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax
assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets  is
dependent  upon the  generation of future  taxable income during  the periods in
which those temporary  differences become deductible.  Management considers  the
scheduled  reversals  of  deferred  tax  liabilities,  projected  future taxable
income, and  tax  planning  strategies in  making  this  assessment.  Management
determined  that a substantial valuation allowance  was necessary as of December
31, 1996 due  to the  increased leverage  of the Company  on that  date and  its
effect on future taxable income.
    
 
   
    Prior  to the  Recapitalization, the  Company had elected  to be  taxed as a
Subchapter S  corporation.  This  election  generally  requires  the  individual
stockholder rather than the Company to pay federal income taxes on the Company's
earnings.
    
 
   
    California,  and certain  other states in  which the  Company does business,
impose a minimum  tax on Subchapter  S corporate income,  which is reflected  as
income taxes on the statements of operations.
    
 
   
    GOODWILL
    
 
   
    Goodwill  represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of
the net  assets acquired  resulting from  a business  combination and  is  being
amortized on a straight-line basis over 40 years.
    
 
                                      F-9
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
    
   
    RENT EXPENSE
    
 
   
    The  Company  leases certain  store  locations under  operating  leases that
provide for  annual payments  that increase  over the  life of  the leases.  The
aggregate  of the minimum annual payments  are expensed on a straight-line basis
over the  term of  the related  lease without  consideration of  renewal  option
periods.  The amount  by which straight-line  rent expense  exceeds actual lease
payment requirements in  the early years  of the leases  is accrued as  deferred
minimum   rent  and  reduced  in  later  years  when  the  actual  cash  payment
requirements exceed the straight-line expense.
    
 
   
    CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK
    
 
   
    The Company's deposits are with various high quality financial institutions.
Customer purchases  are transacted  using  generally cash  or credit  cards.  In
certain  instances, the Company grants credit for larger purchases, generally to
professional musicians, under normal trade terms. Trade accounts receivable were
approximately $212,000 and $409,000 at December 31, 1995 and 1996, respectively.
Credit losses have historically been within management's expectations.
    
 
   
    USE OF ESTIMATES IN THE PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
    
 
   
    The  preparation  of  financial  statements  in  conformity  with  generally
accepted  accounting  principles  requires  management  to  make  estimates  and
assumptions that  affect the  reported  amounts of  assets and  liabilities  and
disclosure  of contingent  assets and liabilities  at the date  of the financial
statements and  the  reported  amounts  of  revenues  and  expenses  during  the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
    
 
   
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
    
 
   
    For  the purposes of balance sheet  classification and the statement of cash
flows, the Company considers all highly liquid investments that are both readily
convertible into cash and mature within 90 days of their date of purchase to  be
cash equivalents.
    
 
   
    IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS AND LONG-LIVED ASSETS TO BE DISPOSED OF
    
 
    The  Company  adopted the  provisions of  SFAS No.  121, ACCOUNTING  FOR THE
IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS AND FOR LONG-LIVED ASSETS TO BE DISPOSED OF,  on
January  1, 1996.  This Statement  requires that  long-lived assets  and certain
identifiable intangibles be reviewed for  impairment whenever events or  changes
in  circumstances  indicate that  the carrying  amount  of an  asset may  not be
recoverable. Recoverability  of assets  to be  held and  used is  measured by  a
comparison  of the carrying amount of an asset to future net cash flows expected
to be generated by the asset. If such assets are considered to be impaired,  the
impairment  to be  recognized is  measured by the  amount by  which the carrying
amount of the assets exceed the fair value of the assets. Assets to be  disposed
of  are reported at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less costs to
sell. Adoption of this Statement did not have a material impact on the Company's
financial position, results of operations or liquidity.
 
   
    STOCK OPTION PLANS
    
 
   
    Prior to January 1, 1996, the Company accounted for its stock option plan in
accordance with the  provisions of Accounting  Principles Board ("APB")  Opinion
No.  25, ACCOUNTING FOR STOCK ISSUED  TO EMPLOYEES, and related interpretations.
As such, compensation expense would be recorded on the date of grant only if the
current market price  of the underlying  stock exceeded the  exercise price.  On
January  1, 1996, the  Company adopted SFAS No.  123, ACCOUNTING FOR STOCK-BASED
COMPENSATION, which permits entities  to recognize as  expense over the  vesting
period  the  fair  value  of  all  stock-based  awards  on  the  date  of grant.
Alternatively, SFAS  No. 123  also  allows entities  to  continue to  apply  the
provisions  of APB Opinion No. 25 and provide pro forma net income and pro forma
earnings per share
    
 
                                      F-10
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
    
disclosures for employee stock option grants made in 1995 and future years as if
the fair-value-based  method defined  in  SFAS No.  123  had been  applied.  The
Company  has elected to continue  to apply the provisions  of APB Opinion No. 25
and provide the pro forma disclosure provisions of SFAS No. 123.
 
   
    FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
    
 
   
    The  carrying  amount   of  the  Company's   financial  instruments,   which
principally  include  cash, accounts  receivable,  accounts payable  and accrued
expenses, approximates fair value due to  the relatively short maturity of  such
instruments.
    
 
   
    The  fair value  of the  Company's short  term instrument  reflects the fair
value based upon current  rates available to the  Company for similar debt.  The
fair  value of the Company's long term debt instrument is $110 million, based on
quoted market prices.
    
 
   
2.  INVENTORIES
    
   
    The major classes of inventories are as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                   --------------------
                                                                                     1995       1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>
Major goods......................................................................  $  19,597  $  32,758
Associated accessories...........................................................      5,952      9,057
Vintage guitars..................................................................      2,072      2,569
Used merchandise.................................................................      1,940      2,439
General accessories..............................................................      1,720      2,882
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   $  31,281  $  49,705
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
    Major goods includes the major product lines including stringed merchandise,
percussion,  keyboards  and  pro-audio  equipment.  Associated  accessories  are
comprised  of  accessories to  major goods.  General accessories  includes other
merchandise such as apparel, cables and books.
    
 
   
3.  PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
    
   
    Property and equipment consists of the following:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                   --------------------
                                                                                     1995       1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>
Land.............................................................................  $   2,881  $   2,283
Buildings........................................................................      9,075      7,693
Transportation equipment.........................................................        494        467
Furniture and fixtures...........................................................      5,838      8,161
Leasehold improvements...........................................................      2,416      6,440
Construction in progress.........................................................      1,201        185
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      21,905     25,229
Less accumulated depreciation....................................................      8,629     10,263
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   $  13,276  $  14,966
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      F-11
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
4.  LONG-TERM DEBT
    
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization,  the Company borrowed $100  million
under  increasing rate  notes (the  "Bridge Facility").  Financing fees  of $4.7
million were paid and charged to  the statement of operations during June  1996.
On  July 2, 1996, the Bridge Facility was repaid with the proceeds from the sale
of the Senior Notes  and cash on  hand. The Senior Notes  are unsecured and  pay
interest on a semi-annual basis.
    
 
   
    The  Senior Notes  are not entitled  to the  benefit of a  sinking fund. The
Senior Notes may be redeemed, in whole or in part, at the option of the Company,
at any time after July 1, 2001 at prices declining from 105.5% to 100.0% of  the
principal  amount redeemed, plus  accrued and unpaid  interest. In addition, the
Company, may, at  its option  and subject to  certain conditions,  redeem up  to
33  1/3%  of the  original  aggregate principal  amount  of Senior  Notes,  at a
redemption price of 110% of the  principal amount thereof in connection with  an
initial  public offering of Common  Stock. The holders of  the Senior Notes have
the right to require the Company to repurchase their Senior Notes at 101% of the
principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest, upon the  occurrence
of a change of control, as defined.
    
 
   
    In  June 1996,  the Company entered  into a $25  million unsecured revolving
line of credit.  The line expires  in June  2001. The revolving  line of  credit
bears  interest  at various  rates based  on  the prime  lending rate  (8.25% at
December 31, 1996) plus 1.5% or the Eurodollar rate (5.5% at December 31,  1996)
plus  3.0%. A fee  of 0.375% is assessed  on the unused  portion of the facility
with interest due monthly.  At December 31, 1996,  the Company had $3.5  million
outstanding  under  the revolving  line of  credit  and $300,000  outstanding on
standby letters of credit. The Company  had available borrowings under the  line
of credit of $21.2 million at December 31, 1996.
    
 
   
    Under  certain  conditions, the  line of  credit will  convert to  a secured
credit facility. Under the terms of the  term loan and revolving line of  credit
agreements, the Company is subject to various financial and other covenants. The
Company  was in compliance with or had appropriate waivers for such covenants at
December 31, 1996. In addition, the Senior Notes and line of credit restrict the
payment of cash dividends.
    
 
   
5.  LEASE COMMITMENTS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
    
   
    The Company  leases its  office and  several retail  store facilities  under
various  operating  leases  which expire  at  varying dates  through  June 2006.
Generally, the agreements contain  provisions which require  the Company to  pay
for normal repairs and maintenance, property taxes and insurance.
    
 
   
    Through  October 17, 1995,  the Company leased from  its Profit Sharing Plan
two properties at a total  monthly rental of $19,988.  On October 17, 1995,  the
leases  with the Company were  cancelled for fees totaling  $227,000. One of the
properties was then purchased by the Company for $500,000, a price determined by
an independent  fiduciary.  The other  property  was re-leased  by  the  Company
through  2005 from a  related party at  a monthly rental  of $8,250. The Company
leases three additional properties through 2006 from a related party at  monthly
rentals  aggregating $26,200. The total rent  expense recorded for related party
leases  totaled  $238,000,  $292,000  and  $364,000  in  1994,  1995  and  1996,
respectively.
    
 
                                      F-12
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
5.  LEASE COMMITMENTS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS (CONTINUED)
    
   
    The  total minimum rental  commitment at December  31, 1996, under operating
leases, is as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31                                                    AMOUNT
- --------------------------------------------------------------------  --------------
<S>                                                                   <C>
                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
1997................................................................    $    3,281
1998................................................................         3,238
1999................................................................         3,161
2000................................................................         3,147
2001................................................................         3,110
Thereafter..........................................................        13,950
                                                                      --------------
                                                                        $   29,887
                                                                      --------------
                                                                      --------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
    The total rental expense  included in the statements  of operations for  the
years  ended  December 31,  1994, 1995  and 1996  is $1,804,000,  $1,985,000 and
$2,856,000, respectively.
    
 
   
6.  PROFIT SHARING PLAN
    
   
    The  Company  has  a   Profit  Sharing  Plan   (the  "Plan")  which   covers
substantially  all  employees who  meet  a minimum  employment  requirement. The
Company's board  of  directors  can  elect  to  contribute  up  to  15%  of  the
participants'  compensation for any  plan year, subject to  a maximum of $30,000
per participant. During the  Plan years ended October  31, 1994, 1995 and  1996,
the Company declared total contributions of $1,003,000, $1,272,000 and $654,000,
respectively, which is included in accrued liabilities. In addition, $195,000 of
assets,  included in the Plan, which had been forfeited by terminated employees,
was reallocated to participants.
    
 
   
7.  STOCK OPTION PLANS
    
 
   
    1996 PERFORMANCE STOCK OPTION PLAN
    
 
   
    In June 1996, the Company adopted the 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (as
amended, the  "1996  Plan"), which  provides  for  the granting  of  options  to
purchase  units (each unit (a "Unit")consisting  of 2.582 shares of Common Stock
and 99/100  of a  share of  Junior  Preferred Stock)  at an  aggregate  weighted
average exercise price of $100.00 per unit. As of December 31, 1996, the Company
had issued options to purchase 60,399 Units under the 1996 Plan. Upon conversion
of  the Junior  Preferred Stock,  an option  to purchase  a Unit  will become an
option to purchase 9.182 shares of Common  Stock at an exercise price of  $10.89
per  share. The  options vest ratably  over three  years. The 1996  Plan will be
frozen upon the consummation of the Offering.
    
 
   
    MANAGEMENT STOCK OPTION AGREEMENTS
    
 
   
    In June 1996, the  Company granted options to  certain officers to  purchase
86,688  Units at an exercise  price of $100 per Unit.  The options vest in three
equal installments commencing 2003, 2004, and  2005 and will terminate upon  the
certain  events.  The agreements  contain provisions  to accelerate  the vesting
period, including the  achievement of a  certain targeted "Calculated  Corporate
Value", as defined.
    
 
   
    1997 EQUITY PARTICIPATION PLAN
    
 
   
    In January of 1997, the Company and its stockholders adopted the 1997 Equity
Participation Plan (the "1997 Plan"). Under the 1997 Plan, the Company may grant
options  to  purchase up  to  875,000 shares  of  Common Stock,  $.01  par value
("Common Stock"); provided, however, that grants  to any one individual may  not
exceed  150,000 shares of Common Stock in  any calendar year. As of December 31,
1996, no options had been granted under the 1997 Plan.
    
 
                                      F-13
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
7.  STOCK OPTION PLANS (CONTINUED)
    
   
    OTHER OPTION ARRANGEMENTS
    
 
   
    In December 1996, the Company's  institutional investors granted options  to
certain  officers and  key managers of  the Company to  purchase 30,188.68 Units
held by such investors at  a purchase price of $39.75  per Unit. The Company  is
not a party to this agreement and has not, and will not, incur any obligation in
connection  with such  options. Under generally  accepted accounting principles,
the Company recorded a charge  to the statement of  operations in the amount  of
$1.9 million, with a corresponding increase to additional paid in capital.
    
 
   
    The  Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for its plans. Had the
Company determined compensation cost based upon the fair value at the grant date
for its stock options under SFAS No. 123 using the Black Scholes option  pricing
model  with the following weighted average assumptions: 1996 - expected dividend
yield 0%, volatility 0%, risk free interest rate of 7.00%, and expected life  of
10 years. The Company's net loss for the year ended December 31, 1996 would have
been increased from $72.4 million to a pro forma loss of $73.2 million.
    
 
   
    Pro  forma net  loss reflects only  options granted in  1996. Therefore, the
full impact of calculating  compensation cost for stock  options under SFAS  No.
123 is not reflected in the pro forma net income amounts presented above because
compensation cost is reflected over the options' vesting period of 3 to 10 years
and  compensation  cost for  options granted  prior  to January  1, 1996  is not
considered.
    
 
   
    At December 31,  1996, all  the outstanding  stock options  had an  exercise
price of $100 per Unit and a remaining contractual life of 10 years.
    
 
   
    At December 31, 1996, no options were exercisable.
    
 
   
    TERMINATED PLAN
    
 
   
    Prior to the Recapitalization, the Company had granted to certain members of
management  options to  purchase 81,407,400  of common  stock of  the Company at
prices ranging  from  $.0005  to  $0.11 per  share.  Upon  consummation  of  the
Recapitalization,  these  options were  exchanged for  cash and  securities with
management and canceled. For financial statement purposes, the Company  recorded
a  charge of  approximately $69.9  million (net  of the  $7.9 million previously
accrued as deferred compensation) in the statement of operations.
    
 
   
8.  INCOME TAXES
    
   
    The pro forma  unaudited income tax  adjustments presented represent  income
taxes which would have been reported had the Company been subject to Federal and
State  income taxes as a C Corporation.  The historical pro forma provisions for
income taxes were as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       1994       1995       1996
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
<S>                                                                                  <C>        <C>        <C>
                                                                                             (IN THOUSANDS)
 
Historical income taxes............................................................  $     326  $     345        139
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
Pro forma adjustments (unaudited):
 
  Federal..........................................................................      3,645      5,001     --
  California.......................................................................        507        798       (139)
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
    Total pro forma adjustments....................................................      4,152      5,799       (139)
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
    Total pro forma provision for income taxes.....................................  $   4,478  $   6,144  $  --
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      F-14
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
8.  INCOME TAXES (CONTINUED)
    
   
    Pro forma income tax expense differs from  the statutory tax rate of 35%  as
applied to earnings before income taxes, as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                     1994       1995        1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>        <C>
                                                                                            (IN THOUSANDS)
Expected income tax expense (benefit)............................................  $   3,204  $   3,921     (25,295)
State income taxes, net of federal benefit.......................................        541        743      (3,650)
Non deductible deferred compensation.............................................        441      1,080      --
Non deductible transaction costs.................................................     --         --           3,281
Benefit not recorded due to net carryforward position............................     --         --          25,379
Other............................................................................        292        400         285
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
                                                                                   $   4,478  $   6,144      --
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
    The  tax  effects of  temporary differences  that  give rise  to significant
portions of deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented below:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                               1996
                                                                                          --------------
<S>                                                                                       <C>
                                                                                          (IN THOUSANDS)
 
Deferred tax assets:
 
  Federal net operating loss carryforward...............................................    $   22,483
  State net operating loss carryforwards................................................         1,622
  Deferred compensation.................................................................           772
  Accrued liabilities...................................................................           648
  Inventory reserves....................................................................           336
                                                                                          --------------
 
Total gross deferred tax assets.........................................................        25,861
                                                                                          --------------
 
Deferred tax liabilites
 
  Depreciation..........................................................................           140
  Other.................................................................................           342
                                                                                          --------------
Total gross deferred liabilities........................................................           482
                                                                                          --------------
Deferred tax assets net of deferred tax liabilities.....................................        25,379
                                                                                          --------------
 
Less valuation allowance................................................................        25,379
                                                                                          --------------
 
Net deferred tax assets.................................................................        --
                                                                                          --------------
                                                                                          --------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
In assessing  the realizability  of deferred  tax assets,  management  considers
whether  it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax
assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets  is
dependent  upon the  generation of future  taxable income during  the periods in
which  those  temporary  differences  become  deductible.  Management  considers
scheduled  reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income
and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. In order to fully realize
the deferred tax asset, the Company will need to generate future taxable  income
of  approximately $64 million prior to the  expiration of the net operating loss
carry forwards in 2011.
    
 
                                      F-15
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
8.  INCOME TAXES (CONTINUED)
    
   
    In connection  with the  Recapitalization, the  Company entered  into a  tax
indemnification agreement with its former sole stockholder pursuant to which the
Company  has  agreed to  indemnify  such stockholder  for  any loss,  damage, or
liability and all expenses incurred, suffered, sustained or required to be  paid
by  such  stockholder  in  the  event  that  certain  specified  aspects  of the
Recapitalization are not treated for tax purposes in the manner contemplated  by
the Recapitalization and related transactions.
    
 
   
9.  OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION
    
   
    Accrued Expenses
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                              DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                      ----------------------------
                                                                                          1995           1996
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                             (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                   <C>            <C>
Wages, salaries and benefits........................................................  $       2,218  $       2,161
Sales tax payable...................................................................          1,666          2,011
Profit sharing accrual..............................................................          1,272            786
Other...............................................................................          1,905          2,933
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                      $       7,061  $       7,891
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
10. PREFERRED STOCK
    
 
   
    REDEEMABLE SENIOR PREFERRED STOCK AND WARRANTS
    
 
   
    In  connection with the recapitalization,  the Company issued 800,000 shares
of 14%  Senior  Preferred  Stock  ("Senior Preferred  Stock")  with  an  initial
aggregate liquidation value of $20.0 million.
    
 
   
    Dividends  on  the Senior  Preferred Stock  accrue  at a  rate of  14%. Such
dividends are payable quarterly on each of  March 15, June 15, September 15  and
December  15, beginning June 15,  1996. On or prior  to June 15, 2002, dividends
shall not be payable  in cash to  holders, but shall,  whether or not  declared,
accrete  to the  liquidation value of  the Senior Preferred  Stock compounded on
each dividend payment date. Under certain circumstances the holders can elect to
receive additional shares of the Senior Preferred stock in lieu of accreting  to
the liquidation value.
    
 
   
    OPTIONAL REDEMPTION
    
 
   
    The  Company  may, at  its  option, to  the  extent that  funds  are legally
available for such payment, redeem, prior to June 15, 1999, in whole or in part,
shares of Senior  Preferred Stock at  a redemption  price equal to  103% of  the
liquidation  value thereof if such redemption  shall occur before June 15, 1997,
or 106% of the liquidation  value thereof if the  redemption occurs on or  after
June  15,  1997  to  and including  June  15,1999,  without  interest, PROVIDED,
HOWEVER, that an initial public offering  shall have occurred and the  aggregate
redemption  price of the Senior Preferred Stock does not exceed the net proceeds
received by the  Company in the  initial public offering.  In January 1997,  the
Company  and holders of all outstanding shares of Senior Preferred Stock entered
into an agreement  pursuant to  which the  Company will  redeem all  outstanding
shares  of  Senior Preferred  Stock  at 103%  of  the liquidation  value thereof
simultaneously with the consummation of the Offering.
    
 
                                      F-16
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
10. PREFERRED STOCK (CONTINUED)
    
   
    The Senior Preferred Stock is redeemable,  on or after June 15,1999, at  the
option  of the company at a price equal to a percentage of the liquidation value
as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                        PERCENTAGE OF
      YEAR BEGINNING JUNE 15,         LIQUIDATION VALUE
            -----------              -------------------
<S>                                  <C>
 1999..............................             110%
 2000..............................             108
 2001..............................             106
 2002..............................             104
 2003..............................             102
 2004 and thereafter...............             100
</TABLE>
    
 
   
    The Senior Preferred stock is mandatorially redeemable on June 15, 2008 at a
redemption price equal to the aggregate  liquidation value plus all accrued  and
unpaid cash dividends.
    
 
   
    Holders  of the Senior Preferred Stock have no voting rights with respect to
any matters except as provided  by law or as set  forth in the Senior  Preferred
Stock  Certificate of Determination. Such  Certificate of Determination provides
that in  the event  that (i)  dividends on  the Senior  Preferred Stock  are  in
arrears  and unpaid for  six consecutive quarterly periods  after June 15, 2002;
(ii) for any reason (including the  reason that funds are not legally  available
for  redemption),  the  Company shall  have  failed to  discharge  any mandatory
redemption obligation;  or (iii)  the Company  shall have  failed to  provide  a
notice  within the time period required by  a redemption pursuant to a Change of
Control (each of the foregoing, a "Voting Trigger"), the Board will be increased
by two directors and  the holders of the  Senior Preferred Stock, together  with
the  holders of shares of  every other series of  preferred stock of the Company
with like rights to vote for the election of two additional directors, voting as
a class,  will be  entitled to  elect two  directors to  the expanded  Board  of
Directors.  Such  voting  rights  will continue  until  the  Company  shall have
fulfilled its obligations that gave rise to a Voting Trigger.
    
 
   
    The Senior Preferred  Stock with respect  to dividend rights  and rights  on
liquidation,  winding up and dissolution, ranks Senior to Junior Preferred Stock
and the Common Stock.
    
 
   
    In connection with the  issuance of the Senior  Preferred Stock the  holders
received detachable warrants (in addition to the Senior Preferred Stock) for the
aggregate $20.0 million paid. The warrants are exchangeable for 73,684 Units (or
190,252 shares of Common Stock and 72,947 shares of Junior Preferred Stock).
    
 
   
    The  market value of the warrants at  issuance was deemed to be $6.5 million
with the  Senior Preferred  Stock  valued at  $13.5  million. The  warrants  are
exercisable  at  a price  of $0.01  per  Unit. The  Senior Preferred  stock will
accrete to its  redemption value  ($20.0 million) using  the effective  interest
method  through its  mandatory redemption  date of  June 15,  2008. The carrying
amount of the Senior Preferred Stock will be adjusted periodically for both  the
above noted accretion as well as by amounts representing dividends not currently
declared  or  paid, but  which will  be payable  under the  mandatory redemption
features.
    
 
   
    JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK
    
 
   
    The Company has  authorized the  issuance of up  to 1,500,000  shares of  8%
Junior Preferred Stock, $.01 par value ("Junior Preferred Stock").
    
 
   
    In connection with the Recapitalization 1,386,000 shares of Junior Preferred
Stock  were  issued. Each  outstanding  share of  Junior  Preferred Stock  has a
liquidation preference of $100.00. Dividends accrue at a rate of 8% per annum on
the sum  of the  liquidation preference  plus accumulated  but unpaid  dividends
thereon.
    
 
                                      F-17
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
10. PREFERRED STOCK (CONTINUED)
    
   
    The  Junior Preferred Stock  ranks junior to the  Senior Preferred Stock and
senior to  the Common  Stock, with  respect  to dividend  rights and  rights  on
liquidation.
    
 
   
    The  Company may be required  to mandatorily redeem all  or a portion of the
Junior Preferred Stock under certain conditions. Specifically, the company would
be required  to  redeem within  45  days of  an  initial public  offering  (IPO)
resulting  in a market capitalization of more than $500 million, at a redemption
price per share  equal to 100%  of the  liquidation value plus  all accrued  and
unpaid cash dividends as follows:
    
 
   
           (i)
           If  the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of less
           than $750 million but more than or equal to $500 million, the Company
    shall redeem up to 25% of  the outstanding shares of Junior Preferred  Stock
    held by each holder of such shares who requests redemption;
    
 
   
          (ii)
           If  the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of less
           than $1 billion but more than  or equal to $750 million, the  Company
    shall  redeem up to 50% of the  outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock
    held by each holder of such shares who request redemption; and
    
 
   
         (iii)
           If the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of  more
           than  or equal to $1 billion, the  Company shall redeem up to 100% of
    the outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock held by each holder of such
    shares who requests redemption.
    
 
   
    In the event the Company intends to consummate an IPO, the holders of  sixty
percent  (60%) of the outstanding Junior Preferred Stock may require the Company
to convert on  a PRO RATA  basis all or  any portion of  the outstanding  Junior
Preferred   Stock  into  shares  of  Common  Stock,  such  conversion  to  occur
automatically upon  the closing  of an  IPO. In  January 1997,  the Company  and
holders of the requisite number of shares of Junior Preferred Stock entered into
an  agreement pursuant to which each outstanding share of Junior Preferred Stock
will be converted  into 6.667 shares  of Common Stock  upon consummation of  the
Offering.
    
 
   
    Accumulated  but unpaid dividends  on the Junior  and Senior Preferred Stock
aggregated $7,951,000 as of December 31, 1996.
    
 
   
11. SALE-LEASEBACK TRANSACTIONS
    
   
    On  February  15,  1996,  the   Company  entered  into  two   sale-leaseback
transactions  with a related party-in-interest. The combined sale amount for the
two properties was $1,753,000  resulting in a $3,587  net gain for the  Company.
The  two properties are  leased back from  the related party-in-interest through
2006 for a combined monthly rental of $16,258.
    
 
   
12. PRO FORMA DATA (UNAUDITED)
    
   
    Prior to June 5, 1996, the Company elected to be treated as an S Corporation
for federal  and state  income  tax purposes.  Pro  forma information  has  been
provided  to reflect the estimated statutory provision for income taxes assuming
the Company has been taxed as a C corporation. See note 8.
    
 
   
    Pro forma net earnings per share has been computed by dividing pro forma net
earnings (loss) by the weighted average number of shares outstanding during  the
period.  The pro forma  net earnings (loss)  per share gives  effect to: (i) the
issuance of Common Stock sold in the Offering, including the underwriters'  full
over-allotment  option, the issuance of Common  Stock upon the conversion of all
outstanding shares of Junior  Preferred Stock in  connection with the  Offering,
the  issuance  of Common  Stock upon  the exercise  of outstanding  warrants and
common stock equivalents and  (ii) the redemption of  Common Stock from  certain
members of the Company's management upon consummation of the Offering.
    
 
                                      F-18
<PAGE>
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    
 
   
13. OFFERING (UNAUDITED)
    
   
    On  March 19,  1997, the Company  completed an initial  public offering (the
"Offering") of Common Stock pursuant to which it sold 6,750,000 shares of Common
Stock and  received approximately  $94.1 million  in net  cash proceeds  (before
deducting  expenses associated with the Offering). On April 15, 1997 the Company
sold an additional 1,012,500 shares of  Common Stock and received an  additional
$14.1  million in net  cash proceeds (before  deducting expenses associated with
the Offering) upon the  underwriters' exercise in  full of their  over-allotment
option.  Upon consummation  of the  Offering, the  outstanding shares  of Junior
Preferred Stock were  mandatorily converted  into shares  of Common  Stock at  a
ratio  of 6.667 shares of Common Stock  to each share of Junior Preferred Stock.
No accrued and  unpaid dividends  were paid on  any shares  of Junior  Preferred
Stock.  Approximately $22.9  million of the  net proceeds from  the Offering was
used to redeem,  at a premium  of 3%, all  of the outstanding  shares of  Senior
Preferred  Stock. As  a result, a  charge to  dividends will be  incurred by the
Company in the first  quarter of 1997 for  the difference between the  financial
statement  value of the Senior Preferred Stock and the face amount thereof, plus
the premium paid on  the Senior Preferred Stock.  Approximately $9.7 million  of
the  net proceeds from  the Offering was  used to repay  all amounts outstanding
under the  1996 Credit  Facility. In  addition, the  Company used  approximately
$18.4  million of  the net  proceeds from  the Offering  to redeem approximately
1,317,000 shares  of  Common  Stock. Immediately  following  the  Offering,  the
Company  called  for redemption,  at a  premium  of 10%,  an aggregate  of $33.3
million of Senior Notes. The Company used approximately $37.9 million of the net
proceeds from the Offering to redeem such Senior Notes on April 19, 1997 and  to
pay  all accrued and unpaid interest with respect to the Senior Notes called for
redemption. Accordingly, the Company anticipates that an extraordinary charge to
operations will be incurred equal to the premium paid on the Senior Notes called
for redemption  plus the  write-off  of one-third  of the  unamortized  deferred
financing fees associated with the issuance of such Senior Notes. The balance of
the  net proceeds  was retained  for general  corporate purposes,  including the
acquisition of two musical instruments stores in the Atlanta, Georgia market  in
April 1997.
    
 
   
    If  the  Offering  had been  consummated  on January  1,  1996, supplemental
earnings per share for the year ended  December 31, 1996 would be calculated  as
follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                        <C>
Earnings (loss) per common share per financial statements................  $ (72,409)
  Reduction of interest assumed repaid...................................     (4,619)
  Reduction of Junior and Senior Preferred Dividends.....................     (7,951)
                                                                           ---------
Supplemental earnings (loss).............................................    (59,839)
                                                                           ---------
                                                                           ---------
Supplemental earnings (loss) per share...................................  $   (2.93)
                                                                           ---------
                                                                           ---------
Weighted average shares used in calculation..............................     20,420
</TABLE>
    
 
   
14. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS (UNAUDITED)
    
   
    On April 16, 1997, the Company acquired all of the outstanding capital stock
of  Rhythm City,  Inc. ("Rhythm City"),  the operator of  two musical instrument
stores in the  Atlanta, Georgia  market for $10.3  million in  cash, subject  to
adjustment  based on the actual level of  working capital on such date and other
matters. The  purchase  price  included  the acquisition  of  the  building  and
improvements  of the flagship Rhythm City store  in Atlanta. All of the debt and
other liabilities of  Rhythm City  were either paid  or assumed  by the  sellers
prior to closing.
    
 
                                      F-19
<PAGE>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
   
    NO  DEALER, SALESPEOPLE OR OTHER PERSON IS AUTHORIZED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY
OFFERING MADE HEREBY TO GIVE ANY  INFORMATION OR TO MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION  NOT
CONTAINED  IN  THIS  PROSPECTUS, AND,  IF  GIVEN  OR MADE,  SUCH  INFORMATION OR
REPRESENTATIONS MUST  NOT  BE RELIED  UPON  AS  HAVING BEEN  AUTHORIZED  BY  THE
COMPANY.  THIS PROSPECTUS DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR A SOLICITATION
OF AN OFFER TO BUY  ANY SECURITY OTHER THAN  THE SECURITIES OFFERED HEREBY,  NOR
DOES  IT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR A SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY ANY OF
THE SECURITIES OFFERED HEREBY TO ANY PERSON  IN ANY JURISDICTION IN WHICH IT  IS
UNLAWFUL  TO MAKE  SUCH AN  OFFER OR  SOLICITATION TO  SUCH PERSON.  NEITHER THE
DELIVERY OF  THIS  PROSPECTUS  NOR  ANY SALE  MADE  HEREUNDER  SHALL  UNDER  ANY
CIRCUMSTANCE  CREATE ANY  IMPLICATION THAT  THE INFORMATION  CONTAINED HEREIN IS
CORRECT AS OF ANY DATE SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE HEREOF.
    
 
                                 --------------
 
   
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           PAGE
<S>                                                                       <C>
Additional Information..................................................      2
Summary.................................................................      3
Risk Factors............................................................     10
The Recapitalization and Related Transactions...........................     15
Use of Proceeds.........................................................     16
Capitalization..........................................................     16
Selected Historical Financial Data......................................     17
Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Financial Data............................     19
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
  of Operations.........................................................     23
Business................................................................     29
Management..............................................................     39
Principal Stockholders..................................................     52
Certain Transactions....................................................     54
Description of Notes....................................................     57
Description of the 1996 Credit Facility.................................     79
Plan of Distribution....................................................     81
Legal Matters...........................................................     81
Experts.................................................................     81
Index to Financial Statements...........................................    F-1
</TABLE>
    
 
   
                                     [LOGO]
 
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
    
 
   
                                  $66,667,000
    
 
   
                           11% SENIOR NOTES DUE 2006
    
 
                               -----------------
 
   
                                   PROSPECTUS
    
                               -----------------
 
   
                                 APRIL 23, 1997
    
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
   
                                    PART II
                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
    
 
   
ITEM 13.  OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
    
 
   
    The  estimated expenses in connection with the  offering of the Notes are as
follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXPENSE                                                                              AMOUNT
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ------------
<S>                                                                               <C>
The Commission's Registration Fee...............................................  $     34,483
Printing Expenses...............................................................        63,000
Legal Fees and Expenses.........................................................       100,000
Accounting Fees and Expenses....................................................        85,000
Miscellaneous Expenses..........................................................        22,000
                                                                                  ------------
    Total.......................................................................  $    304,483
                                                                                  ------------
                                                                                  ------------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
ITEM 14.  INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS.
    
 
   
    The Certificate of  Incorporation of  Guitar Center,  Inc. (the  "Company"),
provides  that, to the extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law,
a director or  officer shall  not be  personally liable  to the  Company or  its
stockholders  for  monetary damages  arising from  a  breach of  their fiduciary
duties to  the Company  and its  stockholders, to  the extent  permitted by  the
Delaware  General Corporation Law. Such limitation  of liability does not affect
the availability of equitable remedies such as injunctive relief or rescission.
    
 
   
    The  Company's  Amended  and  Restated  Bylaws,  as  in  effect  immediately
following  the consummation  of the  Offering (the  "Bylaws"), provide  that the
Company shall  indemnify  its  directors  and officers  to  the  fullest  extent
permitted  by  applicable  law.  The Company  has  entered  into indemnification
agreements with its directors and executive officers containing provisions which
are in  some  respects  broader than  the  specific  indemnification  provisions
contained  in the Delaware General Corporation  Law. Such agreements require the
Company, among other things, (i) to indemnify its officers and directors against
certain liabilities  that may  arise by  reason of  their status  or service  as
directors  or officers provided such persons acted in good faith and in a manner
reasonably believed to be in the best interests of the Company and, with respect
to any criminal action, had no cause to believe their conduct was unlawful; (ii)
to advance the  expenses actually and  reasonable incurred by  its officers  and
directors  as a result of any proceeding against  them as to which they could be
indemnified; and (iii) to obtain directors' and officers' insurance if available
on reasonable  terms.  There is  no  action or  proceeding  pending or,  to  the
knowledge   of  the  Company,  threatened  which  may  result  in  a  claim  for
indemnification by any director, officer, employee or agent of the Company.
    
 
   
    Policies of insurance may  be obtained and maintained  by the Company  under
which  its directors and officers will be insured, within the limits and subject
to the limitations of the policies, against certain expenses in connection  with
the  defense of, and certain liabilities which  might be imposed as a result of,
actions, suits or proceedings to  which they are parties  by reason of being  or
having been such directors or officers.
    
 
   
ITEM 15.  RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.
    
 
   
    All  capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein, shall have the meanings
ascribed to  such  terms  in  Part I  of  this  Registration  Statement.  Unless
otherwise  indicated herein, share  and Unit numbers  do not give  effect to the
2.582-to-1 stock split effectuated by the Company on January 15, 1997 or to  the
Junior Preferred Stock Conversion.
    
 
   
    In  June 1996,  Guitar Center  Management Company,  Inc. (the "Predecessor")
effected a Recapitalization in  order to transfer  ownership of the  Predecessor
from  its sole stockholder, the  Scherr Trust, to members  of management and the
Investors. The Recapitalization included the following transactions: (i) members
of the Predecessor's  management purchased 500,000  shares of the  Predecessor's
common  stock, no  par value ("Predecessor  Common Stock"), for  $0.5 million in
cash; (ii) members of  the Predecessor's management  received 495,000 shares  of
junior   preferred   stock,  no   par   value  ("Predecessor   Junior  Preferred
    
 
                                      II-1
<PAGE>
Stock"), with an aggregate liquidation preference of $49.5 million, in  exchange
for  cancellation of  outstanding options  exercisable for  49,500,000 shares of
Predecessor Common  Stock; (iii)  the Scherr  Trust received  198,000 shares  of
Predecessor  Junior Preferred Stock, with an aggregate liquidation preference of
$19.8 million, in exchange  for 19,800,000 shares  of Predecessor Common  Stock;
(iv)  the Investors  purchased 700,000  shares of  Predecessor Common  Stock and
693,000 shares of Predecessor Junior Preferred Stock for $70.0 million in  cash;
(v) the DLJ Investors purchased 800,000 shares of 14% senior preferred stock, no
par  value  (the  "Predecessor  Senior  Preferred  Stock"),  with  an  aggregate
liquidation value of $20.0 million, and warrants (the "Predecessor Warrants") to
purchase 73,684  shares  of  Predecessor  Common  Stock  and  72,947  shares  of
Predecessor  Junior Preferred  Stock, for an  aggregate purchase  price of $20.0
million in cash;  (vi) DLJ  Bridge purchased $51.0  million aggregate  principal
amount  of unsecured increasing rate notes for  cash. All shares numbers in this
paragraph give effect to a 100 to  1 stock split effected by the Predecessor  on
June  5,  1996. Such  transactions were  exempt from  registration by  virtue of
Section 3(a)(9) or Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
 
   
    In June  1996,  the Predecessor  granted  to certain  employees  options  to
purchase  an  aggregate of  60,399  Units (a  unit  consisting of  one  share of
Predecessor Common  Stock  and  99/100ths  of  a  share  of  Predecessor  Junior
Preferred  Stock (each  a "Predecessor Unit"))  pursuant to its  1996 Plan. Such
transactions were exempt by  virtue of Section  4(2) of and  Rule 701 under  the
Securities Act. In June 1996, the Predecessor granted options to purchase 43,344
Predecessor Units to each of Messrs. Larry Thomas and Marty Albertson, executive
officers  of the Predecessor. Such transactions were exempt by virtue of Section
4(2) of the Securities Act. The Company expects to file a Registration Statement
on Form S-8 to register the shares issuable upon exercise of such options.
    
 
   
    In July 1996, the  Company sold $100 million  aggregate principal amount  of
11%  senior notes due  2006 ("Senior Notes")  to DLJ and  Chase Securities. Such
transaction was exempt by virtue of Section 4(2) of the Securities Act. DLJ  and
Chase  Securities resold an aggregate of $100 million principal amount of Senior
Notes to "Qualified Institutional  Investors" (within the  meaning of Rule  144A
under the Securities Act) in transactions meeting the requirements of Rule 144A.
    
 
   
    The  Company was  incorporated in Delaware  in October 1996.  Pursuant to an
agreement and plan of merger, the  Predecessor merged with and into the  Company
in  October  1996 and  each share  of  Predecessor Common  Stock, each  share of
Predecessor Junior Preferred Stock, each  share of Predecessor Senior  Preferred
Stock,  each Warrant to purchase Predecessor Common Stock and Predecessor Junior
Preferred Stock, and  each employee  option to purchase  Predecessor Units  were
converted into one share of Common Stock, $.01 par value of the Company ("Common
Stock"),  one share  of Junior  Preferred Stock, $.01  par value  of the Company
("Junior Preferred Stock"), one share of Senior Preferred Stock, $.01 par  value
of  the Company, a Warrant  to purchase Common Stock  and Junior Preferred Stock
and an employee option to purchase units of the Registrant (each unit consisting
of one share of Common Stock and 99/100ths of a share of Junior Preferred  Stock
(each, a "Unit")), respectively. Such transaction is exempt by virtue of Section
4(2) of and Rule 145 under the Securities Act.
    
 
   
    In February 1996, certain employees of the Company purchased 3,100 Units for
an  aggregate  purchase  price  of  approximately  $0.3  million  pursuant  to a
Supplemental Employee Stock Purchase Plan of the Company. Such transactions were
exempt by virtue of Section 4(2) of  the Rules 505 and 506 under the  Securities
Act.
    
 
   
    In  January 1997,  the Company granted  options to purchase  an aggregate of
17,338 Units to two executive officers of the Company, pursuant to its 1996 Plan
and the terms of their employment  agreements. Such transactions were exempt  by
virtue  of Section  4(2) of the  Securities Act.  The Company expects  to file a
registration statement on Form S-8 to register the shares issuable upon exercise
of such options.
    
 
   
    Upon consummation of the  Company's initial public  offering in March  1997,
all  outstanding shares of  Junior Preferred Stock  were automatically converted
into Common Stock at a ratio of 6.667  shares of Common Stock for each share  of
Junior Preferred Stock. Such transaction was exempt by virtue of Section 3(a)(9)
of the Securities Act.
    
 
                                      II-2
<PAGE>
   
ITEM 16.  EXHIBITS.
    
 
   
(a) Exhibits. See Exhibit Index
    
 
   
(b) Financial Statements Schedules:
    
 
   
    II.  Valuation and Qualifying Accounts...................................S-1
    
 
   
    All  other schedules  are omitted  because the  required information  is not
present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule pursuant  to
the  applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission
or because the information required is  included in the financial statements  or
notes thereto.
    
 
   
ITEM 17.  UNDERTAKINGS.
    
 
   
    Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising out the Securities Act of
1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), may be permitted to directors, officers
and  controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions,
or otherwise,  the registrant  has been  advised  that, in  the opinion  of  the
Securities  and  Exchange  Commission, such  indemnification  is  against public
policy as expressed in  the Act and is,  therefore, unenforceable. In the  event
that  a  claim  for indemnification  against  such liabilities  (other  than the
payment by the registrant of expenses  incurred or paid by a directors,  officer
or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense in any action,
suit  or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person
in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will,  unless
in  the  opinion of  its  counsel the  matter  has been  settled  by controlling
precedent, submit to a  court of appropriate  jurisdiction the question  whether
such  indemnification  by  it  is  against public  policy  as  expressed  in the
Securities Act and will by governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
    
 
   
    The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:
    
 
   
           (1)
           For purposes of determining any  liability under the Securities  Act,
           the  information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of
    this registration statement in  reliance upon Rule 430A  and contained in  a
    form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4)
    or  497(h) under  the Securities Act  shall by deemed  to be a  part of this
    registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
    
 
   
           (2)
           For the purpose  of determining  any liability  under the  Securities
           Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus
    shall  be  deemed  to  be  a  new  registration  statement  relating  to the
    securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time
    shall be deemed to be the initial BONA FIDE offering thereof.
    
 
   
    The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide the Underwriters  at
the  closing  specified  in  the Underwriting  Agreement,  certificates  in such
denominations and registered in  such names as required  by the Underwriters  to
permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
    
 
                                      II-3
<PAGE>
   
                        SIGNATURES AND POWER OF ATTORNEY
    
 
   
    Pursuant  to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the
Registrant has duly caused this  Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to  Registration
Statement  to  be  signed  on  its behalf  by  the  undersigned,  thereunto duly
authorized, in the City of Los Angeles, State of California on this 18th day  of
April, 1997.
    
 
   
                                      GUITAR CENTER, INC.
    
 
   
                                      By:            /s/ LARRY THOMAS
    
   
 
    
                                      ------------------------------------------
   
                                         Name: Larry Thomas
    
   
                                         Title: PRESIDENT AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE
                                      OFFICER
    
 
   
    Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this
Post-Effective  Amendment No. 1 to Registration Statement has been signed by the
following persons in the capacities indicated on the dates indicated.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<C>                                                     <S>                                  <C>
                         NAME                                          TITLE                         DATE
- ------------------------------------------------------  -----------------------------------  --------------------
                   /s/ LARRY THOMAS                     President, Chief Executive Officer
     -------------------------------------------         and Director (Principal Executive      April 18, 1997
                     Larry Thomas                        Officer)
 
                    /s/ BRUCE ROSS                      Vice President, Chief Financial
     -------------------------------------------         Officer and Secretary (Principal       April 18, 1997
                      Bruce Ross                         Financial and Accounting Officer)
 
                 /s/ MARTY ALBERTSON
     -------------------------------------------        Executive Vice President, Chief         April 18, 1997
                   Marty Albertson                       Operating Officer and Director
 
                  /s/ RAYMOND SCHERR
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                April 18, 1997
                    Raymond Scherr
 
                 */s/ DAVID FERGUSON
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                April 18, 1997
                    David Ferguson
 
                  /s/ JEFFREY WALKER
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                April 18, 1997
                    Jeffrey Walker
 
                 */s/ MICHAEL LAZARUS
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                April 18, 1997
                   Michael Lazarus
 
                   /s/ STEVEN BURGE
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                April 18, 1997
                     Steven Burge
 
                 *By: /s/ BRUCE ROSS
     -------------------------------------------
                      Bruce Ross                                                                April 18, 1997
                   ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      II-4
<PAGE>
   
                                                                     SCHEDULE II
    
 
   
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                       VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
                          YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996
                             (AMOUNTS IN THOUSANDS)
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                         BALANCE AT    ADDITIONS   DEDUCTIONS                BALANCE
                                                          BEGINNING   CHARGED TO      FROM                   AT END
                                                           OF YEAR    OPERATIONS    ALLOWANCE     OTHER      OF YEAR
                                                         -----------  -----------  -----------  ---------  -----------
<S>                                                      <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>        <C>
December 31, 1996
  Allowance for doubtful receivables...................   $     200       --        $     (50)     --       $     150
  Allowance for obsolesence & damaged goods............   $     100    $     500       --          --       $     600
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      S-1
<PAGE>
   
                                 EXHIBIT INDEX
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
  EXHIBIT
  NUMBER                                                DESCRIPTION                                               PAGE
- -----------  -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<C>          <S>                                                                                                <C>
      3.1    The Company's Restated Certificate of Incorporation (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.5 of
             the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
      3.2    The Company's Amended and Restated Bylaws (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.7 of the
             Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
      4.1    Indenture dated as of July 2, 1996 by and between the Company and U.S. Trust Company of
             California as trustee (previously filed as Exhibit 4.1 of the Company's Registration Statement
             No. 333-10491)
      4.2    Form of Restricted Stock Agreements dated as of May 1, 1996 between the Company and certain
             members of management (previously filed as Exhibit 4.2 of the Company's Registration Statement
             No. 333-10491)
      4.3    Warrants (1-4) dated June 5, 1996 for the purchase of shares of Common Stock and Junior Preferred
             Stock issued to certain investors (previously filed as Exhibit 4.3 of the Company's Registration
             Statement No. 333-10491)
      4.4    Form of Stock Certificate (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Company's Registration
             Statement No. 333-20931)
      5.1    Opinion of Buchalter, Nemer, Fields & Younger, a Professional Corporation, relating to the
             validity of the Notes (previously filed as Exhibit 5.1 of the Company's Registration Statement
             No. 333-10491)
     10.1    Recapitalization Agreement dated May 1, 1996 by and among the Company and the stockholders named
             therein (previously filed as Exhibit 10.1 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.2    Registration Rights Agreement dated June 5, 1996 among the Company and the stockholders named
             therein (previously filed as Exhibit 10.2 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.3    Tax Indemnification Agreement dated as of May 1, 1996 by and among the Company, Ray Scherr, and
             the individuals identified on the signature pages thereto (previously filed as Exhibit 10.3 of
             the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.4    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Lawrence Thomas (previously filed
             as Exhibit 10.5 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.5    The Company's Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (Incorporated by reference
             to Exhibit 10.5 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.6    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Marty Albertson (previously filed
             as Exhibit 10.6 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.7    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Bruce Ross, as amended
             (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.8    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Raymond Scherr (previously filed
             as Exhibit 10.8 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.9    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Barry Soosman, as amended
             (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.9 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.10   Securities Purchase Agreement dated June 5, 1996 by and among the Company and the parties named
             therein (previously filed as Exhibit 10.10 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
</TABLE>
    
<PAGE>
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
  EXHIBIT
  NUMBER                                                DESCRIPTION                                               PAGE
- -----------  -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<C>          <S>                                                                                                <C>
     10.11   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and each of its directors and executive
             officers (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 of the Company's Registration Statement No.
             333-20931)
     10.12   Credit Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. (previously
             filed as Exhibit 10.12 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.13   Revolving Promissory Note dated June 5, 1996 issued by the Company in favor of Wells Fargo Bank,
             N.A. in the principal amount of $25,000,000 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.13 of the Company's
             Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.14   Security Agreement dated June 5, 1996 between the Company and Wells Fargo, N.A. (previously filed
             as Exhibit 10.14 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.15   Registration Rights Agreement dated July 2, 1996 by and among the Company, Chase Securities Inc.
             and Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation (previously filed as Exhibit 10.15 of the
             Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.16   Management Stock Option Agreement dated June 5, 1996 by and between the Company and Lawrence
             Thomas (previously filed as Exhibit 10.16 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.17   Management Stock Option Agreement dated June 5, 1996 by and between the Company and Marty
             Albertson (previously filed as Exhibit 10.17 of the Company's Registration Statement on No.
             333-10491)
     10.18   Registration Agreement dated June 5, 1996 among the Company and the parties named therein
             (previously filed as Exhibit 10.11 contained in Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.19   Stockholders Agreement dated June 5, 1996 among the Company, and the investors listed therein
             (previously filed as Exhibit 10.19 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.20   Purchase Agreement and Escrow Instructions dated February 15, 1996 by and between the Company and
             G.C. Realty LLC (Arlington, Texas) (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.20 of the Company's
             Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.21   Purchase Agreement and Escrow Instructions dated February 15, 1996 by and between the Company and
             G.C. Realty LLC (North Chicago, Illinois) (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.21 of the
             Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.22   Offer, Agreement and Escrow Instructions for Purchase of Real Estate dated August 11, 1995 by and
             between Raymond I. Scherr and Guitar Center Management Company, Inc., Profit Sharing Plan (South
             Chicago, Illinois) (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.22 of the Company's Registration
             Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.23   Lease dated August 31, 1995 by and between G.C. Realty LLC and the Company (Covina, California)
             (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.23 of the Company's Registration Statement No.
             333-20931)
     10.24   Amendment No. 1 to Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (Incorporated by
             reference to Exhibit 10.24 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.25   Form of Employee Stock Purchase Plan Agreement (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.25 of the
             Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.26   1997 Equity Participation Plan (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.26 of the Company's
             Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.27   Stockholders Consent dated as of January 24, 1997 by and among the Company and certain of its
             stockholders (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.27 of the Company's Registration Statement
             No. 333-20931)
</TABLE>
    
<PAGE>
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
  EXHIBIT
  NUMBER                                                DESCRIPTION                                               PAGE
- -----------  -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<C>          <S>                                                                                                <C>
     10.28   Modification to Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (Incorporated by
             reference to Exhibit 10.28 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.29   Management Stock Repurchase Agreement (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.29 of the
             Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.30   Amendment No. 2 to the Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (Incorporated by
             reference to Exhibit 10.30 of the Company's Registration Statement No. 333-20931)
     10.31   Amendment No. 1 to Management Stock Option Agreement dated as of October 15, 1996 between the
             Company and Larry Thomas (previously filed as Exhibit 10.21 contained in Registration Statement
             No. 333-10491)
     10.32   Amendment No. 1 to Management Stock Option Agreement dated as of October 15, 1996 between the
             Company and Marty Albertson (previously filed as Exhibit 10.22 contained in Registration
             Statement No. 333-10491)
     10.33   Notice of Redemption of $33,333,000 aggregate principal amount of 11% Senior Notes due 2006
             (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.33 of the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the
             year ended December 31, 1996)
     10.34   Board Representation Agreement dated June 5, 1996 (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.35 of
             the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996)
     10.35   First Supplemental Indenture dated as of November 1, 1996 by and between Guitar Center Management
             Company, Inc. (the Company's predecessor), the Company and U.S. Trust Company of California, as
             trustee
     12.1    Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 12.1 of the Company's
             Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996)
     16.1    Consent of Ernst & Young LLP
     23.1    Consent of KPMG Peat Marwick LLP, the Company's independent auditors
     23.2    Consent of Ernst & Young LLP
     23.3    Consent of Buchalter, Nemer, Fields & Younger, a Professional Corporation (included in Exhibit
             5.1)
     24.1    Power of Attorney (previously filed as Exhibit 24.1 contained in Registration Statement No.
             333-10491)
     25.1    Form T-1 Statement of Eligibility of Trustee (previously filed as Exhibit 25.1 to the Company's
             Registration Statement No. 333-10491)
     27.1    Financial Data Schedule (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 27.1 of the Company's Registration
             Statement on Form S-1 (Registration No. 333-20931))
</TABLE>
    

<PAGE>

                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.35




                          FIRST SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE

                                  BY AND AMONG

                     GUITAR CENTER MANAGEMENT COMPANY, INC.

                               GUITAR CENTER, INC.

                                       AND

                     U.S. TRUST COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, N.A.

                                   AS TRUSTEE

                                  $100,000,000

                         DATED:  AS OF NOVEMBER 1, 1996

                            11% SENIOR NOTES DUE 2006

<PAGE>

          THIS FIRST SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE, dated as of November 1, 1996, is
made and entered into by and between GUITAR CENTER MANAGEMENT COMPANY, INC., a
California corporation ("GC-California"), GUITAR CENTER, INC., Delaware
corporation ("GC-Delaware"), and U.S. TRUST COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, N.A. (the
"Trustee").
                                    RECITALS:

          WHEREAS, GC-California and the Trustee have heretofore entered into an
Indenture, dated as of July 2, 1996 (the "Indenture"), relating to the issuance
of $100,000,000 11% senior notes due 2006 (the "Securities");

          WHEREAS, GC-California proposes to merge with and into GC-Delaware in
order to reincorporate from California to Delaware pursuant to the terms and
conditions set forth in the Merger Agreement between GC-California and
GC-Delaware, dated as of November 1, 1996;

          WHEREAS, the respective Boards of Directors and stockholders of GC-
California and GC-Delaware have approved such merger;

          WHEREAS, Section 5.1 of Article Five of the Indenture provides in
pertinent part that GC-California shall not merge with or into any other
corporation unless the person (if other than GC-California) into which
GC-California is merged shall be a corporation organized and existing under the
laws of any state of the United States and shall expressly assume, by an
indenture supplemental to the Indenture, executed and delivered to the Trustee,
in a form satisfactory to the Trustee, all the obligations of GC-California
under the Securities and the Indenture;


                                        2

<PAGE>

          WHEREAS, GC-California and GC-Delaware are providing this First
Supplemental Indenture in satisfaction of the requirements of Section 5.1 of
Article Five of the Indenture;

          NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:

               SECTION 1. ASSUMPTION OF OBLIGATIONS.  GC-Delaware hereby assumes
each and all of the obligations of GC-California, whether presently existing or
hereafter arising, under the Securities and the Indenture pursuant to Section
5.1 of Article Five of the Indenture and agrees to be bound by each and all of
the terms and conditions of the Indenture.

               SECTION 2. AMENDMENT TO INDENTURE.  All references in the
Indenture to "the Company" are hereby amended to refer to GC-Delaware whenever
and wherever used in the Indenture.  Except for such amendments, the Indenture
remains in full force and effect.

               SECTION 3. COUNTERPARTS.  This First Supplemental Indenture may
be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall be an original and all
of which shall constitute but one and the same agreement.


                                        3

<PAGE>

               IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this First
Supplemental Indenture to be duly executed.

Dated:  October 28, 1996      GUITAR CENTER MANAGEMENT COMPANY, INC.,
                              a California corporation


Attest:  /s/ BRUCE L. ROSS    By: /s/ MARTY ALBERTSON
        ------------------        -----------------------------------------

                              Title: Chief Operating Officer
                                     --------------------------------------

Dated:  October 28, 1996      GUITAR CENTER, INC.,
                              a Delaware corporation


Attest:  /s/ BRUCE L. ROSS    By: /s/ MARTY ALBERTSON
        ------------------        -----------------------------------------

                              Title: Chief Operating Officer
                                     --------------------------------------

Dated:  October 28, 1996      U.S. TRUST COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA,
                              N.A., as Trustee


Attest:  /s/ AGNES P. OBANDO  By: /s/ SANDEE PARKS
        ------------------        -----------------------------------------

                              Title: Vice President
                                     --------------------------------------


                                        4

<PAGE>

STATE OF CALIFORNIA      )
                         ) ss.
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES    )


          On October 28, 1996, before me, the undersigned, a Notary Public in
and for said State, personally appeared Marty Albertson, known to me to be the
C.O.O. of GUITAR CENTER MANAGEMENT COMPANY, INC. the corporation that executed
the within instrument, known to me to be the person who executed the within
instrument on behalf of such corporation, and acknowledged to me that such
corporation executed the within instrument pursuant to its bylaws or a
resolution of its board of Directors.

          WITNESS my hand and official seal.

     [SEAL]                                  /s/ LESLIE GEDDRY
                                        ---------------------------------
                                          Notary Public in and for said
                                                 County and State




STATE OF CALIFORNIA      )
                         ) ss.
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES    )

          On October 28, 1996, before me, the undersigned, a Notary Public in
and for said State, personally appeared Marty Albertson known to me to be the
C.O.O. of GUITAR CENTER, INC. the corporation that executed the within
instrument, known to me to be the person who executed the within instrument on
behalf of such corporation, and acknowledged to me that such corporation
executed the within instrument pursuant to its bylaws or a resolution of its
board of Directors.

          WITNESS my hand and official seal.

     [SEAL]                                  /s/ LESLIE GEDDREY
                                        --------------------------------
                                         Notary Public in and for said
                                                County and State


                                        5
<PAGE>

STATE OF CALIFORNIA      )
                         ) ss.
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES    )

          On November 8, 1996, before me, the undersigned, a Notary Public in
and for said State, personally appeared Sandee Parks, known to me to be the
___________ of U.S. TRUST COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, N.A. the corporation that
executed the within instrument, known to me to be the person who executed the
within instrument on behalf of such corporation, and acknowledged to me that
such corporation executed the within instrument pursuant to its bylaws or a
resolution of its board of Directors.

          WITNESS my hand and official seal.

     [SEAL]                                  /s/ DONNA M. NAKAMURA
                                        --------------------------------
                                         Notary Public in and for said
                                                County and State


                                        6

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 16.1
 
Securities and Exchange Commission
450 Fifth Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20549
 
Gentlemen:
 
   
We  have  read  the statements  under  the  heading "Experts"  contained  in the
Registration Statement on Form  S-1 (No. 333-10491) of  Guitar Center, Inc.  and
are in agreement with the statements contained in the third paragraph therein.
    
 
                                          ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
   
April 18, 1997
    

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.1
 
                        CONSENT OF KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
 
The Board of Directors
Guitar Center, Inc.:
 
    The  audit referred to in  our report dated February  10, 1997, included the
related financial statement schedule as of  and for the year ended December  31,
1996,  included in the registration statement. This financial statement schedule
is the  responsibility of  the Company's  management. Our  responsibility is  to
express  an opinion on this financial statement  schedule based on our audit. In
our opinion, such financial statement  schedule, when considered in relation  to
the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly in
all material respects the information set forth therein.
 
    We  consent to the use of our report included herein and to the reference to
our firm under the heading "Experts" in the prospectus.
 
                                          KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
 
   
Los Angeles, California
April 18, 1997
    

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.2
 
   
                          CONSENT OF ERNST & YOUNG LLP
    
 
   
    We  consent to the reference to our  firm under the caption "Experts" and to
the use of our report dated March  6, 1996, in the Registration Statement  (Form
S-1  No. 333-10491) and related Prospectus of Guitar Center Inc. dated March 10,
1997.
    
 
                                          ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
   
Los Angeles, California
April 18, 1997
    


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission